Secs. 301, 304(h), 307 and 501(a), Pub. L. 95-217, 91 Stat. 1566,
(a) The procedures prescribed herein shall, except as noted in §§ 136.4, 136.5, and 136.6, be used to perform the measurements indicated whenever the waste constituent specified is required to be measured for:
(1) An application submitted to the Administrator, or to a State having an approved NPDES program for a permit under section 402 of the Clean Water Act of 1977, as amended (CWA), and/or to reports required to be submitted under NPDES permits or other requests for quantitative or qualitative effluent data under parts 122 to 125 of title 40; and
(2) Reports required to be submitted by dischargers under the NPDES established by parts 124 and 125 of this chapter; and
(3) Certifications issued by States pursuant to section 401 of the CWA, as amended.
(b) The procedure prescribed herein and in part 503 of title 40 shall be used to perform the measurements required for an application submitted to the Administrator or to a State for a sewage sludge permit under section 405(f) of the Clean Water Act and for recordkeeping and reporting requirements under part 503 of title 40.
(c) For the purposes of the NPDES program, when more than one test procedure is approved under this part for the analysis of a pollutant or pollutant parameter, the test procedure must be sufficiently sensitive as defined at 40 CFR 122.21(e)(3) and 122.44(i)(1)(iv).
As used in this part, the term:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(a) Parameters or pollutants, for which methods are approved, are listed together with test procedure descriptions and references in Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, IF, IG, and IH. The methods listed in Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, IF, IG, and IH are incorporated by reference, see paragraph (b) of this section, with the exception of EPA Methods 200.7, 601-613, 624, 625, 1613, 1624, and 1625. The full texts of Methods 601-613, 624, 625, 1613, 1624, and 1625 are printed in appendix A of this part 136, and the full text of Method 200.7 is printed in appendix C of this part 136. The full text for determining the method detection limit when using the test procedures is given in appendix B of this part 136. The full text of Method 200.7 is printed in appendix C of this part 136. In the event of a conflict between the reporting requirements of 40 CFR parts 122 and 125 and any reporting requirements associated with the methods listed in these tables, the provisions of 40 CFR parts 122 and 125 are controlling and will determine a permittee's reporting requirements. The full text of the referenced test procedures are incorporated by reference into Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, IF, IG, and IH. The discharge parameter values for which reports are required must be determined by one of the standard analytical test procedures incorporated by reference and described in Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, IF, IG, and IH or by any alternate test procedure which has been approved by the Administrator under the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section and §§ 136.4 and 136.5. Under certain circumstances paragraph (c) of this section, § 136.5(a) through (d) or 40 CFR 401.13, other additional or alternate test procedures may be used.
(b) The documents required in this section are incorporated by reference into this section with approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the documents may be obtained from the sources listed in paragraph (b) of this section. Documents may be inspected at EPA's Water Docket, EPA West, 1301 Constitution Avenue NW., Room B102, Washington, DC (Telephone: 202-566-2426); or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
(1) Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati OH (US EPA). Available at
(i) Microbiological Methods for Monitoring the Environment, Water, and Wastes. 1978. EPA/600/8-78/017, Pub. No. PB-290329/A.S.
(A) Part III Analytical Methodology, Section B Total Coliform Methods, page 108. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(B) Part III Analytical Methodology, Section B Total Coliform Methods, 2.6.2 Two-Step Enrichment Procedure, page 111. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(C) Part III Analytical Methodology, Section B Total Coliform Methods, 4 Most Probable Number (MPN) Method, page 114. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(D) Part III Analytical Methodology, Section C Fecal Coliform Methods, 2 Direct Membrane Filter (MF) Method, page 124. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(E) Part III, Analytical Methodology, Section C Fecal Coliform Methods, 5 Most Probable Number (MPN) Method, page 132. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(F) Part III Analytical Methodology, Section D Fecal Streptococci, 2 Membrane Filter (MF) Method, page 136. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(G) Part III Analytical Methodology, Section D Fecal Streptococci, 4 Most Probable Number Method, page 139. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(H) Part III Analytical Methodology, Section D Fecal Streptococci, 5 Pour Plate Method, page 143. Table IA, Note 3; Table IH, Note 3.
(ii) [Reserved]
(2) Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati OH (US EPA). Available at
(i) Method 300.1 (including Errata Cover Sheet, April 27, 1999), Determination of Inorganic Ions in Drinking Water by Ion Chromatography, Revision 1.0, 1997. Table IB, Note 52.
(ii) Method 551, Determination of Chlorination Disinfection Byproducts and Chlorinated Solvents in Drinking Water by Liquid-Liquid Extraction and Gas Chromatography With Electron-Capture Detection. 1990. Table IF.
(3) National Exposure Risk Laboratory-Cincinnati, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati OH (US EPA). Available from
(i) Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples. August 1993. EPA/600/R-93/100, Pub. No. PB 94120821. Table IB, Note 52.
(A) Method 180.1, Determination of Turbidity by Nephelometry. Revision 2.0. Table IB, Note 52.
(B) Method 300.0, Determination of Inorganic Anions by Ion Chromatography. Revision 2.1. Table IB, Note 52.
(C) Method 335.4, Determination of Total Cyanide by Semi-Automated Colorimetry. Revision 1.0. Table IB, Notes 52 and 57.
(D) Method 350.1, Determination of Ammonium Nitrogen by Semi-Automated Colorimetry. Revision 2.0. Table IB, Notes 30 and 52.
(E) Method 351.2, Determination of Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen by Semi-Automated Colorimetry. Revision 2.0. Table IB, Note 52.
(F) Method 353.2, Determination of Nitrate-Nitrite Automated Colorimetry. Revision 2.0. Table IB, Note 52.
(G) Method 365.1, Determination of Phosphorus by Automated Colorimetry. Revision 2.0. Table IB, Note 52.
(H) Method 375.2, Determination of Sulfate by Automated Colorimetry. Revision 2.0. Table IB, Note 52.
(I) Method 410.4, Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand by Semi-Automated Colorimetry. Revision 2.0. Table IB, Note 52.
(ii) Methods for the Determination of Metals in Environmental Samples, Supplement I. May 1994. EPA/600/R-94/111, Pub. No. PB 95125472. Table IB, Note 52.
(A) Method 200.7, Determination of Metals and Trace Elements in Water and Wastes by Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry. Revision 4.4. Table IB, Note 52.
(B) Method 200.8, Determination of Trace Elements in Water and Wastes by Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometry. Revision 5.3. Table IB, Note 52.
(C) Method 200.9, Determination of Trace Elements by Stabilized Temperature Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. Revision 2.2. Table IB, Note 52.
(D) Method 218.6, Determination of Dissolved Hexavalent Chromium in Drinking Water, Groundwater, and Industrial Wastewater Effluents by Ion Chromatography. Revision 3.3. Table IB, Note 52.
(E) Method 245.1, Determination of Mercury in Water by Cold Vapor Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. Revision 3.0. Table IB, Note 52.
(4) National Exposure Risk Laboratory-Cincinnati, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati OH (US EPA). Available at
(i) EPA Method 200.5, Determination of Trace Elements in Drinking Water by Axially Viewed Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry. Revision 4.2, October 2003. EPA/600/R-06/115. Table IB, Note 68.
(ii) EPA Method 525.2, Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water by Liquid-Solid Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry. Revision 2.0, 1995. Table ID, Note 10.
(5) Office of Research and Development, Cincinnati OH. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati OH (US EPA). Available at
(i) Methods for Benzidine, Chlorinated Organic Compounds, Pentachlorophenol, and Pesticides in Water and Wastewater. 1978. Table IC, Note 3; Table ID, Note 3.
(ii) Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes. March 1979. EPA-600/4-79-020. Table IB, Note 1.
(iii) Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes. Revised March 1983. EPA-600/4-79-020. Table IB, Note 1.
(A) Method 120.1, Conductance, Specific Conductance, µmhos at 25 °C. Revision 1982. Table IB, Note 1.
(B) Method 130.1, Hardness, Total (mg/L as CaCO
(C) Method 150.2, pH, Continuous Monitoring (Electrometric). December 1982. Table IB, Note 1.
(D) Method 160.4, Residue, Volatile, Gravimetric, Ignition at 550 °C. Issued 1971. Table IB, Note 1.
(E) Method 206.5, Arsenic, Sample Digestion Prior to Total Arsenic Analysis by Silver Diethyldithiocarbamate or Hydride Procedures. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(F) Method 231.2, Gold, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(G) Method 245.2, Mercury, Automated Cold Vapor Technique. Issued 1974. Table IB, Note 1.
(H) Method 252.2, Osmium, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(I) Method 253.2, Palladium, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(J) Method 255.2, Platinum, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(K) Method 265.2, Rhodium, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(L) Method 279.2, Thallium, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(M) Method 283.2, Titanium, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(N) Method 289.2, Zinc, Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(O) Method 310.2, Alkalinity, Colorimetric, Automated, Methyl Orange. Revision 1974. Table IB, Note 1.
(P) Method 351.1, Nitrogen, Kjeldahl, Total, Colorimetric, Automated Phenate. Revision 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(Q) Method 352.1, Nitrogen, Nitrate, Colorimetric, Brucine. Issued 1971. Table IB, Note 1.
(R) Method 365.3, Phosphorus, All Forms, Colorimetric, Ascorbic Acid, Two Reagent. Issued 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(S) Method 365.4, Phosphorus, Total, Colorimetric, Automated, Block Digestor AA II. Issued 1974. Table IB, Note 1.
(T) Method 410.3, Chemical Oxygen Demand, Titrimetric, High Level for Saline Waters. Revision 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(U) Method 420.1, Phenolics, Total Recoverable, Spectrophotometric, Manual 4-AAP With Distillation. Revision 1978. Table IB, Note 1.
(iv) Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water. 1980. EPA-600/4-80-032. Table IE.
(A) Method 900.0, Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity. Table IE.
(B) Method 903.0, Alpha-Emitting iRadio Isotopes. Table IE.
(C) Method 903.1, Radium-226, Radon Emanation Technique. Table IE.
(D) Appendix B, Error and Statistical Calculations. Table IE.
(6) Office of Science and Technology, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington DC (US EPA). Available at
(i) Method 1625C, Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Isotope Dilution GCMS. 1989. Table IF.
(ii) [Reserved]
(7) Office of Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington DC (US EPA). Available at
(i) Method 1631, Mercury in Water by Oxidation, Purge and Trap, and Cold Vapor Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry. Revision E, August 2002. EPA-821-R-02-019, Pub. No. PB2002-108220. Table IB, Note 43.
(ii) Kelada-01, Kelada Automated Test Methods for Total Cyanide, Acid Dissociable Cyanide, and Thiocyanate. Revision 1.2, August 2001. EPA 821-B-01-009, Pub. No. PB 2001-108275. Table IB, Note 55.
(iii) In the compendium
(A) EPA Method 1666, Volatile Organic Compounds Specific to the Pharmaceutical Industry by Isotope Dilution GC/MS. Table IF, Note 1.
(B) EPA Method 1667, Formaldehyde, Isobutyraldehyde, and Furfural by Derivatization Followed by High Performance Liquid Chromatography. Table IF.
(C) Method 1671, Volatile Organic Compounds Specific to the Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Industry by GC/FID. Table IF.
(iv) Methods For The Determination of Nonconventional Pesticides In Municipal and Industrial Wastewater, Volume I. Revision I, August 1993. EPA 821-R-93-010A, Pub. No. PB 94121654. Tables ID, IG.
(A) Method 608.1, Organochlorine Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(B) Method 608.2, Certain Organochlorine Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(C) Method 614, Organophosphorus Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(D) Method 614.1, Organophosphorus Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(E) Method 615, Chlorinated Herbicides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(F) Method 617, Organohalide Pesticides and PCBs. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(G) Method 619, Triazine Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(H) Method 622, Organophosphorus Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(I) Method 622.1, Thiophosphate Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(J) Method 627, Dinitroaniline Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Notes 1 and 3.
(K) Method 629, Cyanazine. Table IG, Note 3.
(L) Method 630, Dithiocarbamate Pesticides. Table IG, Note 3.
(M) Method 630.1, Dithiocarbamate Pesticides. Table IG, Note 3.
(N) Method 631, Benomyl and Carbendazim. Table IG, Note 3.
(O) Method 632, Carbamate and Urea Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(P) Method 632.1, Carbamate and Amide Pesticides. Table IG, Note 3.
(Q) Method 633, Organonitrogen Pesticides. Table IG, Note 3.
(R) Method 633.1, Neutral Nitrogen-Containing Pesticides. Table IG, Note 3.
(S) Method 637, MBTS and TCMTB. Table IG, Note 3.
(T) Method 644, Picloram. Table IG, Note 3.
(U) Method 645, Certain Amine Pesticides and Lethane. Table IG, Note 3.
(V) Method 1656, Organohalide Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Notes 1 and 3.
(W) Method 1657, Organophosphorus Pesticides. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(X) Method 1658, Phenoxy-Acid Herbicides. Table IG, Note 3.
(Y) Method 1659, Dazomet. Table IG, Note 3.
(Z) Method 1660, Pyrethrins and Pyrethroids. Table IG, Note 3.
(AA) Method 1661, Bromoxynil. Table IG, Note 3.
(BB) Ind-01. Methods EV-024 and EV-025, Analytical Procedures for Determining Total Tin and Triorganotin in Wastewater. Table IG, Note 3.
(v) Methods For The Determination of Nonconventional Pesticides In Municipal and Industrial Wastewater, Volume II. August 1993. EPA 821-R-93-010B, Pub. No. PB 94166311. Table IG.
(A) Method 200.9, Determination of Trace Elements by Stabilized Temperature Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. Table IG, Note 3.
(B) Method 505, Analysis of Organohalide Pesticides and Commercial Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) Products in Water by Microextraction and Gas Chromatography. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(C) Method 507, The Determination of Nitrogen- and Phosphorus-Containing Pesticides in Water by Gas Chromatography with a Nitrogen-Phosphorus Detector. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(D) Method 508, Determination of Chlorinated Pesticides in Water by Gas Chromatography with an Electron Capture Detector. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(E) Method 515.1, Determination of Chlorinated Acids in Water by Gas Chromatography with an Electron Capture Detector. Table IG, Notes 2 and 3.
(F) Method 515.2, Determination of Chlorinated Acids in Water Using Liquid-Solid Extraction and Gas Chromatography with an Electron Capture Detector. Table IG, Notes 2 and 3.
(G) Method 525.1, Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water by Liquids-Solid Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(H) Method 531.1, Measurement of N-Methylcarbamoyloximes and N-Methylcarbamates in Water by Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with Post-Column Derivatization. Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(I) Method 547, Determination of Glyphosate in Drinking Water by Direct-Aqueous-Injection HPLC, Post-Column Derivatization, and Fluorescence Detection. Table IG, Note 3.
(J) Method 548, Determination of Endothall in Drinking Water by Aqueous Derivatization, Liquid-Solid Extraction, and Gas Chromatography with Electron-Capture Detector. Table IG, Note 3.
(K) Method 548.1, Determination of Endothall in Drinking Water by Ion-Exchange Extraction, Acidic Methanol Methylation and Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry. Table IG, Note 3.
(L) Method 553, Determination of Benzidines and Nitrogen-Containing Pesticides in Water by Liquid-Liquid Extraction or Liquid-Solid Extraction and Reverse Phase High Performance Liquid Chromatography/Particle Beam/Mass Spectrometry Table ID, Note 10; Table IG, Note 3.
(M) Method 555, Determination of Chlorinated Acids in Water by High Performance Liquid Chromatography With a Photodiode Array Ultraviolet Detector. Table IG, Note 3.
(vi) In the compendium
(A) EPA Method 502.2, Volatile Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Trap Capillary Column Gas Chromatography with Photoionization and Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors in Series. Table IF.
(B) [Reserved]
(vii) In the compendium
(A) EPA Method 524.2, Measurement of Purgeable Organic Compounds in Water by Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry. Table IF.
(B) [Reserved]
(viii) Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms, Fifth Edition. October 2002. EPA 821-R-02-012, Pub. No. PB2002-108488. Table IA, Note 26.
(ix) Short-Term Methods for Measuring the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater Organisms, Fourth Edition. October 2002. EPA 821-R-02-013, Pub. No. PB2002-108489. Table IA, Note 27.
(x) Short-Term Methods for Measuring the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Marine and Estuarine Organisms, Third Edition. October 2002. EPA 821-R-02-014, Pub. No. PB2002-108490. Table IA, Note 28.
(8) Office of Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington DC (US EPA). Available at
(i) Method 245.7, Mercury in Water by Cold Vapor Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry. Revision 2.0, February 2005. EPA-821-R-05-001. Table IB, Note 17.
(ii) Method 1103.1:
(iii) Method 1106.1: Enterococci in Water by Membrane Filtration Using membrane-Enterococcus-Esculin Iron Agar (mE-EIA). December 2009. EPA-621-R-09-015. Table IH, Note 23.
(iv) Method 1600: Enterococci in Water by Membrane Filtration Using membrane-Enterococcus Indoxyl-β-D-Glucoside Agar (mEI). December 2009. EPA-821-R-09-016. Table IA, Note 25; Table IH, Note 24.
(v) Method 1603:
(vi) Method 1604: Total Coliforms and
(vii) Method 1622:
(viii) Method 1623:
(ix) Method 1627, Kinetic Test Method for the Prediction of Mine Drainage Quality. December 2011. EPA-821-R-09-002. Table IB, Note 69.
(x) Method 1664, n-Hexane Extractable Material (HEM; Oil and Grease)
(xi) Method 1664, n-Hexane Extractable Material (HEM; Oil and Grease) and Silica Gel Treated n-Hexane Extractable Material (SGT-HEM; Non-polar Material) by Extraction and Gravimetry. Revision B, February 2010. EPA-821-R-10-001. Table IB, Notes 38 and 42.
(xii) Method 1669, Sampling Ambient Water for Trace Metals at EPA Water Quality Criteria Levels. July 1996. Table IB, Note 43.
(xiii) Method 1680: Fecal Coliforms in Sewage Sludge (Biosolids) by Multiple-Tube Fermentation using Lauryl Tryptose Broth (LTB) and EC Medium. April 2010. EPA-821-R-10-003. Table IA, Note 15.
(xiv) Method 1681: Fecal Coliforms in Sewage Sludge (Biosolids) by Multiple-Tube Fermentation using A-1 Medium. July 2006. EPA 821-R-06-013. Table IA, Note 20.
(xv) Method 1682:
(9) American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York NY 10018.
(i) ANSI. American National Standard on Photographic Processing Effluents. April 2, 1975. Table IB, Note 9.
(ii) [Reserved]
(10) American Public Health Association, 1015 15th Street NW., Washington, DC 20005. Standard Methods Online is available through the Standard Methods Web site (
(i) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 14th Edition, 1975. Table IB, Notes 17 and 27.
(ii) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 15th Edition, 1980, Table IB, Note 30; Table ID.
(iii) Selected Analytical Methods Approved and Cited by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Supplement to the 15th Edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 1981. Table IC, Note 6; Table ID, Note 6.
(iv) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 18th Edition, 1992. Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, and IH.
(v) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 19th Edition, 1995. Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, and IH.
(vi) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 20th Edition, 1998. Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, and IH.
(vii) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition, 2005. Table IB, Notes 17 and 27.
(viii) 2120, Color. 2001. Table IB.
(ix) 2130, Turbidity. 2001. Table IB.
(x) 2310, Acidity. 1997. Table IB.
(xi) 2320, Alkalinity. 1997. Table IB.
(xii) 2340, Hardness. 1997. Table IB.
(xiii) 2510, Conductivity. 1997. Table IB.
(xiv) 2540, Solids. 1997. Table IB.
(xv) 2550, Temperature. 2000. Table IB.
(xvi) 3111, Metals by Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. 1999. Table IB.
(xvii) 3112, Metals by Cold-Vapor Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. 2009. Table IB.
(xviii) 3113, Metals by Electrothermal Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. 2004. Table IB.
(xix) 3114, Arsenic and Selenium by Hydride Generation/Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. 2009. Table IB.
(xx) 3120, Metals by Plasma Emission. 1999. Table IB.
(xxi) 3125, Metals by Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry. 2009. Table IB.
(xxii) 3500-Al, Aluminum. 2001. Table IB.
(xxiii) 3500-As, Arsenic. 1997. Table IB.
(xxiv) 3500-Ca, Calcium. 1997. Table IB.
(xxv) 3500-Cr, Chromium. 2009. Table IB.
(xxvi) 3500-Cu, Copper. 1999. Table IB.
(xxvii) 3500-Fe, Iron. 1997. Table IB.
(xxviii) 3500-Pb, Lead. 1997. Table IB.
(xxix) 3500-Mn, Manganese. 1999. Table IB.
(xxx) 3500-K, Potassium. 1997. Table IB.
(xxxi) 3500-Na, Sodium. 1997. Table IB.
(xxxii) 3500-V, Vanadium. 1997. Table IB.
(xxxiii) 3500-Zn, Zinc. 1997. Table IB.
(xxxiv) 4110, Determination of Anions by Ion Chromatography. 2000. Table IB.
(xxxv) 4140, Inorganic Anions by Capillary Ion Electrophoresis. 1997. Table IB.
(xxxvi) 4500-B, Boron. 2000. Table IB.
(xxxvii) 4500-Cl
(xxxviii) 4500-Cl, Chlorine (Residual). 2000. Table IB.
(xxxix) 4500-CN
(xl) 4500-F
(xli) 4500-H
(xlii) 4500-NH
(xliii) 4500-NO
(xliv) 4500-NO
(xlv) 4500-N
(xlvi) 4500-O, Oxygen (Dissolved). 2001. Table IB.
(xlvii) 4500-P, Phosphorus. 1999. Table IB.
(xlviii) 4500-SiO
(xlix) 4500-S
(l) 4500-SO
(li) 4500-SO
(lii) 5210, Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD). 2001. Table IB.
(liii) 5220, Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD). 1997. Table IB.
(liv) 5310, Total Organic Carbon (TOC). 2000. Table IB.
(lv) 5520, Oil and Grease. 2001. Table IB.
(lvi) 5530, Phenols. 2005. Table IB.
(lvii) 5540, Surfactants. 2000. Table IB.
(lviii) 6200, Volatile Organic Compounds. 1997. Table IC.
(lix) 6410, Extractable Base/Neutrals and Acids. 2000. Tables IC, ID.
(lx) 6420, Phenols. 2000. Table IC.
(lxi) 6440, Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons. 2000. Table IC.
(lxii) 6630, Organochlorine Pesticides. 2000. Table ID.
(lxiii) 6640, Acidic Herbicide Compounds. 2001. Table ID.
(lxiv) 7110, Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity (Total, Suspended, and Dissolved). 2000. Table IE.
(lxv) 7500, Radium. 2001. Table IE.
(lxvi) 9213, Recreational Waters. 2007. Table IH.
(lxvii) 9221, Multiple-Tube Fermentation Technique for Members of the Coliform Group. 2006. Table IA, Notes 12 and 14; Table IH, Notes 11 and 13.
(lxviii) 9222, Membrane Filter Technique for Members of the Coliform Group. 1997. Table IA; Table IH, Note 18.
(lxix) 9223, Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test. 2004. Table IA; Table IH.
(lxx) 9230, Fecal
(11) The Analyst, The Royal Society of Chemistry, RSC Publishing, Royal Society of Chemistry, Thomas Graham House, Science Park, Milton Road, Cambridge CB4 0WF, United Kingdom. (Also available from most public libraries.)
(i) Spectrophotometric Determination of Ammonia: A Study of a Modified Berthelot Reaction Using Salicylate and Dichloroisocyanurate. Krom, M.D. 105:305-316, April 1980. Table IB, Note 60.
(ii) [Reserved]
(12) Analytical Chemistry, ACS Publications, 1155 Sixteenth St. NW., Washington DC 20036. (Also available from most public libraries.)
(i) Spectrophotometric and Kinetics Investigation of the Berthelot Reaction for the Determination of Ammonia. Patton, C.J. and S.R. Crouch. 49(3):464-469, March 1977. Table IB, Note 60.
(ii) [Reserved]
(13) AOAC International, 481 North Frederick Avenue, Suite 500, Gaithersburg, MD 20877-2417.
(i) Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International. 16th Edition, 4th Revision, 1998.
(A) 920.203, Manganese in Water, Persulfate Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(B) 925.54, Sulfate in Water, Gravimetric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(C) 973.40, Specific Conductance of Water. Table IB, Note 3.
(D) 973.41, pH of Water. Table IB, Note 3.
(E) 973.43, Alkalinity of Water, Titrimetric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(F) 973.44, Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) of Water, Incubation Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(G) 973.45, Oxygen (Dissolved) in Water, Titrimetric Methods. Table IB, Note 3.
(H) 973.46, Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) of Water, Titrimetric Methods. Table IB, Note 3.
(I) 973.47, Organic Carbon in Water, Infrared Analyzer Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(J) 973.48, Nitrogen (Total) in Water, Kjeldahl Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(K) 973.49, Nitrogen (Ammonia) in Water, Colorimetric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(L) 973.50, Nitrogen (Nitrate) in Water, Brucine Colorimetric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(M) 973.51, Chloride in Water, Mercuric Nitrate Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(N) 973.52, Hardness of Water. Table IB, Note 3.
(O) 973.53, Potassium in Water, Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(P) 973.54, Sodium in Water, Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(Q) 973.55, Phosphorus in Water, Photometric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(R) 973.56, Phosphorus in Water, Automated Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(S) 974.27, Cadmium, Chromium, Copper, Iron, Lead, Magnesium, Manganese, Silver, Zinc in Water, Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(T) 977.22, Mercury in Water, Flameless Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(U) 991.15. Total Coliforms and
(V) 993.14, Trace Elements in Waters and Wastewaters, Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometric Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(W) 993.23, Dissolved Hexavalent Chromium in Drinking Water, Ground Water, and Industrial Wastewater Effluents, Ion Chromatographic Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(X) 993.30, Inorganic Anions in Water, Ion Chromatographic Method. Table IB, Note 3.
(ii) [Reserved]
(14) Applied and Environmental Microbiology, American Society for Microbiology, 1752 N Street NW., Washington DC 20036. (Also available from most public libraries.)
(i) New Medium for the Simultaneous Detection of Total Coliforms and
(ii) [Reserved]
(15) ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, or online at
(i) Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Water, and Environmental Technology, Section 11, Volumes 11.01 and 11.02. 1994. Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, and IH.
(ii) Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Water, and Environmental Technology, Section 11, Volumes 11.01 and 11.02. 1996. Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, and IH.
(iii) Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Water, and Environmental Technology, Section 11, Volumes 11.01 and 11.02. 1999. Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, and IH.
(iv) Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Water, and Environmental Technology, Section 11, Volumes 11.01 and 11.02. 2000. Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, and IH.
(v) ASTM D511-08, Standard Test Methods for Calcium and Magnesium in Water. November 2008. Table IB.
(vi) ASTM D512-04, Standard Test Methods for Chloride Ion in Water. July 2004. Table IB.
(vii) ASTM D515-88, Test Methods for Phosphorus in Water, March 1989. Table IB.
(viii) ASTM D516-07, Standard Test Method for Sulfate Ion in Water, September 2007. Table IB.
(ix) ASTM D858-07, Standard Test Methods for Manganese in Water. August 2007. Table IB.
(x) ASTM D859-05, Standard Test Method for Silica in Water. February 2005. Table IB.
(xi) ASTM D888-09, Standard Test Methods for Dissolved Oxygen in Water. December 2009. Table IB.
(xii) ASTM D1067-06, Standard Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water. January 2007. Table IB.
(xiii) ASTM D1068-05
(xiv) ASTM D1125-95 (Reapproved 1999), Standard Test Methods for Electrical Conductivity and Resistivity of Water. December 1995. Table IB.
(xv) ASTM D1126-02 (Reapproved 2007)
(xvi) ASTM D1179-04, Standard Test Methods for Fluoride Ion in Water. July 2004. Table IB.
(xvii) ASTM D1246-05, Standard Test Method for Bromide Ion in Water. February 2005. Table IB.
(xviii) ASTM D1252-06, Standard Test Methods for Chemical Oxygen Demand (Dichromate Oxygen Demand) of Water. February 2006. Table IB.
(xix) ASTM D1253-08, Standard Test Method for Residual Chlorine in Water. October 2008. Table IB.
(xx) ASTM D1293-99, Standard Test Methods for pH of Water. March 2000. Table IB.
(xxi) ASTM D1426-08, Standard Test Methods for Ammonia Nitrogen in Water. September 2008. Table IB.
(xxii) ASTM D1687-02 (Reapproved 2007)
(xxiii) ASTM D1688-07, Standard Test Methods for Copper in Water. August 2007. Table IB.
(xxiv) ASTM D1691-02 (Reapproved 2007)
(xxv) ASTM D1783-01 (Reapproved 2007), Standard Test Methods for Phenolic Compounds in Water. January 2008). Table IB.
(xxvi) ASTM D1886-08, Standard Test Methods for Nickel in Water. October 2008. Table IB.
(xxvii) ASTM D1889-00, Standard Test Method for Turbidity of Water. October 2000. Table IB.
(xxviii) ASTM D1890-96, Standard Test Method for Beta Particle Radioactivity of Water. April 1996. Table IE.
(xxix) ASTM D1943-96, Standard Test Method for Alpha Particle Radioactivity of Water. April 1996. Table IE.
(xxx) ASTM D1976-07, Standard Test Method for Elements in Water by Inductively-Coupled Argon Plasma Atomic Emission Spectroscopy. August 2007. Table IB.
(xxxi) ASTM D2036-09, Standard Test Methods for Cyanides in Water. October 2009. Table IB.
(xxxii) ASTM D2330-02, Standard Test Method for Methylene Blue Active Substances. August 2002. Table IB.
(xxxiii) ASTM D2460-97, Standard Test Method for Alpha-Particle-Emitting Isotopes of Radium in Water. October 1997. Table IE.
(xxxiv) ASTM D2972-08, Standard Tests Method for Arsenic in Water. October 2008. Table IB.
(xxxv) ASTM D3223-02 (Reapproved 2007)
(xxxvi) ASTM D3371-95, Standard Test Method for Nitriles in Aqueous Solution by Gas-Liquid Chromatography, February 1996. Table IF.
(xxxvii) ASTM D3373-03 (Reapproved 2007)
(xxxviii) ASTM D3454-97, Standard Test Method for Radium-226 in Water. February 1998. Table IE.
(xxxix) ASTM D3557-02 (Reapproved 2007)
(xl) ASTM D3558-08, Standard Test Method for Cobalt in Water. November 2008. Table IB.
(xli) ASTM D3559-08, Standard Test Methods for Lead in Water. October 2008. Table IB.
(xlii) ASTM D3590-02 (Reapproved 2006), Standard Test Methods for Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen in Water. February 2007. Table IB.
(xliii) ASTM D3645-08, Standard Test Methods for Beryllium in Water. October 2008. Table IB.
(xliv) ASTM D3695-95, Standard Test Method for Volatile Alcohols in Water by Direct Aqueous-Injection Gas Chromatography. April 1995. Table IF.
(xlv) ASTM D3859-08, Standard Test Methods for Selenium in Water. October 2008. Table IB.
(xlvi) ASTM D3867-04, Standard Test Method for Nitrite-Nitrate in Water. July 2004. Table IB.
(xlvii) ASTM D4190-08, Standard Test Method for Elements in Water by Direct-Current Plasma Atomic Emission Spectroscopy. October 2008. Table IB.
(xlviii) ASTM D4282-02, Standard Test Method for Determination of Free Cyanide in Water and Wastewater by Microdiffusion. August 2002. Table IB.
(xlix) ASTM D4327-03, Standard Test Method for Anions in Water by Chemically Suppressed Ion Chromatography. January 2003. Table IB.
(l) ASTM D4382-02 (Reapproved 2007)
(li) ASTM D4657-92 (Reapproved 1998), Standard Test Method for Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons in Water. January 1993. Table IC.
(lii) ASTM D4658-08, Standard Test Method for Sulfide Ion in Water. August 2008. Table IB.
(liii) ASTM D4763-88 (Reapproved 2001), Standard Practice for Identification of Chemicals in Water by Fluorescence Spectroscopy. September 1988. Table IF.
(liv) ASTM D4839-03, Standard Test Method for Total Carbon and Organic Carbon in Water by Ultraviolet, or Persulfate Oxidation, or Both, and Infrared Detection. January 2003. Table IB.
(lv) ASTM D5257-03, Standard Test Method for Dissolved Hexavalent Chromium in Water by Ion Chromatography. January 2003. Table IB.
(lvi) ASTM D5259-92, Standard Test Method for Isolation and Enumeration of Enterococci from Water by the Membrane Filter Procedure. October 1992. Table IH, Note 9.
(lvii) ASTM D5392-93, Standard Test Method for Isolation and Enumeration of
(lviii) ASTM D5673-05, Standard Test Method for Elements in Water by Inductively Coupled Plasma—Mass Spectrometry. July 2005. Table IB.
(lix) ASTM D5907-03, Standard Test Method for Filterable and Nonfilterable Matter in Water. July 2003. Table IB.
(lx) ASTM D6503-99, Standard Test Method for Enterococci in Water Using Enterolert. April 2000. Table IA Note 9, Table IH, Note 9.
(lxi) ASTM. D6508-00 (Reapproved 2005)
(lxii) ASTM. D6888-09, Standard Test Method for Available Cyanide with Ligand Displacement and Flow Injection Analysis (FIA) Utilizing Gas Diffusion Separation and Amperometric Detection. October 2009. Table IB, Note 59.
(lxiii) ASTM. D6919-09, Standard Test Method for Determination of Dissolved Alkali and Alkaline Earth Cations and Ammonium in Water and Wastewater by Ion Chromatography. May 2009. Table IB.
(lxiv) ASTM. D7065-06, Standard Test Method for Determination of Nonylphenol, Bisphenol A, p-tert-Octylphenol, Nonylphenol Monoethoxylate and Nonylphenol Diethoxylate in Environmental Waters by Gas Chromatography Mass Spectrometry. January 2007. Table IC.
(lxv) ASTM. D7237-10, Standard Test Method for Free Cyanide with Flow Injection Analysis (FIA) Utilizing Gas Diffusion Separation and Amperometric Detection. June 2010. Table IB.
(lxvi) ASTM. D7284-08, Standard Test Method for Total Cyanide in Water by Micro Distillation followed by Flow Injection Analysis with Gas Diffusion Separation and Amperometric Detection. April 2008). Table IB.
(lxvii) ASTM. D7365-09a, Standard Practice for Sampling, Preservation, and Mitigating Interferences in Water Samples for Analysis of Cyanide. October 2009. Table II, Notes 5 and 6.
(lxviii) ASTM. D7511-09
(lxix) ASTM. D7573-09, Standard Test Method for Total Carbon and Organic Carbon in Water by High Temperature Catalytic Combustion and Infrared Detection. November 2009. Table IB.
(16) Bran & Luebbe Analyzing Technologies, Inc., Elmsford NY 10523.
(i) Industrial Method Number 378-75WA, Hydrogen Ion (pH) Automated Electrode Method, Bran & Luebbe (Technicon) Auto Analyzer II. October 1976. Table IB, Note 21.
(ii) [Reserved]
(17) CEM Corporation, P.O. Box 200, Matthews NC 28106-0200.
(i) Closed Vessel Microwave Digestion of Wastewater Samples for Determination of Metals. April 16, 1992. Table IB, Note 36.
(ii) [Reserved]
(18) Craig R. Chinchilla, 900 Jorie Blvd., Suite 35, Oak Brook IL 60523. Telephone: 630-645-0600.
(i) Nitrate by Discrete Analysis Easy (1-Reagent) Nitrate Method, (Colorimetric, Automated, 1 Reagent). Revision 1, November 12, 2011. Table IB, Note 62.
(ii) [Reserved]
(19) Hach Company, P.O. Box 389, Loveland CO 80537.
(i) Method 8000, Chemical Oxygen Demand. Hach Handbook of Water Analysis. 1979. Table IB, Note 14.
(ii) Method 8008, 1,10-Phenanthroline Method using FerroVer Iron Reagent for Water. 1980. Table IB, Note 22.
(iii) Method 8009, Zincon Method for Zinc. Hach Handbook for Water Analysis. 1979. Table IB, Note 33.
(iv) Method 8034, Periodate Oxidation Method for Manganese. Hach Handbook for Water Analysis. 1979. Table IB, Note 23.
(v) Method 8506, Bicinchoninate Method for Copper. Hach Handbook of Water Analysis. 1979. Table IB, Note 19.
(vi) Method 8507, Nitrogen, Nitrite—Low Range, Diazotization Method for Water and Wastewater. 1979. Table IB, Note 25.
(vii) Hach Method 10360, Luminescence Measurement of Dissolved Oxygen in Water and Wastewater and for Use in the Determination of BOD
(viii) m-ColiBlue24® Method, for total Coliforms and
(20) IDEXX Laboratories Inc., One Idexx Drive, Westbrook ME 04092.
(i) Colilert® Method. 2002. Table IA, Notes 17 and 18; Table IH, Notes 14, 15 and 16.
(ii) Colilert-18® Method. 2002. Table IA, Notes 17 and 18; Table IH, Notes 14, 15 and 16.
(iii) Enterolert® Method. 2002. Table IA, Note 24; Table IH, Note 12.
(iv) Quanti-Tray® Method. 2002. Table IA, Note 18; Table IH, Notes 14 and 16.
(v) Quanti-Tray®/2000 Method. 2002. Table IA, Note 18; Table IH, Notes 14 and 16.
(21) In-Situ Incorporated, 221 E. Lincoln Ave., Ft. Collins CO 80524. Telephone: 970-498-1500.
(i) In-Situ Inc. Method 1002-8-2009, Dissolved Oxygen Measurement by Optical Probe. 2009. Table IB, Note 64.
(ii) In-Situ Inc. Method 1003-8-2009, Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) Measurement by Optical Probe. 2009. Table IB, Note 10.
(iii) In-Situ Inc. Method 1004-8-2009, Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand (CBOD) Measurement by Optical Probe. 2009. Table IB, Note 35.
(22) Journal of Chromatography, Elsevier/North-Holland, Inc., Journal Information Centre, 52 Vanderbilt Avenue, New York NY 10164. (Also available from most public libraries.
(i) Direct Determination of Elemental Phosphorus by Gas-Liquid Chromatography. Addison, R.F. and R.G. Ackman. 47(3): 421-426, 1970. Table IB, Note 28.
(ii) [Reserved]
(23) Lachat Instruments, 6645 W. Mill Road, Milwaukee WI 53218, Telephone: 414-358-4200.
(i) QuikChem Method 10-204-00-1-X, Digestion and Distillation of Total Cyanide in Drinking and Wastewaters using MICRO DIST and Determination of Cyanide by Flow Injection Analysis. Revision 2.2, March 2005. Table IB, Note 56.
(ii) [Reserved]
(24) Leck Mitchell, Ph.D., P.E., 656 Independence Valley Dr., Grand Junction CO 81507. Telephone: 970-244-8661.
(i) Mitchell Method M5271, Determination of Turbidity by Nephelometry. Revision 1.0, July 31, 2008. Table IB, Note 66.
(ii) Mitchell Method M5331, Determination of Turbidity by
(25) National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvements, Inc. (NCASI), 260 Madison Avenue, New York NY 10016.
(i) NCASI Technical Bulletin No. 253, An Investigation of Improved Procedures for Measurement of Mill Effluent and Receiving Water Color. December 1971. Table IB, Note 18.
(ii) [Reserved]
(26) Oceanography International Corporation, 512 West Loop, P.O. Box 2980, College Station TX 77840.
(i) OIC Chemical Oxygen Demand Method. 1978. Table IB, Note 13.
(ii) [Reserved]
(27) OI Analytical, Box 9010, College Station TX 77820-9010.
(i) Method OIA-1677-09, Available Cyanide by Ligand Exchange and Flow Injection Analysis (FIA). Copyright 2010. Table IB, Note 59.
(ii) Method PAI-DK01, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Block Digestion, Steam Distillation, Titrimetric Detection. Revised December 22, 1994. Table IB, Note 39.
(iii) Method PAI-DK02, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Block Digestion, Steam Distillation, Colorimetric Detection. Revised December 22, 1994. Table IB, Note 40.
(iv) Method PAI-DK03, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Block Digestion, Automated FIA Gas Diffusion. Revised December 22, 1994. Table IB, Note 41.
(28) ORION Research Corporation, 840 Memorial Drive, Cambridge, Massachusetts 02138.
(i) ORION Research Instruction Manual, Residual Chlorine Electrode Model 97-70. 1977. Table IB, Note 16.
(ii) [Reserved]
(29) Technicon Industrial Systems, Tarrytown NY 10591.
(i) Industrial Method Number 379-75WE Ammonia, Automated Electrode Method, Technicon Auto Analyzer II. February 19, 1976. Table IB, Note 7.
(ii) [Reserved]
(30) Thermo Jarrell Ash Corporation, 27 Forge Parkway, Franklin MA 02038.
(i) Method AES0029. Direct Current Plasma (DCP) Optical Emission Spectrometric Method for Trace Elemental Analysis of Water and Wastes. 1986, Revised 1991. Table IB, Note 34.
(ii) [Reserved]
(31) Thermo Scientific, 166 Cummings Center, Beverly MA 01915. Telephone: 1-800-225-1480.
(i) Thermo Scientific Orion Method AQ4500, Determination of Turbidity by Nephelometry. Revision 5, March 12, 2009. Table IB, Note 67.
(ii) [Reserved]
(32) 3M Corporation, 3M Center Building 220-9E-10, St. Paul MN 55144-1000.
(i) Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs in Wastewater Using Empore
(ii) [Reserved]
(33) U.S. Geological Survey (USGS), U.S. Department of the Interior, Reston, Virginia. Available from USGS Books and Open-File Reports (OFR) Section, Federal Center, Box 25425, Denver, CO 80225.
(i) OFR 76-177, Selected Methods of the U.S. Geological Survey of Analysis of Wastewaters. 1976. Table IE, Note 2.
(ii) OFR 91-519, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Organonitrogen Herbicides in Water by Solid-Phase Extraction and Capillary-Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry With Selected-Ion Monitoring. 1992. Table ID, Note 14.
(iii) OFR 92-146, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Total Phosphorus by a Kjeldahl Digestion Method and an Automated Colorimetric Finish That Includes Dialysis. 1992. Table IB, Note 48.
(iv) OFR 93-125, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Inorganic and Organic Constituents in Water and Fluvial Sediments. 1993. Table IB, Note 51; Table IC, Note 9.
(v) OFR 93-449, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Chromium in Water by Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry. 1993. Table IB, Note 46.
(vi) OFR 94-37, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National
(vii) OFR 95-181, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Pesticides in Water by C-18 Solid-Phase Extraction and Capillary-Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry With Selected-Ion Monitoring. 1995. Table ID, Note 11.
(viii) OFR 97-198, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Molybdenum in Water by Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry. 1997. Table IB, Note 47.
(ix) OFR 98-165, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Elements in Whole-Water Digests Using Inductively Coupled Plasma-Optical Emission Spectrometry and Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry. 1998. Table IB, Note 50.
(x) OFR 98-639, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Arsenic and Selenium in Water and Sediment by Graphite Furnace—Atomic Absorption Spectrometry. 1999. Table IB, Note 49.
(xi) OFR 00-170, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Ammonium Plus Organic Nitrogen by a Kjeldahl Digestion Method and an Automated Photometric Finish that Includes Digest Cleanup by Gas Diffusion. 2000. Table IB, Note 45.
(xii) Water-Resources Investigation Report 01-4098, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Moderate-Use Pesticides and Selected Degradates in Water by C-18 Solid-Phase Extraction and Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry. 2001. Table ID, Note 13.
(xiii) Water-Resources Investigations Report 01-4132, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Organic Plus Inorganic Mercury in Filtered and Unfiltered Natural Water With Cold Vapor-Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry. 2001. Table IB, Note 71.
(xiv) Water-Resources Investigation Report 01-4134, Methods of Analysis by the U.S. Geological Survey National Water Quality Laboratory—Determination of Pesticides in Water by Graphitized Carbon-Based Solid-Phase Extraction and High-Performance Liquid Chormatography/Mass Spectrometry. 2001. Table ID, Note 12.
(xv) Methods for Determination of Inorganic Substances in Water and Fluvial Sediments, editors, Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations of the U.S. Geological Survey, Book 5, Chapter A1. 1979. Table IB, Note 8.
(xvi) Methods for Determination of Inorganic Substances in Water and Fluvial Sediments, Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations of the U.S. Geological Survey, Book 5, Chapter A1. 1989. Table IB, Note 2.
(xvii) Methods for the Determination of Organic Substances in Water and Fluvial Sediments. Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations of the U.S. Geological Survey, Book 5, Chapter A3. 1987. Table IB, Note 24; Table ID, Note 4.
(xviii) Techniques and Methods Book 5-B1, Determination of Elements in Natural-Water, Biota, Sediment and Soil Samples Using Collision/Reaction Cell Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry. Chapter 1, Section B, Methods of the National Water Quality Laboratory, Book 5, Laboratory Analysis. 2006. Table IB, Note 70.
(xix) U.S. Geological Survey Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations, Book 5, Laboratory Analysis, Chapter A4, Methods for Collection and Analysis of Aquatic Biological and Microbiological Samples. 1989. Table IA, Note 4; Table IH, Note 4.
(xx) Water Temperature—Influential Factors, Field Measurement and Data Presentation, Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations of the U.S. Geological Survey, Book 1, Chapter D1. 1975. Table IB, Note 32.
(34) Waters Corporation, 34 Maple Street, Milford MA 01757, Telephone: 508-482-2131, Fax: 508-482-3625.
(i) Method D6508, Test Method for Determination of Dissolved Inorganic
(ii) [Reserved]
(c) Under certain circumstances, the Regional Administrator or the Director in the Region or State where the discharge will occur may determine for a particular discharge that additional parameters or pollutants must be reported. Under such circumstances, additional test procedures for analysis of pollutants may be specified by the Regional Administrator, or the Director upon recommendation of the Alternate Test Procedure Program Coordinator, Washington, DC.
(d) Under certain circumstances, the Administrator may approve additional alternate test procedures for nationwide use, upon recommendation by the Alternate Test Procedure Program Coordinator, Washington, DC.
(e) Sample preservation procedures, container materials, and maximum allowable holding times for parameters are cited in Tables IA, IB, IC, ID, IE, IF, IG, and IH are prescribed in Table II. Information in the table takes precedence over information in specific methods or elsewhere. Any person may apply for a change from the prescribed preservation techniques, container materials, and maximum holding times applicable to samples taken from a specific discharge. Applications for such limited use changes may be made by letters to the Regional Alternative Test Procedure (ATP) Program Coordinator or the permitting authority in the Region in which the discharge will occur. Sufficient data should be provided to assure such changes in sample preservation, containers or holding times do not adversely affect the integrity of the sample. The Regional ATP Coordinator or permitting authority will review the application and then notify the applicant and the appropriate State agency of approval or rejection of the use of the alternate test procedure. A decision to approve or deny any request on deviations from the prescribed Table II requirements will be made within 90 days of receipt of the application by the Regional Administrator. An analyst may not modify any sample preservation and/or holding time requirements of an approved method unless the requirements of this section are met.
For
(a) A written application for review of an alternate test procedure (alternate method) for nationwide use may be made by letter via email or by hard copy in triplicate to the National Alternate Test Procedure (ATP) Program Coordinator (National Coordinator), Office of Science and Technology (4303T), Office of Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1200 Pennsylvania Ave. NW., Washington, DC 20460. Any application for an alternate test procedure (ATP) under this paragraph (a) shall:
(1) Provide the name and address of the responsible person or firm making the application.
(2) Identify the pollutant(s) or parameter(s) for which nationwide approval of an alternate test procedure is being requested.
(3) Provide a detailed description of the proposed alternate test procedure, together with references to published or other studies confirming the general applicability of the alternate test procedure for the analysis of the pollutant(s) or parameter(s) in wastewater discharges from representative and specified industrial or other categories.
(4) Provide comparability data for the performance of the proposed alternative test procedure compared to the performance of the reference method.
(b) The National Coordinator may request additional information and analyses from the applicant in order to determine whether the alternate test procedure satisfies the applicable requirements of this part.
(c)
(2) Where the National Coordinator approved an applicant's request for nationwide use of an alternate test procedure, the National Coordinator will notify the applicant that the National Coordinator will recommend rulemaking to approve the alternate test procedure. The National Coordinator will notify the Regional ATP Coordinator or permitting authorities that they may consider approval of this alternate test procedure for limited use in their Regions based on the information and data provided in the applicant's application. The Regional ATP Coordinator or permitting authority will grant approval on a case-by-case basis prior to use of the alternate test procedure for compliance analyses until the alternate test procedure is approved by publication in a final rule in the
(3) EPA will propose to amend 40 CFR part 136 to include the alternate test procedure in § 136.3. EPA shall make available for review all the factual bases for its proposal, including any performance data submitted by the applicant and any available EPA analysis of those data.
(4) Following public comment, EPA shall publish in the
(5) Whenever the National Coordinator has approved an applicant's request for nationwide use of an alternate test procedure, any person may request an approval of the method for
(a) Any person may request the Regional Alternate Test Procedure (ATP) Coordinator or permitting authority to approve the use of an alternate test procedure in the Region.
(b) When the request for the use of an alternate test procedure concerns use in a State with an NPDES permit program approved pursuant to section 402 of the Act, the requestor shall first submit an application for limited use to the Director of the State agency having responsibility for issuance of NPDES permits within such State (
(c) Any application for approval of an alternate test procedure for limited use may be made by letter, email or by hard copy. The application shall include the following:
(1) Provide the name and address of the applicant and the applicable ID number of the existing or pending permit and issuing agency for which use of the alternate test procedure is requested, and the discharge serial number.
(2) Identify the pollutant or parameter for which approval of an alternate test procedure is being requested.
(3) Provide justification for using testing procedures other than those specified in Tables IA through IH of § 136.3, or in the NPDES permit.
(4) Provide a detailed description of the proposed alternate test procedure, together with references to published studies of the applicability of the alternate test procedure to the effluents in question.
(5) Provide comparability data for the performance of the proposed alternate test procedure compared to the performance of the reference method.
(d)
(2) The Regional ATP Coordinator or permitting authority will forward a copy of every approval and rejection notification to the National Alternate Test Procedure Coordinator.
(a)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(b)
(2)
(i)
(A) The analyst may only rely on QC tests and QC acceptance criteria in a method if it includes wastewater matrix QC tests and QC acceptance criteria (e.g., matrix spikes) and both initial (start-up) and ongoing QC tests and QC acceptance criteria.
(B) If the approved method does not contain QC tests and QC acceptance criteria or if the QC tests and QC acceptance criteria in the method do not meet the requirements of this section, then the analyst must employ QC tests published in the “equivalent” of a Part 136 method that has such QC, or the essential QC requirements specified at 136.7, as applicable. If the approved method is from a compendium or VCSB and the QA/QC requirements are published in other parts of that organization's compendium rather than within the Part 136 method then that part of the organization's compendium must be used for the QC tests.
(C) In addition, the analyst must perform ongoing QC tests, including assessment of performance of the modified method on the sample matrix (e.g., analysis of a matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate pair for every twenty samples), and analysis of an ongoing precision and recovery sample (e.g., laboratory fortified blank or blank spike) and a blank with each batch of 20 or fewer samples.
(D) If the performance of the modified method in the wastewater matrix or reagent water does not meet or exceed the QC acceptance criteria, the method modification may not be used.
(ii)
(3)
(4)
(i) Changes between manual method, flow analyzer, and discrete instrumentation.
(ii) Changes in chromatographic columns or temperature programs.
(iii) Changes between automated and manual sample preparation, such as digestions, distillations, and extractions; in-line sample preparation is an acceptable form of automated sample preparation for CWA methods.
(iv) In general, ICP-MS is a sensitive and selective detector for metal analysis; however isobaric interference can cause problems for quantitative determination, as well as identification based on the isotope pattern. Interference reduction technologies, such as collision cells or reaction cells, are designed to reduce the effect of spectroscopic interferences that may bias results for the element of interest. The use of interference reduction technologies is allowed, provided the method performance specifications relevant to ICP-MS measurements are met.
(v) The use of EPA Method 200.2 or the sample preparation steps from EPA Method 1638, including the use of closed-vessel digestion, is allowed for EPA Method 200.8, provided the method performance specifications relevant to the ICP-MS are met.
(vi) Changes in pH adjustment reagents. Changes in compounds used to adjust pH are acceptable as long as they do not produce interference. For example, using a different acid to adjust pH in colorimetric methods.
(vii) Changes in buffer reagents are acceptable provided that the changes do not produce interferences.
(viii) Changes in the order of reagent addition are acceptable provided that the change does not alter the chemistry and does not produce an interference. For example, using the same reagents, but adding them in different order, or preparing them in combined or separate solutions (so they can be added separately), is allowed, provided reagent stability or method performance is equivalent or improved.
(ix) Changes in calibration range (provided that the modified range covers any relevant regulatory limit and the method performance specifications for calibration are met).
(x) Changes in calibration model. (A) Linear calibration models do not adequately fit calibration data with one or two inflection points. For example, vendor-supplied data acquisition and processing software on some instruments may provide quadratic fitting functions to handle such situations. If the calibration data for a particular analytical method routinely display quadratic character, using quadratic fitting functions may be acceptable. In such cases, the minimum number of calibrators for second order fits should be six, and in no case should concentrations be extrapolated for instrument responses that exceed that of the most concentrated calibrator. Examples of methods with nonlinear calibration functions include chloride by SM4500-Cl-E-1997, hardness by EPA Method 130.1, cyanide by ASTM D6888 or OIA1677, Kjeldahl nitrogen by PAI-DK03, and anions by EPA Method 300.0.
(B) As an alternative to using the average response factor, the quality of the calibration may be evaluated using the Relative Standard Error (RSE). The acceptance criterion for the RSE is the same as the acceptance criterion for Relative Standard Deviation (RSD), in the method. RSE is calculated as:
(C) Using the RSE as a metric has the added advantage of allowing the same numerical standard to be applied to the calibration model, regardless of the form of the model. Thus, if a method states that the RSD should be ≤20% for the traditional linear model through the origin, then the RSE acceptance limit can remain ≤20% as well. Similarly, if a method provides an RSD acceptance limit of ≤15%, then that same figure can be used as the acceptance limit for the RSE. The RSE may be used as an alternative to correlation coefficients and coefficients of determination for evaluating calibration curves for any of the methods at part 136. If the method includes a numerical criterion for the RSD, then the same numerical value is used for the RSE. Some older methods do not include any criterion for the calibration curve—for these methods, if RSE is used the value should be ≤20%. Note that the use of the RSE is included as an alternative to the use of the correlation coefficient as a measure of the suitability of a calibration curve. It is not necessary to evaluate both the RSE and the correlation coefficient.
(xi) Changes in equipment such as equipment from a vendor different from the one specified in the method.
(xii) The use of micro or midi distillation apparatus in place of macro distillation apparatus.
(xiii) The use of prepackaged reagents.
(xiv) The use of digital titrators and methods where the underlying chemistry used for the determination is similar to that used in the approved method.
(xv) Use of selected ion monitoring (SIM) mode for analytes that cannot be effectively analyzed in full-scan mode and reach the required sensitivity. False positives are more of a concern when using SIM analysis, so at a minimum, one quantitation and two qualifying ions must be monitored for each analyte (unless fewer than three ions with intensity greater than 15% of the base peak are available). The ratio of each of the two qualifying ions to the quantitation ion must be evaluated and should agree with the ratio observed in an authentic standard within ±20 percent. Analyst judgment must be applied to the evaluation of ion ratios because the ratios can be affected by co-eluting compounds present in the sample matrix. The signal-to-noise ratio of the least sensitive ion should be at least 3:1. Retention time in the sample should match within 0.05 minute of an authentic standard analyzed under identical conditions. Matrix interferences can cause minor shifts in retention time and may be evident as shifts in the retention times of the internal standards. The total scan time should be such that a minimum of eight scans are obtained per chromatographic peak.
(xvi) Changes are allowed in purge-and-trap sample volumes or operating conditions. Some examples are:
(A) Changes in purge time and purge-gas flow rate. A change in purge time and purge-gas flow rate is allowed provided that sufficient total purge volume is used to achieve the required minimum detectible concentration and calibration range for all compounds. In general, a purge rate in the range 20-200 mL/min and a total purge volume in the range 240-880 mL are recommended.
(B) Use of nitrogen or helium as a purge gas, provided that the required sensitivities for all compounds are met.
(C) Sample temperature during the purge state. Gentle heating of the sample during purging (e.g., 40 °C) increases purging efficiency of hydrophilic compounds and may improve sample-to-sample repeatability because all samples are purged under precisely the same conditions.
(D) Trap sorbent. Any trap design is acceptable, provided that the data acquired meet all QC criteria.
(E) Changes to the desorb time. Shortening the desorb time (e.g., from4 minutes to 1 minute) may not affect compound recoveries, and can shorten overall cycle time and significantly reduce the amount of water introduced to the analytical system, thus improving the precision of analysis, especially for water-soluble analytes. A desorb time of four minutes is recommended, however a shorter desorb time may be used, provided that all QC specifications in the method are met.
(F) Use of water management techniques is allowed. Water is always collected on the trap along with the analytes and is a significant interference for analytical systems (GC and GC/MS). Modern water management techniques (e.g., dry purge or condensation points) can remove moisture from the sample stream and improve analytical performance.
(xvii) The following modifications are allowable when performing EPA Method 625: The base/neutral and acid fractions may be added together and analyzed as one extract, provided that the analytes can be reliably identified and quantified in the combined extracts; the pH extraction sequence may be reversed to better separate acid and neutral components; neutral components may be extracted with either acid or base components; a smaller sample volume may be used to minimize matrix interferences provided matrix interferences are demonstrated and documented; alternative surrogate and internal standard concentrations other than those specified in the method are acceptable, provided that method performance is not degraded; an alternative concentration range may be used for the calibration other than the range specified in the method; the solvent for the calibration standards may be changed to match the solvent of the final sample extract.
(xviii) If the characteristics of a wastewater matrix prevent efficient recovery of organic pollutants and prevent the method from meeting QC requirements, the analyst may attempt to resolve the issue by adding salts to the sample, provided that such salts do not react with or introduce the target pollutant into the sample (as evidenced by the analysis of method blanks, laboratory control samples, and spiked samples that also contain such salts), and that all requirements of paragraph (b)(2) of this section are met. Samples having residual chlorine or other halogen must be dechlorinated prior to the addition of such salts.
(xix) If the characteristics of a wastewater matrix result in poor sample dispersion or reagent deposition on equipment and prevent the analyst from meeting QC requirements, the analyst may attempt to resolve the issue by adding a inert surfactant that does not affect the chemistry of the method, such as Brij-35 or sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), provided that such surfactant does not react with or introduce the target pollutant into the sample (as evidenced by the analysis of method blanks, laboratory control samples, and spiked samples that also contain such surfactant) and that all requirements of paragraph (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section are met. Samples having residual chlorine or other halogen must be dechlorinated prior to the addition of such surfactant.
(xx) The use of gas diffusion (using pH change to convert the analyte to gaseous form and/or heat to separate an analyte contained in steam from the sample matrix) across a hydrophobic semi-permeable membrane to separate the analyte of interest from the sample matrix may be used in place of manual or automated distillation in methods for analysis such as ammonia, total cyanide, total Kjeldahl nitrogen, and total phenols. These procedures do not replace the digestion procedures specified in the approved methods and must be used in conjunction with those procedures.
(xxi) Changes in equipment operating parameters such as the monitoring wavelength of a colorimeter or the reaction time and temperature as needed to achieve the chemical reactions defined in the unmodified CWA method. For example, molybdenum blue phosphate methods have two absorbance maxima, one at about 660 nm and another at about 880 nm. The former is about 2.5 times less sensitive than the latter. Wavelength choice provides a cost-effective, dilution-free means to increase sensitivity of molybdenum blue phosphate methods.
(xxii) Interchange of oxidants, such as the use of titanium oxide in UV-assisted automated digestion of TOC and total phosphorus, as long as complete oxidation can be demonstrated.
(xxii) Use of an axially viewed torch with Method 200.7.
At 77 FR 29810, May 18, 2012, § 136.6 was revised to include two paragraphs designated (b)(4)(xxii).
The permittee/laboratory shall use suitable QA/QC procedures when conducting compliance analyses with any part 136 chemical method or an alternative method specified by the permitting authority. These QA/QC procedures are generally included in the analytical method or may be part of the methods compendium for approved Part 136 methods from a consensus organization. For example, Standard Methods contains QA/QC procedures in the Part 1000 section of the Standard Methods Compendium. The permittee/laboratory shall follow these QA/QC procedures, as described in the method or methods compendium. If the method lacks QA/QC procedures, the permittee/laboratory has the following options to comply with the QA/QC requirements:
(a) Refer to and follow the QA/QC published in the “equivalent” EPA method for that parameter that has such QA/QC procedures;
(b) Refer to the appropriate QA/QC section(s) of an approved part 136 method from a consensus organization compendium;
(c)(1) Incorporate the following twelve quality control elements, where applicable, into the laboratory's documented standard operating procedure (SOP) for performing compliance analyses when using an approved part 136 method when the method lacks such
(i) Demonstration of Capability (DOC);
(ii) Method Detection Limit (MDL);
(iii) Laboratory reagent blank (LRB), also referred to as method blank (MB);
(iv) Laboratory fortified blank (LFB), also referred to as a spiked blank, or laboratory control sample (LCS);
(v) Matrix spike (MS) and matrix spike duplicate (MSD), or laboratory fortified matrix (LFM) and LFM duplicate, may be used for suspected matrix interference problems to assess precision;
(vi) Internal standards (for GC/MS analyses), surrogate standards (for organic analysis) or tracers (for radiochemistry);
(vii) Calibration (initial and continuing), also referred to as initial calibration verification (ICV) and continuing calibration verification (CCV);
(viii) Control charts (or other trend analyses of quality control results);
(ix) Corrective action (root cause analysis);
(x) QC acceptance criteria;
(xi) Definitions of preparation and analytical batches that may drive QC frequencies; and
(xii) Minimum frequency for conducting all QC elements.
(2) These twelve quality control elements must be clearly documented in the written standard operating procedure for each analytical method not containing QA/QC procedures, where applicable.
1.1 This method covers the determination of 29 purgeable halocarbons.
The following parameters may be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a purge and trap gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 624 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for most of the parameters listed above.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 12.1)
1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the operation of a purge and trap system and a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL water sample contained in a specially-designed purging chamber at ambient temperature. The halocarbons are efficiently transferred from the aqueous phase to the vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent trap where the halocarbons are trapped. After purging is completed, the trap is heated and backflushed with the inert gas to desorb the halocarbons onto a gas chromatographic column. The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed to separate the halocarbons which are then detected with a halide-specific detector.
2.2 The method provides an optional gas chromatographic column that may be helpful in resolving the compounds of interest from interferences that may occur.
3.1 Impurities in the purge gas and organic compounds outgassing from the plumbing ahead of the trap account for the majority of contamination problems. The analytical system must be demonstrated to be free from contamination under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3. The use of non-Teflon plastic tubing, non-Teflon thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber components in the purge and trap system should be avoided.
3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics (particularly fluorocarbons and methylene chloride) through the septum seal ilto the sample during shipment and storage. A field reagent blank prepared from reagent water and carried through the sampling and handling protocol can serve as a check on such contamination.
3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur whenever high level and low level samples are sequentially analyzed. To reduce carry-over, the purging device and sample syringe must be rinsed with reagent water between sample analyses. Whenever an unusually concentrated sample is encountered, it should be followed by an analysis of reagent water to check for cross contamination. For samples containing large amounts of water-soluble materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds or high organohalide levels, it may be necessary to wash out the purging device with a detergent solution, rinse it with distilled water, and then dry it in a 105 °C oven between analyses. The trap and other parts of the system are also subject to contamination; therefore, frequent bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, and vinyl chloride. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sampling.
5.1.1 Vial—25-mL capacity or larger, equipped with a screw cap with a hole in the center (Pierce #13075 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 °C before use.
5.1.2 Septum—Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce #12722 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 °C for 1 h before use.
5.2 Purge and trap system—The purge and trap system consists of three separate pieces of equipment: a purging device, trap, and desorber. Several complete systems are now commercially available.
5.2.1 The purging device must be designed to accept 5-mL samples with a water column at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space between the water column and the trap must have a total volume of less than 15 mL. The purge gas must pass through the water column as finely divided bubbles with a diameter of less than 3 mm at the origin. The purge gas must be introduced no more than 5 mm from the base of the water column. The purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets these design criteria.
5.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long and have an inside diameter of at least 0.105 in. The trap must be packed to contain the following minimum lengths of adsorbents: 1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing (Section 6.3.3), 7.7 cm of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer (Section 6.3.2), 7.7 cm of silica gel (Section 6.3.4), 7.7 cm of coconut charcoal (Section 6.3.1). If it is not necessary to analyze for dichlorodifluoromethane, the charcoal can be eliminated, and the polymer section lengthened to 15 cm. The minimum
5.2.3 The desorber must be capable of rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C. The polymer section of the trap should not be heated higher than 180 °C and the remaining sections should not exceed 200 °C. The desorber illustrated in Figure 2 meets these design criteria.
5.2.4 The purge and trap system may be assembled as a separate unit or be coupled to a gas chromatograph as illustrated in Figures 3 and 4.
5.3 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.3.1 Column 1—8 ft long × 0.1 in. ID stainless steel or glass, packed with 1% SP-1000 on Carbopack B (60/80 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 10.1.
5.3.2 Column 2—6 ft long × 0.1 in. ID stainless steel or glass, packed with chemically bonded n-octane on Porasil-C (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.
5.3.3 Detector—Electrolytic conductivity or microcoulometric detector. These types of detectors have proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1). The electrolytic conductivity detector was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 10.1.
5.4 Syringes—5-mL glass hypodermic with Luerlok tip (two each), if applicable to the purging device.
5.5 Micro syringes—25-µL, 0.006 in. ID needle.
5.6 Syringe valve—2-way, with Luer ends (three each).
5.7 Syringe—5-mL, gas-tight with shut-off valve.
5.8 Bottle—15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon cap liner.
5.9 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.1.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a carbon filter bed containing about 1 lb of activated carbon (Filtrasorb-300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).
6.1.2 A water purification system (Millipore Super-Q or equivalent) may be used to generate reagent water.
6.1.3 Reagent water may also be prepared by boiling water for 15 min. Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at 90 °C, bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water for 1 h. While still hot, transfer the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bottle and seal with a Teflon-lined septum and cap.
6.2 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.3 Trap Materials:
6.3.1 Coconut charcoal—6/10 mesh sieved to 26 mesh, Barnabey Cheney, CA-580-26 lot # M-2649 or equivalent.
6.3.2 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer—Tenax, (60/80 mesh), chromatographic grade or equivalent.
6.3.3 Methyl silicone packing—3% OV-1 on Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
6.3.4 Silica gel—35/60 mesh, Davison, grade-15 or equivalent.
6.4 Methanol—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.5 Stock standard solutions—Stock standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions. Prepare stock standard solutions in methanol using assayed liquids or gases as appropriate. Because of the toxicity of some of the organohalides, primary dilutions of these materials should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be used when the analyst handles high concentrations of such materials.
6.5.1 Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground glass stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand, unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted surfaces have dried. Weigh the flask to the learest 0.1 mg.
6.5.2 Add the assayed reference material:
6.5.2.1 Liquid—Using a 100 µL syringe, immediately add two or more drops of assayed reference material to the flask, then reweigh. Be sure that the drops fall directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck of the flask.
6.5.2.2 Gases—To prepare standards for any of the six halocarbons that boil below 30 °C (bromomethane, chloroethane, chloromethane, dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, vinyl chloride), fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the reference standard to the 5.0-mL mark. Lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol meniscus. Slowly introduce the reference standard above the surface of the liquid (the heavy gas will rapidly dissolve into the methanol).
6.5.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the flask several times. Calculate the concentration in µg/µL from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are
6.5.4 Transfer the stock standard solution into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle. Store, with minimal headspace, at −10 to −20 °C and protect from light.
6.5.5 Prepare fresh standards weekly for the six gases and 2-chloroethylvinyl ether. All other standards must be replaced after one month, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.6 Secondary dilution standards—Using stock standard solutions, prepare secondary dilution standards in methanol that contain the compounds of interest, either singly or mixed together. The secondary dilution standards should be prepared at concentrations such that the aqueous calibration standards prepared in Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1 will bracket the working range of the analytical system. Secondary dilution standards should be stored with minimal headspace and should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.7 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Assemble a purge and trap system that meets the specifications in Section 5.2. Condition the trap overnight at 180 °C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min. Condition the trap for 10 min once daily prior to use.
7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to a gas chromatograph. The gas chromatograph must be operated using temperature and flow rate conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge and trap-gas chromatographic system using either the external standard technique (Section 7.3) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.4).
7.3 External standard calibration procedure:
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a miminum of three concentration levels for each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 µL of one or more secondary dilution standards to 100, 500, or 1000 µL of reagent water. A 25-µL syringe with a 0.006 in. ID needle should be used for this operation. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector. These aqueous standards can be stored up to 24 h, if held in sealed vials with zero headspace as described in Section 9.2. If not so stored, they must be discarded after 1 h.
7.3.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, and tabulate peak height or area responses versus the concentration in the standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.4 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples. The compounds recommended for use as surrogate spikes in Section 8.7 have been used successfully as internal standards, because of their generally unique retention times.
7.4.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest as described in Section 7.3.1.
7.4.2 Prepare a spiking solution containing each of the internal standards using the procedures described in Sections 6.5 and 6.6. It is recommended that the secondary dilution standard be prepared at a concentration of 15 µg/mL of each internal standard compound. The addition of 10 µL of this standard to 5.0 mL of sample or calibration standard would be equivalent to 30 µg/L.
7.4.3 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, adding 10 µL of internal standard spiking solution directly to the syringe (Section 10.4). Tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard, and calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.5 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on
7.5.1 Prepare the QC check sample as described in Section 8.2.2.
7.5.2 Analyze the QC check sample according to Section 10.
7.5.3 For each parameter, compare the response (Q) with the corresponding calibration acceptance criteria found in Table 2. If the responses for all parameters of interest fall within the designated ranges, analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual Q falls outside the range, proceed according to Section 7.5.4.
The large number of parameters in Table 2 present a substantial probability that one or more will not meet the calibration acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
7.5.4 Repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet the calibration acceptance criteria. If the response for a parameter does not fall within the range in this second test, a new calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be prepared for that parameter according to Section 7.3 or 7.4.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Section 10.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system are under control.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 10 µg/mL in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Prepare a QC check sample to contain 20 µg/L of each parameter by adding 200 µL of QC check sample concentrate to 100 mL of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze four 5-mL aliquots of the well-mixed QC check sample according to Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
The large number of parameters in Table 2 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.3, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 20 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.2 Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-mL sample aliquot with 10 µL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 2 must be measured in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check standard should be routinely analyzed with the spiked sample.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 10 µL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
8.7 The analyst should monitor both the performance of the analytical system and the effectiveness of the method in dealing with each sample matrix by spiking each sample, standard, and reagent water blank with surrogate halocarbons. A combination of bromochloromethane, 2-bromo-1-chloropropane, and 1,4-dichlorobutane is recommended to encompass the range of the temperature program used in this method. From stock standard solutions prepared as in Section 6.5, add a volume to give 750 µg of each surrogate to 45 mL of reagent water contained in a 50-mL volumetric flask, mix and dilute to volume for a concentration of 15 ng/µL. Add 10 µL of this surrogate spiking solution directly into the 5-mL syringe with every sample and reference standard analyzed. Prepare a fresh surrogate spiking solution on a weekly basis. If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the surrogate compounds may be added directly to the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2).
9.1 All samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of collection until analysis. If the sample contains free or combined chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient for up to 5 ppm Cl
9.2 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers having a total volume of at least 25 mL. Fill the sample bottle just to overflowing in such a manner that no air bubbles pass through the sample as the bottle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no air bubbles are entrapped in it. If preservative has been added, shake vigorously for 1 min. Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle until time of analysis.
9.3 All samples must be analyzed within 14 days of collection.
10.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are estimated retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by Column 1 is shown in Figure 5. Other packed columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
10.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device, and set the purge and trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the purging device sample introduction needle.
10.4 Allow the sample to come to ambient temperature prior to introducing it to the syringe. Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel to just short of overflowing. Replace the syringe plunger and compress the sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL. Since this process of taking an aliquot destroys the validity of the sample for future analysis, the analyst should fill a second syringe at this time to protect against possible loss of data. Add 10.0 µL of the surrogate spiking solution (Section 8.7) and 10.0 µL of the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2), if applicable, through the valve bore, then close the valve.
10.5 Attach the syringe-syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve on the purging device. Open the syringe valves and inject the sample into the purging chamber.
10.6 Close both valves and purge the sample for 11.0 ±0.1 min at ambient temperature.
10.7 After the 11-min purge time, attach the trap to the chromatograph, adjust the purge and trap system to the desorb mode (Figure 4), and begin to temperature program the gas chromatograph. Introduce the trapped materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C while backflushing the trap with an inert gas between 20 and 60 mL/min for 4 min. If rapid heating of the trap cannot be achieved, the GC column must be used as a secondary trap by cooling it to 30 °C (subambient temperature, if poor peak geometry or random retention time problems persist) instead of the initial program temperature of 45 °C
10.8 While the trap is being desorbed into the gas chromatograph, empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. Wash the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.
10.9 After desorbing the sample for 4 min, recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15 s then close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through the trap. The trap temperature should be maintained at 180 °C After approximately 7 min, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve to
10.10 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
10.11 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, prepare a dilution of the sample with reagent water from the aliquot in the second syringe and reanalyze.
11.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
11.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration of the parameter being measured from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.3.2.
11.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.4.3 and Equation 2.
11.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
12.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
12.2 This method is recommended for use in the concentration range from the MDL to 1000×MDL. Direct aqueous injection techniques should be used to measure concentration levels above 1000×MDL.
12.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 8.0 to 500 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. “Determining Volatile Organics at Microgram-per-Litre-Levels by Gas Chromatography,”
3. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. “Semi-Automated Headspace Analysis of Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for Purgeable Volatile Organic Compounds,” Proceedings from Symposium on Measurement of Organic Pollutants in Water and Wastewater, American Society for Testing and Materials, STP 686, C.E. Van Hall, editor, 1978.
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA 600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
9. “EPA Method Study 24, Method 601—Purgeable Halocarbons by the Purge and Trap Method,” EPA 600/4-84-064, National Technical Information Service, PB84-212448, Springfield, Virginia 22161, July 1984.
10. “Method Validation Data for EPA Method 601,” Memorandum from B. Potter,
11. Bellar, T. A., Unpublished data, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, 1981.
1.1 This method covers the determination of various purgeable aromatics. The following parameters may be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a purge and trap gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 624 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed above.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 12.1)
1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the operation of a purge and trap system and a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL water sample contained in a specially-designed purging chamber at ambient temperature. The aromatics are efficiently transferred from the aqueous phase to the vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent trap where the aromatics are trapped. After purging is completed, the trap is heated and backflushed with the inert gas to desorb the aromatics onto a gas chromatographic column. The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed to separate the aromatics which are then detected with a photoionization detector.
2.2 The method provides an optional gas chromatographic column that may be helpful in resolving the compounds of interest from interferences that may occur.
3.1 Impurities in the purge gas and organic compounds outgassing from the plumbing ahead of the trap account for the majority of contamination problems. The analytical system must be demonstrated to be free from contamination under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3. The use of non-Teflon plastic tubing, non-Teflon thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber components in the purge and trap system should be avoided.
3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics through the septum seal into the sample during shipment and storage. A field reagent blank prepared from reagent water and carried through the sampling and handling protocol can serve as a check on such contamination.
3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur whenever high level and low level samples are sequentially analyzed. To reduce carry-over, the purging device and sample syringe must be rinsed with reagent water between sample analyses. Whenever an unusually concentrated sample is encountered, it should be followed by an analysis of reagent water to check for cross contamination. For samples containing large amounts of water-soluble materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds or high aromatic levels, it may be necessary to wash the purging device with a detergent solution, rinse it with distilled water, and then dry it in an oven at 105 °C between analyses. The trap and other parts of the system are also subject to contamination; therefore, frequent bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene and 1,4-dichlorobenzene. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sampling.
5.1.1 Vial]25-mL capacity or larger, equipped with a screw cap with a hole in the center (Pierce #13075 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 °C before use.
5.1.2 Septum—Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce #12722 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 °C for 1 h before use.
5.2 Purge and trap system—The purge and trap system consists of three separate pieces of equipment: A purging device, trap, and desorber. Several complete systems are now commercially available.
5.2.1 The purging device must be designed to accept 5-mL samples with a water column at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space between the water column and the trap must have a total volume of less than 15 mL. The purge gas must pass through the water column as finely divided bubbles with a diameter of less than 3 mm at the origin. The purge gas must be introduced no more than 5 mm from the base of the water column. The purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets these design criteria.
5.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long and have an inside diameter of at least 0.105 in.
5.2.2.1 The trap is packed with 1 cm of methyl silicone coated packing (Section 6.4.2) and 23 cm of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer (Section 6.4.1) as shown in Figure 2. This trap was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 12.
5.2.2.2 Alternatively, either of the two traps described in Method 601 may be used, although water vapor will preclude the measurement of low concentrations of benzene.
5.2.3 The desorber must be capable of rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C. The polymer section of the trap should not be heated higher than 180 °C and the remaining sections should not exceed 200 °C. The desorber illustrated in Figure 2 meets these design criteria.
5.2.4 The purge and trap system may be assembled as a separate unit or be coupled to a gas chromatograph as illustrated in Figures 3, 4, and 5.
5.3 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.3.1 Column 1—6 ft long × 0.082 in. ID stainless steel or glass, packed with 5% SP-1200 and 1.75% Bentone-34 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 10.1.
5.3.2 Column 2—8 ft long × 0.1 in ID stainless steel or glass, packed with 5% 1,2,3-Tris(2-cyanoethoxy)propane on Chromosorb W-AW (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
5.3.3 Detector—Photoionization detector (h-Nu Systems, Inc. Model PI-51-02 or equivalent). This type of detector has been proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 10.1.
5.4 Syringes—5-mL glass hypodermic with Luerlok tip (two each), if applicable to the purging device.
5.5 Micro syringes—25-µL, 0.006 in. ID needle.
5.6 Syringe valve—2-way, with Luer ends (three each).
5.7 Bottle—15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon cap liner.
5.8 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.1.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a carbon filter bed containing about 1 lb of activated carbon (Filtrasorb-300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).
6.1.2 A water purification system (Millipore Super-Q or equivalent) may be used to generate reagent water.
6.1.3 Reagent water may also be prepared by boiling water for 15 min. Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at 90 °C, bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water for 1 h. While still hot, transfer the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bottle and seal with a Teflon-lined septum and cap.
6.2 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.3 Hydrochloric acid (1+1)—Add 50 mL of concentrated HCl (ACS) to 50 mL of reagent water.
6.4 Trap Materials:
6.4.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer—Tenax, (60/80 mesh), chromatographic grade or equivalent.
6.4.2 Methyl silicone packing—3% OV-1 on Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
6.5 Methanol—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.6 Stock standard solutions—Stock standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions. Prepare stock standard solutions in methanol using assayed liquids. Because of the toxicity of benzene and 1,4-dichlorobenzene, primary dilutions of these materials should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be used when the analyst handles high concentrations of such materials.
6.6.1 Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground glass stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand, unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted surfaces have dried. Weigh the flask to the nearest 0.1 mg.
6.6.2 Using a 100-µL syringe, immediately add two or more drops of assayed reference material to the flask, then reweigh. Be sure that the drops fall directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck of the flask.
6.6.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the flask several times. Calculate the concentration in µg/µL from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.6.4 Transfer the stock standard solution into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle. Store at 4 °C and protect from light.
6.6.5 All standards must be replaced after one month, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.7 Secondary dilution standards—Using stock standard solutions, prepare secondary dilution standards in methanol that contain the compounds of interest, either singly or mixed together. The secondary dilution standards should be prepared at concentrations such that the aqueous calibration standards prepared in Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1 will bracket the working range of the analytical system. Secondary solution standards must be stored with zero headspace and should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Assemble a purge and trap system that meets the specifications in Section 5.2. Condition the trap overnight at 180 °C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min. Condition the trap for 10 min once daily prior to use.
7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to a gas chromatograph. The gas chromatograph must be operated using temperature and flow rate conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge and trap-gas chromatographic system using either the external standard technique (Section 7.3) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.4).
7.3 External standard calibration procedure:
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 µL of one or more secondary dilution standards to 100, 500, or 1000 mL of reagent water. A 25-µL syringe with a 0.006 in. ID needle should be used for this operation. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector. These aqueous standards must be prepared fresh daily.
7.3.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, and tabulate peak height or area responses versus the concentration in the standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.4 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples. The compound, α,α,α,-trifluorotoluene, recommended as a surrogate spiking compound in Section 8.7 has been used successfully as an internal standard.
7.4.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest as described in Section 7.3.1.
7.4.2 Prepare a spiking solution containing each of the internal standards using the procedures described in Sections 6.6 and 6.7. It is recommended that the secondary dilution standard be prepared at a concentration of 15 µg/mL of each internal standard compound. The addition of 10 µl of this
7.4.3 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, adding 10 µL of internal standard spiking solution directly to the syringe (Section 10.4). Tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard, and calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.5 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of a QC check sample.
7.5.1 Prepare the QC check sample as described in Section 8.2.2.
7.5.2 Analyze the QC check sample according to Section 10.
7.5.3 For each parameter, compare the response (Q) with the corresponding calibration acceptance criteria found in Table 2. If the responses for all parameters of interest fall within the designated ranges, analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual Q falls outside the range, a new calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be prepared for that parameter according to Section 7.3 or 7.4.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The mimimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Section 10.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system are under control.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 10 µg/mL in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Prepare a QC check sample to contain 20 µg/L of each parameter by adding 200 µL of QC check sample concentrate to 100 mL of reagant water.
8.2.3 Analyze four 5-mL aliquots of the well-mixed QC check sample according to Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
The large number of parameters in Table 2 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.3, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 20 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.2 Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-mL sample aliquot with 10 µL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 10 µL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
8.7 The analyst should monitor both the performance of the analytical system and the effectiveness of the method in dealing with each sample matrix by spiking each sample, standard, and reagent water blank with surrogate compounds (e.g. α, α, α,-trifluorotoluene) that encompass the range of the temperature program used in this method. From stock standard solutions prepared as in Section 6.6, add a volume to give 750 µg of each surrogate to 45 mL of reagent water contained in a 50-mL volumetric flask, mix and dilute to volume for a concentration of 15 mg/µL. Add 10 µL of this surrogate spiking solution directly into the 5-mL syringe with every sample and reference standard analyzed. Prepare a fresh surrogate spiking solution on a weekly basis. If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the surrogate compounds may be added directly to the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2).
9.1 The samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of collection until analysis. If the sample contains free or combined chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient for up to 5 ppm Cl
9.2 Collect about 500 mL of sample in a clean container. Adjust the pH of the sample to about 2 by adding 1+1 HCl while stirring. Fill the sample bottle in such a manner that no air bubbles pass through the sample as the bottle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no air bubbles are entrapped in it. Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle until time of analysis.
9.3 All samples must be analyzed within 14 days of collection.
10.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are estimated retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by Column 1 is shown in Figure 6. Other packed columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
10.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 40 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device, and set the purge and trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the purging device sample introduction needle.
10.4 Allow the sample to come to ambient temperature prior to introducing it to the syringe. Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel to just short of overflowing. Replace the syringe plunger and compress the sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL. Since this process of taking an aliquot destroys the validity of the sample for future analysis, the analyst should fill a second syringe at this time to protect against possible loss of data. Add 10.0 µL of the surrogate spiking solution (Section 8.7) and 10.0 µL of the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2), if applicable, through the valve bore, then close the valve.
10.5 Attach the syringe-syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve on the purging device. Open the syringe valves and inject the sample into the purging chamber.
10.6 Close both valves and purge the sample for 12.0 ±0.1 min at ambient temperature.
10.7 After the 12-min purge time, disconnect the purging device from the trap. Dry the trap by maintaining a flow of 40 mL/min of dry purge gas through it for 6 min (Figure 4). If the purging device has no provision for bypassing the purger for this step, a dry purger should be inserted into the device to minimize moisture in the gas. Attach the trap to the chromatograph, adjust the purge and trap system to the desorb mode (Figure 5), and begin to temperature program the gas chromatograph. Introduce the trapped materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C while backflushing the trap with an inert gas between 20 and 60 mL/min for 4 min. If rapid heating of the trap cannot be achieved, the GC column must be used as
10.8 While the trap is being desorbed into the gas chromatograph column, empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. Wash the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.
10.9 After desorbing the sample for 4 min, recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15 s, then close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through the trap. The trap temperature should be maintained at 180 °C. After approximately 7 min, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the trap. When the trap is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.
10.10 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
10.11 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, prepare a dilution of the sample with reagent water from the aliquot in the second syringe and reanalyze.
11.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
11.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration of the parameter being measured from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.3.2.
11.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.4.3 and Equation 2.
Equation 2
11.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
12.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
12.2 This method has been demonstrated to be applicable for the concentration range from the MDL to 100 × MDL.
12.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 2.1 to 550 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. Lichtenberg, J.J. “Determining Volatile Organics at Microgram-per-Litre-Levels by Gas Chromatography,” Journal American Water Works Association,
3. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. “Semi-Automated Headspace Analysis of Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for Purgeable Volatile Organic Compounds,” Proceedings of Symposium on Measurement of Organic Pollutants in Water and Wastewater. American Society for Testing and Materials, STP 686, C.E. Van Hall, editor, 1978.
4. “Carcinogens—Working with Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8.“Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268. March 1979.
9. “EPA Method Study 25, Method 602, Purgeable Aromatics,” EPA 600/4-84-042, National Technical Information Service, PB84-196682, Springfield, Virginia 22161, May 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of acrolein and acrylonitrile. The following parameters may be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a purge and trap gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for either or both of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 624 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for the parameters listed above, if used with the purge and trap conditions described in this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 12.1)
1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the operation of a purge and trap system and a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL water sample contained in a heated purging chamber. Acrolein and acrylonitrile are transferred from the aqueous phase to the vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent trap where the analytes are trapped. After the purge is completed, the trap is heated and backflushed with the inert gas to desorb the compound onto a gas chromatographic column. The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed to separate the analytes which are then detected with a flame ionization detector.
2.2 The method provides an optional gas chromatographic column that may be helpful in resolving the compounds of interest from the interferences that may occur.
3.1 Impurities in the purge gas and organic compound outgassing from the plumbing of the trap account for the majority of contamination problems. The analytical system must be demonstrated to be free from contamination under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3. The use of non-Teflon plastic tubing, non-Teflon thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber components in the purge and trap system should be avoided.
3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics through the septum seal into the sample during shipment and storage. A field reagent blank prepared from reagent water and carried through the sampling and handling protocol can serve as a check on such contamination.
3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur whenever high level and low level samples are sequentially analyzed. To reduce carry-over, the purging device and sample syringe must be rinsed between samples with reagent water. Whenever an unusually concentrated sample is encountered, it should be followed by an analysis of reagent water to check for cross contamination. For samples containing large amounts of water-soluble materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds or high analyte levels, it may be necessary to wash the purging device with a detergent solution, rinse it with distilled water, and then dry it in an oven at 105 °C between analyses. The trap and other parts of the system are also subject to contamination, therefore, frequent bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this view point, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sampling.
5.1.1 Vial—25-mL capacity or larger, equipped with a screw cap with a hole in the center (Pierce #13075 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 °C before use.
5.1.2 Septum—Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce #12722 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water and dry at 105 °C for 1 h before use.
5.2 Purge and trap system—The purge and trap system consists of three separate pieces of equipment: a purging device, trap, and desorber. Several complete systems are now commercially available.
5.2.1 The purging device must be designed to accept 5-mL, samples with a water column at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space between the water column and the trap must have a total volume of less than 15 mL. The purge gas must pass through the water column as finely divided bubbles with a diameter of less than 3 mm at the origin. The purge gas must be introduced no more than 5 mm from the base of the water column. The purging device must be capable of being heated to 85 °C within 3.0 min after transfer of the sample to the purging device and being held at 85 ±2 °C during the purge cycle. The entire water column in the purging device must be heated. Design of this modification to the standard purging device is optional, however, use of a water bath is suggested.
5.2.1.1 Heating mantle—To be used to heat water bath.
5.2.1.2 Temperature controller—Equipped with thermocouple/sensor to accurately control water bath temperature to ±2 °C. The purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets these design criteria.
5.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long and have an inside diameter of at least 0.105 in. The trap must be packed to contain 1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing (Section 6.5.2) and 23 cm of 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer (Section 6.5.1). The minimum specifications for the trap are illustrated in Figure 2.
5.2.3 The desorber must be capable of rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C, The desorber illustrated in Figure 2 meets these design criteria.
5.2.4 The purge and trap system may be assembled as a separate unit as illustrated in Figure 3 or be coupled to a gas chromatograph.
5.3 pH paper—Narrow pH range, about 3.5 to 5.5 (Fisher Scientific Short Range Alkacid No. 2, #14-837-2 or equivalent).
5.4 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.4.1 Column 1—10 ft long × 2 mm ID glass or stainless steel, packed with Porapak-QS (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 10.1.
5.4.2 Column 2—6 ft long × 0.1 in. ID glass or stainless steel, packed with Chromosorb 101 (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
5.4.3 Detector—Flame ionization detector. This type of detector has proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 12. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 10.1.
5.5 Syringes—5-mL, glass hypodermic with Luerlok tip (two each).
5.6 Micro syringes—25-µL, 0.006 in. ID needle.
5.7 Syringe valve—2-way, with Luer ends (three each).
5.8 Bottle—15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon cap liner.
5.9 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.1.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a carbon filter bed containing about 1 lb of activated carbon (Filtrasorb-300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).
6.1.2 A water purification system (Millipore Super-Q or equivalent) may be used to generate reagent water.
6.1.3 Regent water may also be prepared by boiling water for 15 min. Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at 90 °C, bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water for 1 h. While still hot, transfer the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bottle and seal with a Teflon-lined septum and cap.
6.2 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.3 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
6.4 Hydrochloric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL of concentrated HCl (ACS) to 50 mL of reagent water.
6.5 Trap Materials:
6.5.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer—Tenax (60/80 mesh), chromatographic grade or equivalent.
6.5.2 Methyl silicone packing—3% OV-1 on Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
6.6 Stock standard solutions—Stock standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions. Prepare stock standard solutions in reagent water using assayed liquids. Since acrolein and acrylonitrile are lachrymators, primary dilutions of these compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be used when the analyst handles high concentrations of such materials.
6.6.1 Place about 9.8 mL of reagent water into a 10-mL ground glass stoppered volumetric flask. For acrolein standards the reagent water must be adjusted to pH 4 to 5. Weight the flask to the nearest 0.1 mg.
6.6.2 Using a 100-µL syringe, immediately add two or more drops of assayed reference material to the flask, then reweigh. Be sure that the drops fall directly into the water without contacting the neck of the flask.
6.6.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the flask several times. Calculate the concentration in µg/µL from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock staldard. Optionally, stock standard solutions may be prepared using the pure standard material by volumetrically measuring the appropriate amounts and determining the weight of the material using the density of the material. Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufactaurer or by an independent source.
6.6.4 Transfer the stock standard solution into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle. Store at 4 °C and protect from light.
6.6.5 Prepare fresh standards daily.
6.7 Secondary dilution standards—Using stock standard solutions, prepare secondary dilution standards in reagent water that contain the compounds of interest, either singly or mixed together. The secondary dilution standards should be prepared at concentrations such that the aqueous calibration standards prepared in Section 7.3.1 or 7.4.1 will bracket the working range of the analytical system. Secondary dilution standards should be prepared daily and stored at 4 °C.
6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Assemble a purge and trap system that meets the specifications in Section 5.2. Condition the trap overnight at 180 °C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min. Condition the trap for 10 min once daily prior to use.
7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to a gas chromatograph. The gas chromatograph must be operated using temperature and flow rate conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. Calibrate the purge and trap-gas chromatographic system using either the external standard technique (Section 7.3) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.4).
7.3 External standard calibration procedure:
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 µL of one or more secondary dilution standards to 100, 500, or 1000 mL of reagent water. A 25-µL syringe with a 0.006 in. ID needle should be used for this operation. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector. These standards must be prepared fresh daily.
7.3.2 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, and tabulate peak height or area responses versus the concentration of the standard. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to concentration (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.4 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.4.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest as described in Section 7.3.1.
7.4.2 Prepare a spiking solution containing each of the internal standards using the procedures described in Sections 6.6 and 6.7. It is recommended that the secondary dilution standard be prepared at a concentration of 15 µg/mL of each internal standard compound. The addition of 10 µL of this standard to 5.0 mL of sample or calibration standard would be equivalent to 30 µg/L.
7.4.3 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 10, adding 10 µL of internal standard spiking solution directly to the syringe (Section 10.4). Tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard, and calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.5 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of a QC check sample.
7.5.1 Prepare the QC check sample as described in Section 8.2.2.
7.5.2 Analyze the QC check sample according to Section 10.
7.5.3 For each parameter, compare the response (Q) with the corresponding calibration acceptance criteria found in Table 2. If the responses for all parameters of interest fall within the designated ranges, analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual Q falls outside the range, a new calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be prepared for that parameter according to Section 7.3 or 7.4.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Section 10.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system are under control.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 25 µg/mL in reagent water. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Prepare a QC check sample to contain 50 µg/L of each parameter by adding 200 µL of QC check sample concentrate to 100 mL of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze four 5-mL aliquots of the well-mixed QC check sample according to Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 50 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.2 Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-mL sample aliquot with 10 µL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 10 µL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 All samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of collection until analysis. If the sample contains free or combined chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient for up to 5 ppm Cl
9.2 If acrolein is to be analyzed, collect about 500 mL of sample in a clean glass container. Adjust the pH of the sample to 4 to 5 using acid or base, measuring with narrow range pH paper. Samples for acrolein analysis receiving no pH adjustment must be analyzed within 3 days of sampling.
9.3 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers having a total volume of at
9.4 All samples must be analyzed within 14 days of collection.
10.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are estimated retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by Column 1 is shown in Figure 5. Other packed columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
10.3 Adjust the purge gas (nitrogen or helium) flow rate to 20 mL-min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device, and set the purge and trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the purging device sample introduction needle.
10.4 Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel to just short of overflowing. Replace the syringe plunger and compress the sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL. Since this process of taking an aliquot destroys the validity of the sample for future analysis, the analyst should fill a second syringe at this time to protect against possible loss of data. Add 10.0 µL of the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.4.2), if applicable, through the valve bore then close the valve.
10.5 Attach the syringe-syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve on the purging device. Open the syringe valves and inject the sample into the purging chamber.
10.6 Close both valves and purge the sample for 15.0 ±0.1 min while heating at 85 ±2 °C.
10.7 After the 15-min purge time, attach the trap to the chromatograph, adjust the purge and trap system to the desorb mode (Figure 4), and begin to temperature program the gas chromatograph. Introduce the trapped materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C while backflushing the trap with an inert gas between 20 and 60 mL/min for 1.5 min.
10.8 While the trap is being desorbed into the gas chromatograph, empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. Wash the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.
10.9 After desorbing the sample for 1.5 min, recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15 s then close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through the trap. The trap temperature should be maintained at 210 °C. After approximately 7 min, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the trap. When the trap is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.
10.10 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
11.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
11.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration of the parameter being measured from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.3.2.
11.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.4.3 and Equation 2.
11.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
12.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
12.2 This method is recommended for the concentration range from the MDL to 1,000×MDL. Direct aqueous injection techniques should be used to measure concentration levels above 1,000×MDL.
12.3 In a single laboratory (Battelle-Columbus), the average recoveries and standard deviations presented in Table 2 were obtained.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. “Determining Volatile Organics at Microgram-per-Litre-Levels by Gas Chromatography,”
3. “Evaluate Test Procedures for Acrolein and Acrylonitrile,” Special letter report for EPA Project 4719-A, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, 27 June 1979.
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
9. “Evaluation of Method 603 (Modified),” EPA-600/4-84-ABC, National Technical Information Service, PB84-, Springfield, Virginia 22161, Nov. 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of phenol and certain substituted phenols. The following parameters may be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a flame ionization detector gas chromatographic (FIDGC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for derivatization, cleanup, and electron capture detector gas chromatography (ECDGC) that can be used to confirm measurements made by FIDGC. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is acidified and extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried and exchanged to 2-propanol during concentration to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by gas chromatography and the phenols are then measured with an FID.
2.2 A preliminary sample wash under basic conditions can be employed for samples having high general organic and organic base interferences.
2.3 The method also provides for a derivatization and column chromatography cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination of interferences.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are coextracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The derivatization cleanup procedure in Section 12 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Tables 1 and 2.
3.3 The basic sample wash (Section 10.2) may cause significantly reduced recovery of phenol and 2,4-dimethylphenol. The analyst must recognize that results obtained under these conditions are minimum concentrations.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this mothod has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2 Special care should be taken in handling pentafluorobenzyl bromide, which is a lachrymator, and 18-crown-6-ether, which is highly toxic.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Chromatographic column—100 mm long × 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or equivalent).
5.2.8 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.9 Reaction flask—15 to 25-mL round bottom flask, with standard tapered joint, fitted with a water-cooled condenser and U-shaped drying tube containing granular calcium chloride.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighting 0.0001 g.
5.6 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.6.1 Column for underivatized phenols—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 1% SP-1240DA on Supelcoport (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 11.1.
5.6.2 Column for derivatized phenols—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 5% OV-17 on Chromosorb W-AW-DMCS (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column has proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for derivatization products of the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 11.1.
5.6.3 Detectors—Flame ionization and electron capture detectors. The FID is used when determining the parent phenols. The ECD is used when determining the derivatized phenols. Guidelines for the use of alternatve detectors are provided in Section 11.1.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
6.3 Sodium hydroxide solution (1 N)—Dissolve 4 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
6.4 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.5 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.6 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL of H
6.7 Sulfuric acid (1 N)—Slowly, add 58 mL of H
6.8 Potassium carbonate—(ACS) Powdered.
6.9 Pentafluorobenzyl bromide (α-Bromopentafluorotoluene)—97% minimum purity.
This chemical is a lachrymator. (See Section 4.2.)
6.10 18-crown-6-ether (1,4,7,10,13,16-Hexaoxacyclooctadecane)—98% minimum purity.
This chemical is highly toxic.
6.11 Derivatization reagent—Add 1 mL of pentafluorobenzyl bromide and 1 g of 18-crown-6-ether to a 50-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with 2-propanol. Prepare fresh weekly. This operation should be carried out in a hood. Store at 4 °C and protect from light.
6.12 Acetone, hexane, methanol, methylene chloride, 2-propanol, toluene—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.13 Silica gel—100/200 mesh, Davison, grade-923 or equivalent. Activate at 130 °C overnight and store in a desiccator.
6.14 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.14.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in 2-propanol
6.14.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.14.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.15 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 To calibrate the FIDGC for the anaylsis of underivatized phenols, establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure for FIDGC:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with 2-propanol. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µl, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 11 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure for FIDGC—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with 2-propanol. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 11 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration curve of response ratios, A
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 To calibrate the ECDGC for the analysis of phenol derivatives, establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 2.
7.5.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with 2-propanol. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 2) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.5.2 Each time samples are to be derivatized, simultaneously treat a 1-mL aliquot of each calibration standard as described in Section 12.
7.5.3 After derivatization, analyze 2 to 5 µL of each column eluate collected according to the method beginning in Section 12.8 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the calculated equivalent mass of underivatized phenol injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound.
7.6 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.6 and 11.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 100 µg/mL in 2-propanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 100 µg/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
The large number of parameters in Talbe 3 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 100 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any, or, if none, (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or 100 µg/L.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6. It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 For samples high in organic content, the analyst may solvent wash the sample at basic pH as prescribed in Sections 10.2.1 and 10.2.2 to remove potential method interferences. Prolonged or exhaustive contact with solvent during the wash may result in low recovery of some of the phenols, notably phenol and 2,4-dimethylphenol. For relatively clean samples, the wash should be omitted and the extraction, beginning with Section 10.3, should be followed.
10.2.1 Adjust the pH of the sample to 12.0 or greater with sodium hydroxide solution.
10.2.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample by shaking the funnel for 1 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Discard the solvent layer. The wash can be repeated up to two additional times if significant color is being removed.
10.3 Adjust the sample to a pH of 1 to 2 with sulfuric acid.
10.4 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.5 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.6 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.7 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.8 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.9 Increase the temperature of the hot water bath to 95 to 100 °C. Remove the Synder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of 2-propanol. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube and prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of 2-propanol to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on the water bath so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will
10.10 Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with a minimum amount of 2-propanol. Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated at 4 °C if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with FIDGC analysis (Section 11). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 12.
10.11 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by this column is shown in Figure 1. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
11.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
11.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.
11.4 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.
11.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound may be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
11.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
11.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, an alternative gas chromatographic procedure is required. Section 12 describes a derivatization and column chromatographic procedure which has been tested and found to be a practical means of analyzing phenols in complex extracts.
12.1 Pipet a 1.0-mL aliquot of the 2-propanol solution of standard or sample extract into a glass reaction vial. Add 1.0 mL of derivatizing reagent (Section 6.11). This amount of reagent is sufficient to derivatize a solution whose total phenolic content does not exceed 0.3 mg/mL.
12.2 Add about 3 mg of potassium carbonate to the solution and shake gently.
12.3 Cap the mixture and heat it for 4 h at 80 °C in a hot water bath.
12.4 Remove the solution from the hot water bath and allow it to cool.
12.5 Add 10 mL of hexane to the reaction flask and shake vigorously for 1 min. Add 3.0 mL of distilled, deionized water to the reaction flask and shake for 2 min. Decant a portion of the organic layer into a concentrator tube and cap with a glass stopper.
12.6 Place 4.0 g of silica gel into a chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the silica gel and add about 2 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
12.7 Preelute the column with 6 mL of hexane. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, pipet onto the column 2.0 mL of the hexane solution (Section 12.5) that contains the derivatized sample or standard. Elute the column with 10.0 mL of hexane and discard the eluate. Elute the column, in order, with: 10.0 mL of 15% toluene in hexane (Fraction 1); 10.0 mL of 40% toluene in hexane (Fraction 2); 10.0 mL of 75% toluene in hexane (Fraction 3); and 10.0 mL of 15% 2-propanol in toluene (Fraction 4). All elution mixtures are prepared on a volume: volume basis. Elution patterns for the phenolic derivatives are shown in Table 2. Fractions may be combined as desired, depending upon the specific phenols of interest or level of interferences.
12.8 Analyze the fractions by ECDGC. Table 2 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by this column is shown in Figure 2.
12.9 Calibrate the system daily with a minimum of three aliquots of calibration standards, containing each of the phenols of interest that are derivatized according to Section 7.5.
12.10 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the column fractions into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique. Smaller (1.0 µL) volumes can be injected if automatic devices are employed. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 µL, and the resulting peak size in area or peak height units. If the peak response exceeds the linear range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample analyzed by FIDGC (without derivatization) as indicated below.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample analyzed by derivatization and ECDGC according to Equation 4.
13.3 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked as six concentrations over the range 12 to 450 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Phenols in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-84-ABC, National Technical Information Service, PBXYZ, Springfield, Virginia 22161, November 1984.
3. Kawahara, F. K. “Microdetermination of Derivatives of Phenols and Mercaptans by Means of Electron Capture Gas Chromatography,”
4. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American
5. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
6. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
7. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
8. Provost, L. P., and Elder, R. S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
9. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
10. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methmds for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
11. Burke, J. A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
12. “Development of Detection Limits, EPA Method 604, Phenols,” Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2625, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
13. “EPA Method Study 14 Method 604-Phenols,” EPA 600/4-84-044, National Technical Information Service, PB84-196211, Springfield, Virginia 22161, May 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain benzidines. The following parameters can be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for the compounds above, identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes electrochemical conditions at a second potential which can be used to confirm measurements made with this method. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for the parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of HPLC instrumentation and in the interpretation of liquid chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with chloroform using liquid-liquid extractions in a separatory funnel. The chloroform extract is extracted with acid. The acid extract is then neutralized and extracted with chloroform. The final chloroform extract is exchanged to methanol while being concentrated using a rotary evaporator. The extract is mixed with buffer and separated by HPLC. The benzidine compounds are measured with an electrochemical detector.
2.2 The acid back-extraction acts as a general purpose cleanup to aid in the elimination of interferences.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedures that are inherent in the extraction step are used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
3.3 Some dye plant effluents contain large amounts of components with retention times closed to benzidine. In these cases, it has been found useful to reduce the electrode potential in order to eliminate interferences and still detect benzidine. (See Section 12.7.)
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health harzard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: benzidine and 3,3′-dichlorobenzidine. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
4.3 Exposure to chloroform should be minimized by performing all extractions and extract concentrations in a hood or other well-ventiliated area.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested):
5.2.1 Separatory funnels—2000, 1000, and 250-mL, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.3 Rotary evaporator.
5.2.4 Flasks—Round bottom, 100-mL, with 24/40 joints.
5.2.5 Centrifuge tubes—Conical, graduated, with Teflon-lined screw caps.
5.2.6 Pipettes—Pasteur, with bulbs.
5.3 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.4 High performance liquid chromatograph (HPLC)—An analytical system complete with column supplies, high pressure syringes, detector, and compatible recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas and retention times.
5.4.1 Solvent delivery system—With pulse damper, Altex 110A or equivalent.
5.4.2 Injection valve (optional)—Waters U6K or equivalent.
5.4.3 Electrochemical detector—Bioanalytical Systems LC-2A with glassy carbon electrode, or equivalent. This detector has proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.1.
5.4.4 Electrode polishing kit—Princeton Applied Research Model 9320 or equivalent.
5.4.5 Column—Lichrosorb RP-2, 5 micron particle diameter, in a 25 cm × 4.6 mm ID stainless steel column. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.1.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (5 N)—Dissolve 20 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
6.3 Sodium hydroxide solution (1 M)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 1 L.
6.4 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.5 Sodium tribasic phosphate (0.4 M)—Dissolve 160 g of trisodium phosphate decahydrate (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 1 L.
6.6 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL of H
6.7 Sulfuric acid (1 M)—Slowly, add 58 mL of H
6.8 Acetate buffer (0.1 M, pH 4.7)—Dissolve 5.8 mL of glacial acetic acid (ACS) and 13.6 g of sodium acetate trihydrate (ACS) in reagent water which has been purified by filtration through a RO-4 Millipore System or equivalent and dilute to 1 L.
6.9 Acetonitrile, chloroform (preserved with 1% ethanol), methanol—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.10 Mobile phase—Place equal volumes of filtered acetonitrile (Millipore type FH filter or equivalent) and filtered acetate buffer (Millipore type GS filter or equivalent) in a narrow-mouth, glass container and mix thoroughly. Prepare fresh weekly. Degas daily by sonicating under vacuum, by heating and stirring, or by purging with helium.
6.11 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.11.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in methanol and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.11.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.11.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.12 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The HPLC system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with mobile phase. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using syringe injections of 5 to 25 µL or a constant volume injection loop, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with mobile phase. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using syringe injections of 5 to 25 µL or a constant volume injection loop, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration curve of response ratios, A
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound. If serious loss of response occurs, polish the electrode and recalibrate.
7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.9, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing benzidine and/or 3,3′-dichlorobenzidine at a concentration of 50 µg/mL each in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 50 µg/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 50 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or 50 µg/L.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Sections 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as HPLC with a dissimilar column, gas chromatography, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C and stored in the dark from the time of collection until extraction. Both benzidine and 3,3′-dichlorobenzidine are easily oxidized. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 If 1,2-diphenylhydrazine is likely to be present, adjust the pH of the sample to 4.0 ±0.2 to prevent rearrangement to benzidine.
9.4 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection. Extracts may be held up to 7 days before analysis, if stored under an inert (oxidant free) atmosphere.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper and adjust to within the range of 6.5 to 7.5 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid.
10.2 Add 100 mL of chloroform to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. (Caution: Handle chloroform in a well ventilated area.) Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends
10.3 Add a 50-mL volume of chloroform to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the separatory funnel. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Separate and discard any aqueous layer remaining in the 250-mL separatory funnel after combining the organic extracts. Add 25 mL of 1 M sulfuric acid and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. Transfer the aqueous layer to a 250-mL beaker. Extract with two additional 25-mL portions of 1 M sulfuric acid and combine the acid extracts in the beaker.
10.5 Place a stirbar in the 250-mL beaker and stir the acid extract while carefully adding 5 mL of 0.4 M sodium tribasic phosphate. While monitoring with a pH meter, neutralize the extract to a pH between 6 and 7 by dropwise addition of 5 N sodium hydroxide solution while stirring the solution vigorously. Approximately 25 to 30 mL of 5 N sodium hydroxide solution will be required and it should be added over at least a 2-min period. Do not allow the sample pH to exceed 8.
10.6 Transfer the neutralized extract into a 250-mL separatory funnel. Add 30 mL of chloroform and shake the funnel for 2 min. Allow the phases to separate, and transfer the organic layer to a second 250-mL separatory funnel.
10.7 Extract the aqueous layer with two additional 20-mL aliquots of chloroform as before. Combine the extracts in the 250-mL separatory funnel.
10.8 Add 20 mL of reagent water to the combined organic layers and shake for 30 s.
10.9 Transfer the organic extract into a 100-mL round bottom flask. Add 20 mL of methanol and concentrate to 5 mL with a rotary evaporator at reduced pressure and 35 °C. An aspirator is recommended for use as the source of vacuum. Chill the receiver with ice. This operation requires approximately 10 min. Other concentration techniques may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.10 Using a 9-in. Pasteur pipette, transfer the extract to a 15-mL, conical, screw-cap centrifuge tube. Rinse the flask, including the entire side wall, with 2-mL portions of methanol and combine with the original extract.
10.11 Carefully concentrate the extract to 0.5 mL using a gentle stream of nitrogen while heating in a 30 °C water bath. Dilute to 2 mL with methanol, reconcentrate to 1 mL, and dilute to 5 mL with acetate buffer. Mix the extract thoroughly. Cap the centrifuge tube and store refrigerated and protected from light if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with HPLC analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.12 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1,000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the HPLC. Included in this table are retention times, capacity factors, and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by this HPLC column is shown in Figure 1. Other HPLC columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met. When the HPLC is idle, it is advisable to maintain a 0.1 mL/min flow through the column to prolong column life.
12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the instrument.
12.4 Inject 5 to 25 µL of the sample extract or standard into the HPLC. If constant volume injection loops are not used, record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 µL, and the resulting peak size in area or peak height units.
12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract with mobile phase and reanalyze.
12.7 If the measurement of the peak response for benzidine is prevented by the presence of interferences, reduce the electrode potential to +0.6 V and reanalyze. If the benzidine peak is still obscured by interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 7×MDL to 3000×MDL.
14.3 This method was tested by 17 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 1.0 to 70 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Benzidines in Industrial and Muncipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-82-022, National Technical Information Service, PB82-196320, Springfield, Virginia 22161, April 1982.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
9. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
10. “EPA Method Study 15, Method 605 (Benzidines),” EPA 600/4-84-062, National Technical Information Service, PB84-211176, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
11. “EPA Method Validation Study 15, Method 605 (Benzidines),” Report for EPA Contract 68-03-2624 (In preparation).
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain phthalate esters. The following parameters can be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are essentially the same as in Methods 608, 609, 611, and 612. Thus, a single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations of these parameters.
1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by gas chromatography and the phthalate esters are then measured with an electron capture detector.
2.2 Analysis for phthalates is especially complicated by their ubiquitous occurrence in the environment. The method provides Florisil and alumina column cleanup procedures to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Phthalate esters are contaminants in many products commonly found in the laboratory. It is particularly important to avoid the use of plastics because phthalates are commonly used as plasticizers and are easily extracted from plastic materials. Serious phthalate contamination can result at any time, if consistent quality control is not practiced. Great care must be experienced to prevent such contamination. Exhaustive cleanup of reagents and glassware may be required to eliminate background phthalate contamination.
3.3 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedures in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only).
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Chromatographic column—300 mm long × 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-420540-0213 or equivalent).
5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or equivalent).
5.2.8 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.6.1 Column 1—1.8 m long × 4 mm ID glass, packed with 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statemelts in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.1.
5.6.2 Column 2—1.8 m long × 4 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-1 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.
5.6.3 Detector—Electron capture detector. This detector has proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.1.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Acetone, hexane, isooctane, methylene chloride, methanol—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.3 Ethyl ether—nanograde, redistilled in glass if necessary.
6.3.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is used as indicated by
6.3.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided with the test strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative must be added to each liter of ether.
6.4 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Several levels of purification may be required in order to reduce background phthalate levels to an acceptable level: 1) Heat 4 h at 400 °C in a shallow tray, 2) Heat 16 h at 450 to 500 °C in a shallow tray, 3) Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride for 48 h.
6.5 Florisil—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 °F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. To prepare for use, place 100 g of Florisil into a 500-mL beaker and heat for approximately 16 h at 40 °C. After heating transfer to a 500-mL reagent bottle. Tightly seal and cool to room temperature. When cool add 3 mL of reagent water. Mix thoroughly by shaking or rolling for 10 min and let it stand for at least 2 h. Keep the bottle sealed tightly.
6.6 Alumina—Neutral activity Super I, W200 series (ICN Life Sciences Group, No. 404583). To prepare for use, place 100 g of alumina into a 500-mL beaker and heat for approximately 16 h at 400 °C. After heating transfer to a 500-mL reagent bottle. Tightly seal and cool to room temperature. When cool add 3 mL of reagent water. Mix thoroughly by shaking or rolling for 10 min and let it stand for at least 2 h. Keep the bottle sealed tightly.
6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in isooctane and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatograph operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepared calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with isooctane. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flash. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with isooctane. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration curve of response ratios, A
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality contrml (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at the following concentrations in acetone: butyl benzyl phthalate, 10 µg/mL; bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, 50 µg/mL; di-n-octyl phthalate, 50 µg/mL; any other phthlate, 25 µg/mL. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agancy, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test concentrations shown in Table 2 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phrase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentrator devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.7 Increase the temperature of the hot water bath to about 80 °C. Momentarily remove the Snyder column, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Concentrate the extract as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. The elapsed time of concentration should be 5 to 10 min.
10.8 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Adjust the extract volume to 10 mL. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11. Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use either procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of
11.2 If the entire extract is to be cleaned up by one of the following procedures, it must be concentrated to 2.0 mL. To the concentrator tube in Section 10.8, add a clean boiling chip and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of hexane to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (80 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of hexane. Adjust the final volume to 2.0 mL and proceed with one of the following cleanup procedures.
11.3 Florisil column cleanup for phthalate esters:
11.3.1 Place 10 g of Florisil into a chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add 1 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.3.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of hexane. The rate for all elutions should be about 2 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 2-mL sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of hexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 40 mL of hexane and continue the elution of the column. Discard this hexane eluate.
11.3.3 Next, elute the column with 100 mL of 20% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the collected fraction as in Section 10.6. No solvent exchange is necessary. Adjust the volume of the cleaned up extract to 10 mL in the concentrator tube and analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
11.4 Alumina column cleanup for phthalate esters:
11.4.1 Place 10 g of alumina into a chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the alumina and add 1 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.4.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of hexane. The rate for all elutions should be about 2 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 2-mL sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of hexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 35 mL of hexane and continue the elution of the column. Discard this hexane eluate.
11.4.3 Next, elute the column with 140 mL of 20% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator type. Concentrate the collected fraction as in Section 10.6. No solvent exchange is necessary. Adjust the volume of the cleaned up extract to 10 mL in the concentrator tube and analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations achieved by Column 1 are shown in Figures 1 and 2. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal staldard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.
12.4 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas-chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.
12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 5 × MDL to 1000 × MDL with the following exceptions: dimethyl and diethyl phthalate recoveries at 1000 × MDL were low (70%); bis-2-ethylhexyl and di-n-octyl phthalate recoveries at 5 × MDL were low (60%).
14.3 This method was tested by 16 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 0.7 to 106 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Phthalates in Industrial and Muncipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-81-063, National Technical Information Service, PB81-232167, Springfield, Virginia 22161, July 1981.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
4. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S., and Nef, G.S. “Sensitive Method for Determination of Phthalate Ester Plasticizers in Open-Ocean Biota Samples,”
5. Giam, C.S., and Chan, H.S. “Control of Blanks in the Analysis of Phthalates in Air and Ocean Biota Samples,” U.S. National Bureau of Standards, Special Publication 442, pp. 701-708, 1976.
6. “Carcinogens—Working with Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
7. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
8. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
9. Provost L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
10. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
11. Burke, J.A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
12. “Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve Studies, EPA Methods 606, 607, and 608,” Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.
13. “EPA Method Study 16 Method 606 (Phthalate Esters),” EPA 600/4-84-056, National Technical Information Service, PB84-211275, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain nitrosamines. The following parameters can be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the parameters listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compmunds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditimns for a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine. In order to confirm the presence of N-nitrosodiphenylamine, the cleanup procedure specified in Section 11.3 or 11.4 must be used. In order to confirm the presence of N-nitrosodimethylamine by GC/MS, Column 1 of this method must be substituted for the column recommended in Method 625. Confirmation of these parameters using GC-high resolution mass spectrometry or a Thermal Energy Analyzer is also recommended.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is washed with dilute hydrochloric acid to remove free amines, dried, and concentrated to a volume of 10 mL or less. After the extract has been exchanged to methanol, it is separated by gas chromatography and the parameters are then measured with a nitrogen-phosphorus detector.
2.2 The method provides Florisil and alumina column cleanup procedures to separate diphenylamine from the nitrosamines and to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedures in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
3.3 N-Nitrosodiphenylamine is reported
3.4 The sensitive and selective Thermal Energy Analyzer and the reductive Hall detector may be used in place of the nitrogen-phosphorus detector when interferences are encountered. The Thermal Energy Analyzer offers the highest selectivity of the non-MS detectors.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2 These nitrosamines are known carcinogens,
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flowmeter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnels—2-L and 250-mL, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.4 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.5 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.8 Chromatographic column—Approximately 400 mm long × 22 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-420540-0234 or equivalent), for use in Florisil column cleanup procedure.
5.2.9 Chromatographic column—Approximately 300 mm long × 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-420540-0213 or equivalent), for use in alumina column cleanup procedure.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.6.1 Column 1—1.8 m long × 4 mm ID glass, packed with 10% Carbowax 20 M/2% KOH on Chromosorb W-AW (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.2.
5.6.2 Column 2—1.8 m long × 4 mm ID glass, packed with 10% SP-2250 on Supel-coport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.
5.6.3 Detector—Nitrogen-phosphorus, reductive Hall, or Thermal Energy Analyzer detector.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 ml.
6.3 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL of H
6.5 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.6 Hydrochloric acid (1+9)—Add one volume of concentrated HCl (ACS) to nine volumes of reagent water.
6.7 Acetone, methanol, methylene chloride, pentane—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.8 Ethyl ether—Nanograde, redistilled in glass if necessary.
6.8.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is used as indicated by EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Available from Scientific Products Co., Cat No. P1126-8, and other suppliers.)
6.8.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided with the test strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative must be added to each liter of ether.
6.9 Florisil—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 °F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at least 16 h at 130 °C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to cool.
6.10 Alumina—Basic activity Super I, W200 series (ICN Life Sciences Group, No. 404571, or equivalent). To prepare for use, place 100 g of alumina into a 500-mL reagent bottle and add 2 mL of reagent water. Mix the alumina preparation thoroughly by shaking or rolling for 10 min and let it stand for at least 2 h. The preparation should be homogeneous before use. Keep the bottle sealed tightly to ensure proper activity.
6.11 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.11.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in methanol and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.11.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.11.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.12 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with methanol. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with methanol. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration curve of response ratios, A
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.2) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 20 µg/mL in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 20 µg/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 20 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or 20 µg/L.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were caluclated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
9.4 Nitrosamines are known to be light sensitive.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper and adjust to within the range of 5 to 9 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid.
10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.5 Add 10 mL of hydrochloric acid to the combined extracts and shake for 2 min. Allow the layers to separate. Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.7 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If N-nitrosodiphenylamine is to be measured by gas chromatography, the analyst must first use a cleanup column to eliminate diphenylamine interference (Section 11). If N-nitrosodiphenylamine is of no interest, the analyst may proceed directly with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12).
10.8 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use either procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure. Diphenylamine, if present in the original sample extract, must be separated from the nitrosamines if N-nitrosodiphenylamine is to be determined by this method.
11.2 If the entire extract is to be cleaned up by one of the following procedures, it must be concentrated to 2.0 mL. To the concentrator tube in Section 10.7, add a clean boiling chip and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the micr-K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of methylene chloride. Adjust the final volume to 2.0 mL and proceed with one of the following cleanup procedures.
11.3 Florisil column cleanup for nitrosamines:
11.3.1 Place 22 g of activated Florisil into a 22-mm ID chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add about 5 mm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.3.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of ethyl ether/pentane (15+85)(V/V). Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 2-mL sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of pentane to complete the transfer.
11.3.3 Elute the column with 90 mL of ethyl ether/pentane (15+85)(V/V) and discard the eluate. This fraction will contain the diphenylamine, if it is present in the extract.
11.3.4 Next, elute the column with 100 mL of acetone/ethyl ether (5+95)(V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. This fraction will contain all of the nitrosamines listed in the scope of the method.
11.3.5 Add 15 mL of methanol to the collected fraction and concentrate as in Section 10.6, except use pentane to prewet the column and set the water bath at 70 to 75 °C. When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of pentane. Analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
11.4 Alumina column cleanup for nitrosamines:
11.4.1 Place 12 g of the alumina preparation (Section 6.10) into a 10-mm ID chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the alumina and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.4.2 Preelute the column with 10 mL of ethyl ether/pentane (3+7)(V/V). Discard the eluate (about 2 mL) and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 2 mL sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of pentane to complete the transfer.
11.4.3 Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 70 mL of ethyl ether/pentane (3+7)(V/V). Discard the first 10 mL of eluate. Collect the remainder of the eluate in a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10 mL concentrator tube. This fraction contains N-nitrosodiphenylamine and probably a small amount of N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine.
11.4.4 Next, elute the column with 60 mL of ethyl ether/pentane (1+1)(V/V), collecting the eluate in a second K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Add 15 mL of methanol to the K-D flask. This fraction will contain N-nitrosodimethylamine, most of the N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine and any diphenylamine that is present.
11.4.5 Concentrate both fractions as in Section 10.6, except use pentane to prewet the column. When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of pentane. Analyze the fractions by gas chromatography (Section 12).
12.1 N-nitrosodiphenylamine completely reacts to form diphenylamine at the normal operating temperatures of a GC injection port (200 to 250 °C). Thus, N-nitrosodiphenylamine is chromatographed and detected as diphenylamine. Accurate determination depends on removal of diphenylamine that may be present in the original extract prior to GC analysis (See Section 11).
12.2 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations achieved by Column 1 are shown in Figures 1 and 2. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
12.3 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.4 If the extract has not been subjected to one of the cleanup procedures in Section 11, it is necessary to exchange the solvent from methylene chloride to methanol before the thermionic detector can be used. To a 1 to 10-mL volume of methylene chloride extract in a concentrator tube, add 2 mL of methanol and a clean boiling chip. Attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column to the concentrator tube. Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a boiling (100 °C) water bath so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of methanol. Adjust the final volume to 2.0 mL.
12.5 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.
12.6 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.
12.7 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.8 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
12.9 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 4 × MDL to 1000 × MDL.
14.3 This method was tested by 17 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 0.8 to 55 µg/L.
1. Fine, D.H., Lieb, D., and Rufeh, R. “Principle of Operation of the Thermal Energy Analyzer for the Trace Analysis of Volatile and Non-volatile N-nitroso Compounds,”
2. Fine, D.H., Hoffman, F., Rounbehler, D.P., and Belcher, N.M. “Analysis of N-nitroso Compounds by Combined High Performance Liquid Chromatography and Thermal Energy Analysis,” Walker, E.A., Bogovski, P. and Griciute, L., Editors, N-nitroso Compounds—Analysis and Formation, Lyon, International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC Scientific Publications No. 14), pp. 43-50 (1976).
3. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
4. “Determination of Nitrosamines in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-82-016, National Technical Information Service, PB82-199621, Springfield, Virginia 22161, April 1982.
5. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
6. Buglass, A.J., Challis, B.C., and Osborn, M.R. “Transnitrosation and Decomposition of Nitrosamines,” Bogovski, P. and Walker, E.A., Editors, N-nitroso Compounds in the Environment, Lyon, International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC Scientific Publication No. 9), pp. 94-100 (1974).
7. Burgess, E.M., and Lavanish, J.M. “Photochemical Decomposition of N-nitrosamines,”
8. Druckrey, H., Preussmann, R., Ivankovic, S., and Schmahl, D. “Organotrope Carcinogene Wirkungen bei 65 Verschiedenen N-NitrosoVerbindungen an BD-Ratten,”
9. Fiddler, W. “The Occurrence and Determination of N-nitroso Compounds,”
10. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
11. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR Part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
12. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
13. Lijinsky, W. “How Nitrosamines Cause Cancer,”
14. Mirvish, S.S. “N-Nitroso compounds: Their Chemical and in vivo Formation and Possible Importance as Environmental Carcinogens,”
15. “Reconnaissance of Environmental Levels of Nitrosamines in the Central United States,” EPA-330/1-77-001, National Enforcement Investigations Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (1977).
16. “Atmospheric Nitrosamine Assessment Report,” Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina (1976).
17. “Scientific and Technical Assessment Report on Nitrosamines,” EPA-660/6-7-001, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (1976).
18. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
19. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
20. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
21. Burke, J. A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
22. “Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve Studies EPA Methods 606, 607, and 608,” Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.
23. “EPA Method Study 17 Method 607—Nitrosamines,” EPA 600/4-84-051, National Technical Information Service, PB84-207646, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain organochlorine pesticides and PCBs. The following parameters can be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are essentially the same as in Methods 606, 609, 611, and 612. Thus, a single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations of these parameters.
1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by gas chromatography and the parameters are then measured with an electron capture detector.
2.2 The method provides a Florisil column cleanup procedure and an elemental sulfur removal procedure to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Interferences by phthalate esters can pose a major problem in pesticide analysis when using the electron capture detector. These compounds generally appear in the chromatogram as large late eluting peaks, especially in the 15 and 50% fractions from Florisil. Common flexible plastics contain varying amounts of phthalates. These phthalates are easily extracted or leached from such materials during laboratory operations. Cross contamination of clean glassware routinely occurs when plastics are handled during extraction steps, especially when solvent-wetted surfaces are handled. Interferences from phthalates can best be minimized by avoiding the use of plastics in the laboratory. Exhaustive cleanup of reagents and glassware may be required to eliminate background phthalate contamination.
3.3 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedures in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: 4,4′-DDT, 4,4′-DDD, the BHCs, and the PCBs. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during composting. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2. Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Chromatographic column—400 mm long × 22 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc (Kontes K-42054 or equivalent).
5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna/Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-
5.6.1 Column 1—1.8 m long × 4 mm ID glass, packed with 1.5% SP-2250/1.95% SP-2401 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.1.
5.6.2 Column 2—1.8 m long × 4 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-1 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent.
5.6.3 Detector—Electron capture detector. This detector has proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.1.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
6.3 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL to H
6.5 Acetone, hexane, isooctane, methylene chloride—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.6 Ethyl ether—Nanograde, redistilled in glass if necessary.
6.6.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is used as indicated by EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Available from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No. P1126-8, and other suppliers.)
6.6.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided with the test strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative must be added to each liter of ether.
6.7 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.8 Florisil—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 °F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at least 16 h at 130 °C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to cool.
6.9 Mercury—Triple distilled.
6.10 Copper powder—Activated.
6.11 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.11.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in isooctane and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.11.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.11.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.12 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with isooctane. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with isooctane. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration curve of response ratios, A
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, the test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. Alternatively, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 The cleanup procedure in Section 11 utilizes Florisil column chromatography. Florisil from different batches or sources may vary in adsorptive capacity. To standardize the amount of Florisil which is used, the use of lauric acid value
7.6 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each single-component parameter of interest at the following concentrations in acetone: 4,4′-DDD, 10 µg/mL; 4,4′-DDT, 10 µg/mL; endosulfan II, 10 µg/mL; endosulfan sulfate, 10 µg/mL; endrin, 10 µg/mL; any other single-component pesticide, 2 µg/mL. If this method is only to be used to analyze for PCBs, chlordane, or toxaphene, the QC check sample concentrate should contain the most representative multicomponent parameter at a concentration of 50 µg/mL in acetone. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test concentrations shown in Table 3 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
The large number of parameters in Table 3 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compmunds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 3 must be measured in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check standard should be routinely analyzed with the spike sample.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standards to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction. If the samples will not be extracted within 72 h of collection, the sample should be adjusted to a pH range of 5.0 to 9.0 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid. Record the volume of acid or base used. If aldrin is to be determined, add sodium thiosulfate when residual chlorine is present. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optium technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.7 Increase the temperature of the hot water bath to about 80 °C. Momeltarily remove the Snyder column, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Concentrate the extract as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. The elapsed time of concentration should be 5 to 10 min.
10.8 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use either procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure. The Florisil column allows for a select fractionation of the compounds and will eliminate polar interferences. Elemental sulfur, which interferes with the electron capture gas chromatography of certain pesticides, can be removed by the technique described in Section 11.3.
11.2 Florisil column cleanup:
11.2.1 Place a weight of Florisil (nominally 20 g) predetermined by calibration (Section 7.5), into a chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.2.2 Add 60 mL of hexane to wet and rinse the sodium sulfate and Florisil. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, stop the elution of the hexane by closing the stopcock on the chromatographic column. Discard the eluate.
11.2.3 Adjust the sample extract volume to 10 mL with hexane and transfer it from the K-D concentrator tube onto the column. Rinse the tube twice with 1 to 2 mL of hexane, adding each rinse to the column.
11.2.4 Place a 500-mL K-D flask and clean concentrator tube under the chromatographic column. Drain the column into the flask until the sodium sulfate layer is nearly exposed. Elute the column with 200 mL of 6% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 1) at a rate of about 5 mL/min. Remove the K-D flask and set it aside for later concentration. Elute the column again, using 200 mL of 15% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 2), into a second K-D flask. Perform the third elution using 200 mL of 50% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 3). The elution patterns for the pesticides and PCBs are shown in Table 2.
11.2.5 Concentrate the fractions as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column and set the water bath at about 85 °C. When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with hexane. Adjust the volume of each fraction to 10 mL with hexane and analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
11.3 Elemental sulfur will usually elute entirely in Fraction 1 of the Florisil column cleanup. To remove sulfur interference from this fraction or the original extract, pipet 1.00 mL of the concentrated extract into a clean concentrator tube or Teflon-sealed vial. Add one to three drops of mercury and seal.
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations achieved by Column 1 are shown in Figures 1 to 10. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.
12.4 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.
12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 When it is apparent that two or more PCB (Aroclor) mixtures are present, the Webb and McCall procedure
13.3 For multicomponent mixtures (chlordane, toxaphene, and PCBs) match retention times of peaks in the standards with peaks in the sample. Quantitate every identifiable peak unless interference with individual peaks persist after cleanup. Add peak height or peak area of each identified peak in the chromatogram. Calculate as total response in the sample versus total response in the standard.
13.4 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 4×MDL to 1000×MDL with the following exceptions: Chlordane recovery at 4×MDL was low (60%); Toxaphene recovery was demonstrated linear over the range of 10×MDL to 1000×MDL.
14.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Pesticides and PCBs in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-82-023, National Technical Information Service, PB82-214222, Springfield, Virginia 22161, April 1982.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
4. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S., and Nef, G.S., “Sensitive Method for Determination of Phthalate Ester Plasticizers in Open-Ocean Biota Samples,”
5. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S. “Control of Blanks in the Analysis of Phthalates in Air and Ocean Biota Samples,” U.S. National Bureau of Standards, Special Publication 442, pp. 701-708, 1976.
6. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
7. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
8. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
9. Mills, P.A. “Variation of Florisil Activity: Simple Method for Measuring Absorbent Capacity and Its Use in Standardizing Florisil Columns,”
10. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
11. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
12. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
13. Goerlitz, D.F., and Law, L.M.
14. “Manual of Analytical Methods for the Analysis of Pesticides in Human and Environmental Samples,” EPA-600/8-80-038, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Health Effects Research Laboratory, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina.
15. Burke, J.A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
16. Webb, R.G., and McCall, A.C. “Quantitative PCB Standards for Election Capture Gas Chromatography,”
17. “Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve Studies, EPA Methods 606, 607, and 608,” Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.
18. “EPA Method Study 18 Method 608—Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs,” EPA 600/4-84-061, National Technical Information Service, PB84-211358, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain nitroaromatics and isophorone. The following parameters may be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are essentially the same as in Methods 606, 608, 611, and 612. Thus, a single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations of these parameters.
1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration to a volume of 10 mL or less. Isophorone and nitrobenzene are measured by flame ionization detector gas chromatography (FIDGC). The dinitrotoluenes are measured by electron capture detector gas chromatography (ECDGC).
2.2 The method provides a Florisil column cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baseliles in gas chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedure in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Chromatographic column—100 mm long × 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or equivalent).
5.2.8 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.6.1 Column 1—1.2 m long × 2 or 4 mm ID glass, packed with 1.95% QF-1/1.5% OV-17 on Gas-Chrom Q (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements given in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.1.
5.6.2 Column 2—3.0 m long × 2 or 4 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-101 on Gas-Chrom Q (80/100 mesh) or equivalent.
5.6.3 Detectors—Flame ionization and electron capture detectors. The flame ionization detector (FID) is used when determining isophorone and nitrobenzene. The electron capture detector (ECD) is used when determining the dinitrotoluenes. Both detectors have proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters and were used in develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use to alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.1.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
6.3 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL of H
6.4 Acetone, hexane, methanol, methylene chloride—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.5 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.6 Florisil—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 °F and store in dark in glass containers with ground glass stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at least 16 h at 200 °C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to cool.
6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in hexane and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles.
6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with hexane. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD) linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flash. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with hexane. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
Equation 1.
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (<10% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be invariant and the average RF can be used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a calibration curve of response ratios, A
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1,5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest in acetone at a concentration of 20 µg/mL for each dinitrotoluene and 100 µg/mL for isophorone and nitrobenzene. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test concentrations shown in Table 2 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determile background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100 (A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4. If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper and adjust to within the range of 5 to 9 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid.
10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration
10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.6 Sections 10.7 and 10.8 describe a procedure for exchanging the methylene chloride solvent to hexane while concentrating the extract volume to 1.0 mL. When it is not necessary to achieve the MDL in Table 2, the solvent exchange may be made by the addition of 50 mL of hexane and concentration to 10 mL as described in Method 606, Sections 10.7 and 10.8.
10.7 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.8 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Add 1 to 2 mL of hexane and a clean boiling chip to the concentrator tube and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding about 0.5 mL of hexane to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.9 Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with a minimum amount of hexane. Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.10 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use the procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
11.2 Florisil column cleanup:
11.2.1 Prepare a slurry of 10 g of activated Florisil in methylene chloride/hexane (1+9)(V/V) and place the Florisil into a chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add 1 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top. Adjust the elution rate to about 2 mL/min.
11.2.2 Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL of hexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 30 mL of methylene chloride/hexane (1 + 9)(V/V) and continue the elution of the column. Discard the eluate.
11.2.3 Next, elute the column with 30 mL of acetone/methylene chloride (1 + 9)(V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the collected fraction as in Sections 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, and 10.9 including the solvent exchange to 1 mL of hexane. This fraction should contain the nitroaromatics and isophorone. Analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
12.1 Isophorone and nitrobenzene are analyzed by injection of a portion of the extract into an FIDGC. The dinitrotoluenes are analyzed by a separate injection into an ECDGC. Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph.
12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the same extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.
12.4 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.
12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 7×MDL to 1000×MDL.
14.3 This method was tested by 18 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 1.0 to 515 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Nitroaromatic Compounds and Isophorone in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/ 4-82-024, National Technical Information Service, PB82-208398, Springfield, Virginia 22161, May 1982.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
9. Burke, J.A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
10. “Determination of Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve for EPA Method 609—Nitroaromatics and Isophorone,” Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2624, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.
11. “EPA Method Study 19, Method 609 (Nitroaromatics and Isophorone),” EPA 600/4-84-018, National Technical Information Service, PB84-176908, Springfield, Virginia 22161, March 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH). The following parameters can be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a chromatographic method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for many of the parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 This method provides for both high performance liquid chromatographic (HPLC) and gas chromatographic (GC) approaches for the determination of PAHs. The gas chromatographic procedure does not adequately resolve the following four pairs of compounds: Anthracene and phenanthrene; chrysene and benzo(a)anthracene; benzo(b)fluoranthene and benzo(k)fluoranthene; and dibenzo(a,h) anthracene and indeno (1,2,3-cd)pyrene. Unless the purpose for the analysis can be served by reporting the sum of an unresolved pair, the liquid chromatographic approach must be used for these compounds. The liquid chromatographic method does resolve all 16 of the PAHs listed.
1.4 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 15.1)
1.5 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are essentially the same as in Methods 606, 608, 609, 611, and 612. Thus, a single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. Selection of the aliquots must be made prior to the solvent exchange steps of this method. The analyst is allowed the latitude, under Sections 12 and 13, to select chromatographic conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations of these parameters.
1.6 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.7 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of HPLC and GC systems and in the interpretation of liquid and gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried and concentrated to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is then separated by HPLC or GC. Ultraviolet (UV) and fluorescence detectors are used with HPLC to identify and measure the PAHs. A flame ionization detector is used with GC.
2.2 The method provides a silica gel column cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardward that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in the chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedure in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
3.3 The extent of interferences that may be encountered using liquid chromatographic techniques has not been fully assessed. Although the HPLC conditions described allow for a unique resolution of the specific PAH compounds covered by this method, other PAH compounds may interfere.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method have not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: benzo(a)anthracene, benzo(a)pyrene, and dibenzo(a,h)-anthracene. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.4 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.5 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.8 Chromatographic column—250 mm long × 10 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc at bottom and Teflon stopcock.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 High performance liquid chromatograph (HPLC)—An analytical system complete with column supplies, high pressure syringes, detectors, and compatible strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas and retention times.
5.6.1 Gradient pumping system—Constant flow.
5.6.2 Reverse phase column—HC-ODS Sil-X, 5 micron particle diameter, in a 25 cm × 2.6 mm ID stainless steel column (Perkin Elmer No. 089-0716 or equivalent). This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 15. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.2.
5.6.3 Detectors—Fluorescence and/or UV detectors. The fluorescence detector is used for excitation at 280 nm and emission greater than 389 nm cutoff (Corning 3-75 or equivalent). Fluorometers should have dispersive optics for excitation and can utilize either filter or dispersive optics at the emission detector. The UV detector is used at 254 nm and should be coupled to the fluorescence detector. These detectors were used to develop the method performance statements in Section 15. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.2.
5.7 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column or splitless injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.7.1 Column—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 3% OV-17 on Chromosorb W-AW-DCMS (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the retention time data in Table 2. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 13.3.
5.7.2 Detector—Flame ionization detector. This detector has proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), excluding the four pairs of unresolved compounds listed in Section 1.3. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 13.3.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.3 Cyclohexane, methanol, acetone, methylene chloride, pentane—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.4 Acetonitrile—HPLC quality, distilled in glass.
6.5 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.6 Silica gel—100/200 mesh, desiccant, Davison, grade-923 or equivalent. Before use, activate for at least 16 h at 130 °C in a shallow glass tray, loosely covered with foil.
6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in acetonitrile and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish liquid or gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1 or 2. The chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with acetonitrile. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 5 to 25 µL for HPLC and 2 to 5 µL for GC, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 or 13, as appropriate. Tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with acetonitrile. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 5 to 25 µL for HPLC and 2 to 5 µL for GC, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 or 13, as appropriate. Tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, the test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. Alternatively, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, 12.2, and 13.3) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at the following concentrations in acetonitrile: 100 µg/mL of any
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test concentrations shown in Table 3 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
The large number of parameters in Table 3 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none, (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100 (A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 3. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 3 must be measured in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check standard should be routinely analyzed with the spike sample.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction. PAHs are known to be light sensitive; therefore, samples, extracts, and standards should be stored in amber or foil-wrapped bottles in order to minimize photolytic decomposition. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.7 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial and protected from light. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas or liquid chromatographic analysis (Section 12 or 13). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.8 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use the procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the methods as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
11.2 Before the silica gel cleanup technique can be utilized, the extract solvent must be exchanged to cyclohexane. Add 1 to 10 mL of the sample extract (in methylene chloride) and a boiling chip to a clean K-D concentrator tube. Add 4 mL of cyclohexane and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding 0.5 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a boiling (100 °C) water bath so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of the liquid reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with a minimum amount of cyclohexane. Adjust the extract volume to about 2 mL.
11.3 Silica gel column cleanup for PAHs:
11.3.1 Prepare a slurry of 10 g of activiated silica gel in methylene chloride and place this into a 10-mm ID chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the silica gel and elute the methylene chloride. Add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top of the silica gel.
11.3.2 Preelute the column with 40 mL of pentane. The rate for all elutions should be about 2 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, transfer the 2-mL cyclohexane sample extract onto the column using an additional 2 mL cyclohexane to complete the transfer. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 25 mL of pentane and continue the elution of the column. Discard this pentane eluate.
11.3.3 Next, elute the column with 25 mL of methylene chloride/pentane (4+6)(V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the collected fraction to less than 10 mL as in Section 10.6. When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint with pentane. Proceed with HPLC or GC analysis.
12.1 To the extract in the concentrator tube, add 4 mL of acetonitrile and a new boiling chip, then attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Concentrate the solvent as in Section 10.6, except set the water bath at 95 to 100 °C. When the apparatus is cool, remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with about 0.2 mL of acetonitrile. Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL.
12.2 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the HPLC. Included in this table are retention times, capacity factors, and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. The UV detector is recommended for the determination of naphthalene, acenaphthylene, acenapthene, and
12.3 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.4 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the instrument.
12.5 Inject 5 to 25 µL of the sample extract or standard into the HPLC using a high pressure syringe or a constant volume sample injection loop. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.1 µL, and the resulting peak size in area or peak height units. Re-equilibrate the HPLC column at the initial gradient conditions for at least 10 min between injections.
12.6 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention time of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.7 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract with acetonitrile and reanalyze.
12.8 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 The packed column GC procedure will not resolve certain isomeric pairs as indicated in Section 1.3 and Table 2. The liquid chromatographic procedure (Section 12) must be used for these parameters.
13.2 To achieve maximum sensitivity with this method, the extract must be concentrated to 1.0 mL. Add a clean boiling chip to the methylene chloride extract in the concentrator tube. Attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the micro-Snyder column by adding about 0.5 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with a minimum amount of methylene chloride. Adjust the final volume to 1.0 mL and stopper the concentrator tube.
13.3 Table 2 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times that were obtained under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by this column is shown in Figure 3. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
13.4 Calibrate the gas chromatographic system daily as described in Section 7.
13.5 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.
13.6 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.
13.7 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
13.8 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
13.9 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
14.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
14.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
14.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
15.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
15.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 8 × MDL to 800 × MDL
15.3 This method was tested by 16 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 0.1 to 425 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-82-025, National Technical Information Service, PB82-258799, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1982.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
9. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
10. Burke, J.A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
11. Cole, T., Riggin, R., and Glaser, J. “Evaluation of Method Detection Limits and Analytical Curve for EPA Method 610—PNAs,” International Symposium on Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons, 5th, Battelle's Columbus Laboratories, Columbus, Ohio (1980).
12. “EPA Method Study 20, Method 610 (PNA's),” EPA 600/4-84-063, National Technical Information Service, PB84-211614, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain haloethers. The following parameters can be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are essentially the same as in Methods 606, 608, 609, and 612. Thus, a single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select
1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by gas chromatography and the parameters are then measured with a halide specific detector.
2.2 The method provides a Florisil column cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedure in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
3.3 Dichlorobenzenes are known to coelute with haloethers under some gas chromatographic conditions. If these materials are present together in a sample, it may be necessary to analyze the extract with two different column packings to completely resolve all of the compounds.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Chromatographic column—400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom (Kontes K-420540-0224 or equivalent).
5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.6.1 Column 1—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 3% SP-1000 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 12.1.
5.6.2 Column 2—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer (60/80 mesh), Tenax, or equivalent.
5.6.3 Detector—Halide specific detector: electrolytic conductivity or microcoulometric. These detectors have proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1). The Hall conductivity detector was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.1. Although less selective, an electron capture detector is an acceptable alternative.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.3 Acetone, hexane, methanol, methylene chloride, petroleum ether (boiling range 30-60 °C)—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.4 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.5 Florisil—PR Grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 °F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at least 16 h at 130 °C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to cool.
6.6 Ethyl ether—Nanograde, redistilled in glass if necessary.
6.6.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is used as indicated by EM Laboratories Quant test strips. (Available from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No. P1126-8, and other suppliers.)
6.6.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided with the test strips. After cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative must be added to each liter of ether.
6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in acetone and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.8 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with hexane. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with hexane. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 The cleanup procedure in Section 11 utilizes Florisil column chromatography. Florisil from different batches or sources may vary in adsorptive capacity. To standardize the amount of Florisil which is used, the use of lauric acid value
7.6 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 100 µg/mL in acetone. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 100 µg/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1. The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 100 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or 100 µg/L.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 m/L of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time,
10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
Some of the haloethers are very volatile and significant losses will occur in concentration steps if care is not exercised. It is important to maintain a constant gentle evaporation rate and not to allow the liquid volume to fall below 1 to 2 mL before removing the K-D apparatus from the hot water bath.
10.7 Momentarily remove the Snyder column, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Raise the temperature of the water bath to 85 to 90 °C. Concentrate the extract as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. The elapsed time of concentration should be 5 to 10 min.
10.8 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use the procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
11.2 Florisil column cleanup for haloethers:
11.2.1 Adjust the sample extract volume to 10 mL.
11.2.2 Place a weight of Florisil (nominally 20 g) predetermined by calibration (Section 7.5), into a chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.2.3 Preelute the column with 50 to 60 mL of petroleum ether. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the sample extract onto the column by decantation and subsequent petroleum ether washings. Discard the eluate. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, begin eluting the column with 300 mL of ethyl ether/petroleum ether (6+94) (V/V). Adjust the elution rate to approximately 5 mL/min and collect the eluate in a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. This fraction should contain all of the haloethers.
11.2.4 Concentrate the fraction as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with hexane. Adjust the volume of the cleaned up extract to 10 mL with hexane and analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations achieved by Columns 1 and 2 are shown in Figures 1 and 2, respectively. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatrograph.
12.4 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush technique.
12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weight heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 4 × MDL to 1000 × MDL.
14.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 1.0 to 626 µ/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Haloethers in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-81-062, National Technical Information Service, PB81-232290, Springfield, Virginia 22161, July 1981.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constitutents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
4. “Carcinogens—Working Carcinogens, ” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Services, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Mills., P.A. “Variation of Florisil Activity: Simple Method for Measuring Absorbent Capacity and Its Use in Standardizing
8. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
9. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
10. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
11. Burke, J.A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
12. “EPA Method Study 21, Method 611, Haloethers,” EPA 600/4-84-052, National Technical Information Service, PB84-205939, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain chlorinated hydrocarbons. The following parameters can be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes a second gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary column. Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are essentially the same as in Methods 606, 608, 609, and 611. Thus, a single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the concentration levels must be high enough to permit selecting aliquots, as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The analyst is allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic conditions appropriate for the simultaneous measurement of combinations of these parameters.
1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried and exchanged to hexane during concentration to a volume of 10 mL or less. The extract is separated by gas chromatography and the parameters are then measured with an electron capture detector.
2.2 The method provides a Florisil column cleanup procedure to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedure in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1cL or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long × 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Chromatographic column—300 long × 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom.
5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.5 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector, and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended for measuring peak areas.
5.6.1 Column 1—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 1% SP-1000 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provide in Section 12.1.
5.6.2 Column 2—1.8 m long ×2 mm ID glass, packed with 1.5% OV-1/2.4% OV-225 on Supelcoport (80/100 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14.
5.6.3 Detector—Electron capture detector. This detector has proven effective in the analysis of wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), and was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are provided in Section 12.1.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Acetone, hexane, isooctane, methanol, methylene chloride, petroleum ether (boiling range 30 to 60 °C)—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.3 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.4 Florisil—PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250 °F and store in the dark in glass containers with ground glass stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at least 16 h at 130 °C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to cool.
6.5 Stock standard solution (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.5.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in isooctane and dilute to volume in a 120-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.5.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.5.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparision with check standards indicates a problem.
6.6 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1. The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2) or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with isooctane. One of the external standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (<10% relative standard deviation, RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select one or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with isooctane. One of the standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When the results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at the following concentrations in acetone: Hexachloro-substituted parameters, 10 µg/mL; any other chlorinated hydrocarbon, 100 µg/mL. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at the test concentrations shown in Table 2 by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
The large number of parameters in Table 2 presents a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spike sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none by (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. In necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100 (A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4. If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Sections 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the chromatogram, confirmatory techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevent performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 60 mL of methylele chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.3 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.5 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.6 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 to 2 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
The dichloribenzenes have a sufficiently high volatility that significant losses may occur in concentration steps if care is not exercised. It is important to maintain a constant gentle evaporation rate and not to allow the liquid volume to fall below 1 to 2 mL before removing the K-D apparatus from the hot water bath.
10.7 Momentarily remove the Snyder column, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Raise the tempeature of the water bath to 85 to 90 °C. Concentrate the extract as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. The elapsed time of concentration should be 5 to 10 min.
10.8 Romove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored longer than two days, it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic analysis (Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.9 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use the procedure below or any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure.
11.2 Florisil column cleanup for chlorinated hydrocarbons:
11.2.1 Adjust the sample extract to 10 mL with hexane.
11.2.2 Place 12 g of Florisil into a chromatographic column. Tap the column to settle the Florisil and add 1 to 2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.2.3 Preelute the column with 100 mL of petroleum ether. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the sample extract onto the column by decantation and subsequent petroleum ether washings. Discard the eluate. Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, begin eluting the column with 200 mL of petroleum ether and collect the eluate in a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. This fraction should contain all of the chlorinated hydrocarbons.
11.2.4 Concentrate the fraction as in Section 10.6, except use hexane to prewet the column. When the apparatus is cool, remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with hexane. Analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. Examples of the separations achieved by Columl 2 are shown in Figures 1 and 2. Other packed or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
12.2 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed throughly immediately before injection into the gas chromatograph.
12.4 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using the solvent-flush techlique.
12.5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the standard deviation of a retention time for a compound can be used to calculate a suggested window size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of chromatograms.
12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences, further cleanup is required.
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from Equation 2.
13.1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
13.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method has been tested for linearity of spike recovery from reagent water and has been demonstrated to be applicable over the concentration range from 4×MDL to 1000×MDL.
14.3 This method was tested by 20 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 1.0 to 356 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of Chlorinated Hydrocarbons In Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters, “EPA 6090/4-84-ABC, National Technical Information Service, PBXYZ, Springfield, Virginia, 22161 November 1984.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
9. Burke, J.A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
10. “Development of Detection Limits, EPA Method 612, Chlorinated Hydrocarbons,” Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2625, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
11. “EPA Method Study Method 612—Chlorinated Hydrocarbons,” EPA 600/4-84-039, National Technical Information Service, PB84-187772, Springfield, Virginia 22161, May 1984.
12. “Method Performance for Hexachlorocyclopentadiene by Method 612,” Memorandum from R. Slater, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, December 7, 1983.
1.1 This method covers the determination of 2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (2,3,7,8-TCDD). The following parameter may be determined by this method:
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) method applicable to the determination of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1. Method 625 may be used to screen samples for 2,3,7,8-TCDD. When the screening test is positive, the final qualitative confirmation and quantification must be made using Method 613.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.4 Because of the extreme toxicity of this compound, the analyst must prevent exposure to himself, of to others, by materials knows or believed to contain 2,3,7,8-TCDD. Section 4 of this method contains guidelines and protocols that serve as minimum safe-handling standards in a limited-access laboratory.
1.5 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer and in the interpretation of mass spectra. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is spiked with an internal standard of labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD and extracted with methylene chloride using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is exchanged to hexane during concentration to a volume of 1.0 mL or less. The extract is then analyzed by capillary column GC/MS to separate and measure 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
2.2 The method provides selected column chromatographic cleanup proceudres to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated backgrounds at the masses (m/z) monitored. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to mininmize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are coextracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. 2,3,7,8-TCDD is often associated with other interfering chlorinated compounds which are at concentrations several magnitudes higher than that of 2,3,7,8-TCDD. The cleanup producers in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require additional cleanup approaches
3.3 The primary column, SP-2330 or equivalent, resolves 2,3,7,8-TCDD from the other 21 TCDD insomers. Positive results using any other gas chromatographic column must be confirmed using the primary column.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to
4.2 Each laboratory must develop a strict safety program for handling 2,3,7,8-TCDD. The following laboratory practices are recommended:
4.2.1 Contamination of the laboratory will be minimized by conducting all manipulations in a hood.
4.2.2 The effluents of sample splitters for the gas chromatograph and roughing pumps on the GC/MS should pass through either a column of activated charcoal or be bubbled through a trap containing oil or high-boiling alcohols.
4.2.3 Liquid waste should be dissolved in methanol or ethanol and irradiated with ultraviolet light with a wavelength greater than 290 nm for several days. (Use F 40 BL lamps or equivalent). Analyze liquid wastes and dispose of the solutions when 2,3,7,8-TCDD can no longer be detected.
4.3 Dow Chemical U.S.A. has issued the following precautimns (revised November 1978) for safe handling of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the laboratory:
4.3.1 The following statements on safe handling are as complete as possible on the basis of available toxicological information. The precautions for safe handling and use are necessarily general in nature since detailed, specific recommendations can be made only for the particular exposure and circumstances of each individual use. Inquiries about specific operations or uses may be addressed to the Dow Chemical Company. Assistance in evaluating the health hazards of particular plant conditions may be obtained from certain consulting laboratories and from State Departments of Health or of Labor, many of which have an industrial health service. 2,3,7,8-TCDD is extremely toxic to laboratory animals. However, it has been handled for years without injury in analytical and biological laboratories. Techniques used in handling radioactive and infectious materials are applicable to 2,3,7,8,-TCDD.
4.3.1.1 Protective equipment—Throw-away plastic gloves, apron or lab coat, safety glasses, and a lab hood adequate for radioactive work.
4.3.1.2 Training—Workers must be trained in the proper method of removing contaminated gloves and clothing without contacting the exterior surfaces.
4.3.1.3 Personal hygiene—Thorough washing of hands and forearms after each manipulation and before breaks (coffee, lunch, and shift).
4.3.1.4 Confinement—Isolated work area, posted with signs, segregated glassware and tools, plastic-backed absorbent paper on benchtops.
4.3.1.5 Waste—Good technique includes minimizing contaminated waste. Plastic bag liners should be used in waste cans. Janitors must be trained in the safe handling of waste.
4.3.1.6 Disposal of wastes—2,3,7,8-TCDD decomposes above 800 °C. Low-level waste such as absorbent paper, tissues, animal remains, and plastic gloves may be burned in a good incinerator. Gross quantities (milligrams) should be packaged securely and disposed through commercial or governmental channels which are capable of handling high-level radioactive wastes or extremely toxic wastes. Liquids should be allowed to evaporate in a good hood and in a disposable container. Residues may then be handled as above.
4.3.1.7 Decontamination—For personal decontamination, use any mild soap with plenty of scrubbing action. For decontamination of glassware, tools, and surfaces, Chlorothene NU Solvent (Trademark of the Dow Chemical Company) is the least toxic solvent shown to be effective. Satisfactory cleaning may be accomplished by rinsing with Chlorothene, then washing with any detergent and water. Dishwater may be disposed to the sewer. It is prudent to minimize solvent wastes because they may require special disposal through commercial sources which are expensive.
4.3.1.8 Laundry—Clothing known to be contaminated should be disposed with the precautions described under Section 4.3.1.6. Lab coats or other clothing worn in 2,3,7,8-TCDD work areas may be laundered.
Clothing should be collected in plastic bags. Persons who convey the bags and launder the clothing should be advised of the hazard and trained in proper handling. The clothing may be put into a washer without contact if the launderer knows the problem. The washer should be run through a cycle before being used again for other clothing.
4.3.1.9 Wipe tests—A useful method of determining cleanliness of work surfaces and tools is to wipe the surface with a piece of filter paper. Extraction and analysis by gas chromatography can achieve a limit of sensitivity of 0.1 µg per wipe. Less than 1 µg of 2,3,7,8-TCDD per sample indicates acceptable cleanliness; anything higher warrants further cleaning. More than 10 µg on a wipe sample constitutes an acute hazard and requires prompt cleaning before further use of the equipment or work space. A high (>10 µg)
4.3.1.10 Inhalation—Any procedure that may produce airborne contamination must be done with good ventilation. Gross losses to a ventilation system must not be allowed. Handling of the dilute solutions normally used in analytical and animal work presents no inhalation hazards except in the case of an accident.
4.3.1.11 Accidents—Remove contaminated clothing immediately, taking precautions not to contaminate skin or other articles. Wash exposed skin vigorously and repeatedly until medical attention is obtained.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.1.3 Clearly label all samples as “POISON” and ship according to U.S. Department of Transportation regulations.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnels—2-L and 125-mL, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.3 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.4 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.5 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or equivalent).
5.2.6 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.7 Chromatographic column—300 mm long × 10 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom.
5.2.8 Chromatographic column—400 mm long × 11 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse frit filter disc at bottom.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min or Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 GC/MS system:
5.5.1 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas chromatograph and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, and gases. The injection port must be designed for capillary columns. Either split, splitless, or on-column injection techniques may be employed, as long as the requirements of Section 7.1.1 are achieved.
5.5.2 Column—60 m long × 0.25 mm ID glass or fused silica, coated with SP-2330 (or equivalent) with a film thickness of 0.2 µm. Any equivalent column must resolve 2, 3, 7, 8-TCDD from the other 21 TCDD isomers.
5.5.3 Mass spectrometer—Either a low resolution mass spectrometer (LRMS) or a high resolution mass spectrometer (HRMS) may be used. The mass spectrometer must be equipped with a 70 V (nominal) ion source and be capable of aquiring m/z abundance data in real time selected ion monitoring (SIM) for groups of four or more masses.
5.5.4 GC/MS interface—Any GC to MS interface can be used that achieves the requirements of Section 7.1.1. GC to MS interfaces constructed of all glass or glass-lined materials are recommended. Glass surfaces can be deactivated by silanizing with dichlorodimethylsilane. To achieve maximum sensitivity, the exit end of the capillary column should be placed in the ion source. A short piece of fused silica capillary can be used as the interface to overcome problems associated with straightening the exit end of glass capillary columns.
5.5.5 The SIM data acquired during the chromatographic program is defined as the Selected Ion Current Profile (SICP). The SICP can be acquired under computer control or as a real time analog output. If computer control is used, there must be software available to plot the SICP and report peak height or area data for any m/z in the SICP between specified time or scan number limits.
5.6 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of 2, 3, 7, 8-TCDD.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL. Wash the solution with methylene chloride and hexane before use.
6.3 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.4 Sulfuric acid—Concentrated (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84).
6.5 Acetone, methylene chloride, hexane, benzene, ortho-xylene, tetradecane—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.6 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.7 Alumina—Neutral, 80/200 mesh (Fisher Scientific Co., No. A-540 or equivalent). Before use, activate for 24 h at 130 °C in a foil-covered glass container.
6.8 Silica gel—High purity grade, 100/120 mesh (Fisher Scientific Co., No. S-679 or equivalent).
6.9 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—Stock standard solutimns can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions. Acetone should be used as the solvent for spiking solutions; ortho-xylene is recommended for calibration standards for split injectors; and tetradecane is recommended for splitless or on-colum injectors. Analyze stock internal standards to verify the absence of native 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
6.9.1 Prepare stock standard solutions of 2,3,7,8-TCDD (mol wt 320) and either
6.9.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store in an isolated refrigerator protected from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards or spiking solutions from them.
6.9.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.10 Internal standard spiking solution (25 ng/mL)—Using stock standard solution, prepare a spiking solution in acetone of either
6.11 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatograhic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1 and SIM conditions for the mass spectrometer as described in Section 12.2 The GC/MS system must be calibrated using the internal standard technique.
7.1.1 Using stock standards, prepare calibration standards that will allow measurement of relative response factors of at least three concentration ratios of 2,3,7,8-TCDD to internal standard. Each calibration standard must be prepared to contain the internal standard at a concentration of 25 ng/mL. If any interferences are contributed by the internal standard at m/z 320 and 322, its concentration may be reduced in the calibration standards and in the internal standard spiking solution (Section 6.10). One of the calibration standards should contain 2,3,7,8-TCDD at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other 2,3,7,8-TCDD concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the GC/MS system.
7.1.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standardaccording to Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area response against the concentration of 2,3,7,8-TCDD and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for 2,3,7,8-TCDD using Equation 1.
7.1.3 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more 2,3,7,8-TCDD calibration standards. If the response for 2,3,7,8-TCDD varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, the test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard. Alternatively, a new calibration curve must be prepared.
7.2 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from the reagents.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.5, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples with native 2,3,7,8-TCDD to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing 2,3,7,8-TCDD at a concentration of 0.100 µg/mL in acetone. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 0.100 µg/L (100 ng/L) by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 Compare s and (X
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 0.100 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of 2,3,7,8-TCDD. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentration in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of 2,3,7,8-TCDD. Calculate percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for 2,3,7,8-TCDD with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If the recovery of 2,3,7,8-TCDD falls outside the designated range for recovery, a check standard must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If the recovery of 2,3,7,8-TCDD fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the complexity of the sample matrix and the performance of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of 2,3,7,8-TCDD. Calculate the percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light from the time of collection until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 Label all samples and containers “POISON” and ship according to applicable U.S. Department of Transportation regulations.
9.4 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 1.00 mL of internal standard spiking solution to the sample in the separatory funnel. If the final extract will be concentrated to a fixed volume below 1.00 mL (Section 12.3), only that volume of spiking solution should be added to the sample so that the final extract will contain 25 ng/mL of internal standard at the time of analysis.
10.3 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the vmlume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.4 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner.
10.5 Assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.6 Pour the combined extract into the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask with 20 to 30 mL of methylele chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.7 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min.
10.8 Momentarily remove the Snyder column, add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column. Raise the temperature of the water bath to 85 to 90 °C. Concentrate the extract as in Section 10.7, except use hexane to prewet the column. Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation. Set aside the K-D glassware for reuse in Section 10.14.
10.9 Pour the hexane extract from the concentrator tube into a 125-mL separatory funnel. Rinse the concentrator tube four times with 10-mL aliquots of hexane. Combine all rinses in the 125-mL separatory funnel.
10.10 Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide solution to the funnel and shake for 30 to 60 s. Discard the aqueous phase.
10.11 Perform a second wash of the organic layer with 50 mL of reagent water. Discard the aqueous phase.
10.12 Wash the hexane layer with a least two 50-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfuric acid. Continue washing the hexane layer with 50-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfuric acid until the acid layer remains colorless. Discard all acid fractions.
10.13 Wash the hexane layer with two 50-mL aliquots of reagent water. Discard the aqueous phases.
10.14 Transfer the hexane extract into a 125-mL Erlenmeyer flask containing 1 to 2 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate. Swirl the flask for 30 s and decant the hexane extract into the reassembled K-D apparatus. Complete the quantitative transfer with two 10-mL hexane rinses of the Erlenmeyer flask.
10.15 Replace the one or two clean boiling chips and concentrate the extract to 6 to 10 mL as in Section 10.8.
10.16 Add a clean boiling chip to the concentrator tube and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding about 1 mL of hexane to the top. Place the micro-K-D apparatus on the water bath so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of hexane.
Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL with hexane. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated and protected from light if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extract will be stored
10.17 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use either procedure below or any other appropriate procedure.
11.2 Alumina column cleanup for 2,3,7,8-TCDD:
11.2.1 Fill a 300 mm long × 10 mm ID chromatographic column with activated alumina to the 150 mm level. Tap the column gently to settle the alumina and add 10 mm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.2.2 Preelute the column with 50 mL of hexane. Adjust the elution rate to 1 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 1.0-mL sample extract onto the column using two 2-mL portions of hexane to complete the transfer.
11.2.3 Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 50 mL of 3% methylene chloride/95% hexane (V/V) and continue the elution of the column. Discard the eluate.
11.2.4 Next, elute the column with 50 mL of 20% methylene chloride/80% hexane (V/V) into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the collected fraction to 1.0 mL as in Section 10.16 and analyze by GC/MS (Section 12).
11.3 Silica gel column cleanup for 2,3,7,8-TCDD:
11.3.1 Fill a 400 mm long × 11 mm ID chromatmgraphic column with silica gel to the 300 mm level. Tap the column gently to settle the silica gel and add 10 mm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.3.2 Preelute the column with 50 mL of 20% benzene/80% hexane (V/V). Adjust the elution rate to 1 mL/min. Discard the eluate and just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer the 1.0-mL sample extract onto the column using two 2-mL portions of 20% benzene/80% hexane to complete the transfer.
11.3.3 Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, add 40 mL of 20% benzene/80% hexane to the column. Collect the eluate in a clean 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the collected fraction to 1.0 mL as in Section 10.16 and analyze by GC/MS.
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. Other capillary columns or chromatographic conditions may be used if the requirements of Sections 5.5.2 and 8.2 are met.
12.2 Analyze standards and samples with the mass spectrometer operating in the selected ion monitoring (SIM) mode using a dwell time to give at least seven points per peak. For LRMS, use masses at m/z 320, 322, and 257 for 2,3,7,8-TCDD and either m/z 328 for
12.3 If lower detection limits are required, the extract may be carefully evaporated to dryness under a gentle stream of nitrogen with the concentrator tube in a water bath at about 40 °C. Conduct this operation immediately before GC/MS analysis. Redissolve the extract in the desired final volume of ortho-xylene or tetradecane.
12.4 Calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
12.5 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract into the gas chromatograph. The volume of calibration standard injected must be measured, or be the same as all sample injection volumes.
12.6 The presence of 2,3,7,8-TCDD is qualitatively confirmed if all of the following criteria are achieved:
12.6.1 The gas chromatographic column must resolve 2,3,7,8-TCDD from the other 21 TCDD isomers.
12.6.2 The masses for native 2,3,7,8-TCDD (LRMS-m/z 320, 322, and 257 and HRMS-m/z 320 and 322) and labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD (m/z 328 or 332) must exhibit a simultaneous maximum at a retention time that matches that of native 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the calibration standard, with the performance specifications of the analytical system.
12.6.3 The chlorine isotope ratio at m/z 320 and m/z 322 must agree to within±10% of that in the calibration standard.
12.6.4 The signal of all peaks must be greater than 2.5 times the noise level.
12.7 For quantitation, measure the response of the m/z 320 peak for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
12.8 Co-eluting impurities are suspected if all criteria are achieved except those in Section 12.6.3. In this case, another SIM analysis using masses at m/z 257, 259, 320 and either m/a 328 or m/z 322 can be performed. The masses at m/z 257 and m/z 259 are indicative of the loss of one chlorine and one carbonyl group from 2,3,7,8-TCDD. If masses m/z 257 and m/z 259 give a chlorine isotope ratio that agrees to within ±10% of the same cluster in the calibration standards, then the presence of TCDD can be confirmed. Co-eluting DDD, DDE, and PCB residues can be confirmed, but will require another injection using the appropriate SIM masses or full repetitive mass scans. If the response for
12.9 If broad background interference restricts the sensitivity of the GC/MS analysis, the analyst should employ additional cleanup procedures and reanalyze by GC/MS.
12.10 In those circumstances where these procedures do not yield a definitive conclusion, the use of high resolution mass spectrometry is suggested.
13.1 Calculate the concentration of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.1.2 and Equation 2.
13.2 For each sample, calculate the percent recovery of the internal standard by comparing the area of the m/z peak measured in the sample to the area of the same peak in the calibration standard. If the recovery is below 50%, the analyst should review all aspects of his analytical technique.
13.3 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method was tested by 11 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and three industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 0.02 to 0.20 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Determination of TCDD in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,” EPA 600/4-82-028, National Technical Information Service, PB82-196882, Springfield, Virginia 22161, April 1982.
3. Buser, H.R., and Rappe, C. “High Resolution Gas Chromatography of the 22 Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers,”
4. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
5. Harless, R. L., Oswald, E. O., and Wilkinson, M. K. “Sample Preparation and Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry Determination of 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin,”
6. Lamparski, L. L., and Nestrick, T. J. “Determination of Tetra-, Hepta-, and Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers in Particulate Samples at Parts per Trillion Levels,”
7. Longhorst, M. L., and Shadoff, L. A. “Determination of Parts-per-Trillion Concentrations of Tetra-, Hexa-, and Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxins in Human Milk,”
8. “Carcinogens—Working with Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
9. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occuptional Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
10. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
11. Provost, L. P., and Elder, R. S., “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
12. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76, “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
13. “Methods, 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
14. Wong, A.S. et al. “The Determination of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters, Method 613, Part 1—Development and Detection Limits,” G. Choudhay, L. Keith, and C. Ruppe, ed., Butterworth Inc., (1983).
15. “EPA Method Study 26, Method 613: 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin,” EPA 600/4-84-037, National Technical Information Service, PB84-188879, Springfield, Virginia 22161, May 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of a number of purgeable organics. The following parameters may be determined by this method:
1.2 The method may be extended to screen samples for acrolein (STORET No. 34210, CAS No. 107-02-8) and acrylonitrile (STORET No. 34215, CAS No. 107-13-1), however, the preferred method for these two compounds in Method 603.
1.3 This is a purge and trap gas chromatographic/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) method applicable to the determination of the compounds listed above in municipal and industrial discharges as provided under 40 CFR 136.1.
1.4 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 14.1)
1.5 Any modification to this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5. Depending upon the nature of the modification and the extent of intended use, the applicant may be required to demonstrate that the modifications will produce equivalent results when applied to relevant wastewaters.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the operation of a purge and trap system and a gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer and in the interpretation of mass spectra. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 An inert gas is bubbled through a 5-mL water sample contained in a specially-designed purging chamber at ambient temperature. The purgeables are efficiently transferred from the aqueous phase to the vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent trap where the purgeables are trapped. After purging is completed, the trap is heated and backflushed with the inert gas to desorb the purgeables onto a gas chromatographic column. The gas chromatograph is temperature programmed to separate the purgeables which are then detected with a mass spectrometer.
3.1 Impurities in the purge gas, organic compounds outgassing from the plumbing ahead of the trap, and solvent vapors in the laboratory account for the majority of contamination problems. The analytical system must be demonstated to be free from contamination under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3. The use of non-Teflon plastic tubing, non-Teflon thread sealants, or flow controllers with rubber components in the purge and trap system should be avoided.
3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics (particularly fluorocarbons and methylene chloride) through the septum seal into the sample during shipment and storage. A field reagent blank prepared from reagent water and carried through the sampling and handling protocol can serve as a check on such contamination.
3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur whenever high level and low level samples are sequentially analyzed. To reduce carry-over, the purging device and sample syringe must be rinsed with reagent water between sample analyses. Whenever an unusually concentrated sample is encountered, it should be followed by an analysis of reagent water to check for cross contamination. For samples containing large amounts of water-soluble materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds or high pureeable levels, it may be necessary to wash the purging device with a detergent solution, rinse it with distilled water, and then dry it in a 105 °C oven between analyses. The trap and other parts of the system are also subject to contamination; therefore, frequent bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this methmd. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2. The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, 1,4-dichlorobenzene, and vinyl chloride. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete sampling.
5.1.1 Vial—25-mL capacity or larger, equipped with a screw cap with a hole in the center (Pierce #13075 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 °C before use.
5.1.2 Septum—Teflon-faced silicane (Pierce #12722 or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at 105 °C for 1 h before use.
5.2 Purge and trap system—The purge and trap system consists of three separate pieces of equipment: A purging device, trap, and desorber. Several complete systems are now commercially available.
5.2.1 The purging device must be designed to accept 5-mL samples with a water column at least 3 cm deep. The gaseous head space between the water column and the trap must have a total volume of less than 15 mL. The purge gas must pass though the water column as finely divided bubbles with a diameter of less than 3 mm at the origin. The purge gas must be introduced no more than 5 mm from the base of the water column. The purging device illustrated in Figure 1 meets these design criteria.
5.2.2 The trap must be at least 25 cm long and have an inside diameter of at least 0.105 in. The trap must be packed to contain the following minimum lengths of adsorbents: 1.0 cm of methyl silicone coated packing (Section 6.3.2), 15 cm of 2,6-dyphenylene oxide polymer (Section 6.3.1), and 8 cm of silica gel (Section 6.3.3). The minimum specifications for the trap are illustrated in Figure 2.
5.2.3 The desorber should be capable of rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C. The polymer section of the trap should not be heated higher than 180 °C and the remaining sections should not exceed 200 °C. The desorber illustrated in Figure 2 meets these design criteria.
5.2.4 The purge and trap system may be assembled as a separate unit or be coupled to a gas chromatograph as illustrated in Figures 3 and 4.
5.3 GC/MS system:
5.3.1 Gas chromatograph—An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas chromatograph suitable for on-column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, and gases.
5.3.2 Column—6 ft long × 0.1 in ID stainless steel or glass, packed with 1% SP-1000 on Carbopack B (60/80 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 11.1.
5.3.3 Mass spectrometer—Capable of scanning from 20 to 260 amu every 7 s or less, utilizing 70 V (nominal) electron energy in the electron impact ionization mode, and producing a mass spectrum which meets all the criteria in Table 2 when 50 ng of 4-bromofluorobenzene (BFB) is injected through the GC inlet.
5.3.4 GC/MS interface—Any GC to MS interface that gives acceptable calibration points at 50 ng or less per injection for each of the parameters of interest and achieves all acceptable performance criteria (Section 10) may be used. GC to MS interfaces constructed of all glass or glass-lined materials are recommended. Glass can be deactivated by silanizing with dichlorodimethylsilane.
5.3.5 Data system—A computer system must be interfaced to the mass spectrometer that allows the continuous acquisition and storage on machine-readable media of all mass spectra obtained throughout the duration of the chromatographic program. The computer must have software that allows searching any GC/MS data file for specific m/z (masses) and plotting such m/z abundances versus time or scan number. This type of plot is defined as an Extracted Ion Current Profile (EICP). Software must also be available that allows integrating the abundance in any EICP between specified time or scan number limits.
5.4 Syringes—5-mL, glass hypodermic with Luerlok tip (two each), if applicable to the purging device.
5.5 Micro syringes—25-µL, 0.006 in. ID needle.
5.6 Syringe valve—2-way, with Luer ends (three each).
5.7 Syringe—5-mL, gas-tight with shut-off valve.
5.8 Bottle—15-mL, screw-cap, with Teflon cap liner.
5.9 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.1.1 Reagent water can be generated by passing tap water through a carbon filter bed containing about 1 lb of activated carbon (Filtrasorb-300, Calgon Corp., or equivalent).
6.1.2 A water purification system (Millipore Super-Q or equivalent) may be used to generate reagent water.
6.1.3 Reagent water may also be prepared by boiling water for 15 min. Subsequently, while maintaining the temperature at 90 °C, bubble a contaminant-free inert gas through the water for 1 h. While still hot, transfer the water to a narrow mouth screw-cap bottle and seal with a Teflon-lined septum and cap.
6.2 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.3 Trap materials:
6.3.1 2,6-Diphenylene oxide polymer—Tenax, (60/80 mesh), chromatographic grade or equivalent.
6.3.2 Methyl silicone packing—3% OV-1 on Chromosorb-W (60/80 mesh) or equivalent.
6.3.3 Silica gel—35/60 mesh, Davison, grade-15 or equivalent.
6.4 Methanol—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.5 Stock standard solutions—Stock standard solutions may be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions. Prepare stock standard solutions in methanol using assayed liquids or gases as appropriate. Because of the toxicity of some of the compounds, primary dilutions of these materials should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be used when the analyst handles high concentrations of such materials.
6.5.1 Place about 9.8 mL of methanol into a 10-mL ground glass stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand, unstoppered, for about 10 min or until all alcohol wetted surfaces have dried. Weigh the flask to the nearest 0.1 mg.
6.5.2 Add the assayed reference material:
6.5.2.1 Liquids—Using a 100-µL syringe, immediately add two or more drops of assayed reference material to the flask, then reweigh. Be sure that the drops fall directly into the alcohol without contacting the neck of the flask.
6.5.2.2 Gases—To prepare standards for any of the four halocarbons that boil below 30 °C (bromomethane, chloroethane, chloromethane, and vinyl chloride), fill a 5-mL valved gas-tight syringe with the reference standard to the 5.0-mL mark. Lower the needle to 5 mm above the methanol meniscus. Slowly introduce the reference standard above the surface of the liquid (the heavy gas will rapidly dissolve in the methanol).
6.5.3 Reweigh, dilute to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting the flask several times. Calculate the concentration in µg/µL from the net gain in weight. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight may be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.5.4 Transfer the stock standard solution into a Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottle. Store, with minimal headspace, at −10 to −20 °C and protect from light.
6.5.5 Prepare fresh standards weekly for the four gases and 2-chloroethylvinyl ether. All other standards must be replaced after one month, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicates a problem.
6.6 Secondary dilution standards—Using stock solutions, prepare secondary dilution standards in methanol that contain the compounds of interest, either singly or mixed together. The secondary dilution standards should be prepared at concentrations such that the aqueous calibration standards prepared in Section 7.3 will bracket the working range of the analytical system. Secondary dilution standards should be stored with minimal headspace and should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.7 Surrogate standard spiking solution—Select a minimum of three surrogate compounds from Table 3. Prepare stock standard solutions for each surrogate standard in methanol as described in Section 6.5. Prepare a surrogate standard spiking solution from these stock standards at a concentration of 15 µg/mL in water. Store the solutions at 4 °C in Teflon-sealed glass containers with a minimum of headspace. The solutions should be checked frequently for stability. The addition of 10 µL of this solution of 5 mL of sample or standard is equivalent to a concentration of 30 µg/L of each surrogate standard.
6.8 BFB Standard—Prepare a 25 µg/mL solution of BFB in methanol.
6.9 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Assemble a purge and trap system that meets the specifications in Section 5.2. Condition the trap overnight at 180 °C by backflushing with an inert gas flow of at least 20 mL/min. Condition the trap for 10 min once daily prior to use.
7.2 Connect the purge and trap system to a gas chromatograph. The gas chromatograph must be operated using temperature and flow rate conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select three or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Some recommended internal standards are listed in Table 3.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter by carefully adding 20.0 µL of one or more secondary dilution standards to 50, 250, or 500 mL of reagent water. A 25-µL syringe with a 0.006 in. ID needle should be used for this operation. One of the calibration standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the GC/MS system. These aqueous standards can be stored up to 24 h, if held in sealed vials with zero headspace as described in Section 9.2. If not so stored, they must be discarded after 1 h.
7.3.2 Prepare a spiking solution containing each of the internal standards using the procedures described in Sections 6.5 and
7.3.3 Analyze each calibration standard according to Section 11, adding 10 µL of internal standard spiking solution directly to the syringe (Section 11.4). Tabulate the area response of the characteristic m/z against concentration for each compound and internal standard, and calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.4 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each working day by the measurement of a QC check sample.
7.4.1 Prepare the QC check sample as described in Section 8.2.2.
7.4.2 Analyze the QC check sample according to the method beginning in Section 10.
7.4.3 For each parameter, compare the response (Q) with the corresponding calibration acceptance criteria found in Table 5. If the responses for all parameters of interest fall within the designated ranges, analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual Q falls outside the range, proceed according to Section 7.4.4.
The large number of parameters in Table 5 present a substantial probability that one or more will not meet the calibration acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
7.4.4 Repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet the calibration acceptance criteria. If the response for a parameter does not fall within the range in this second test, a new calibration curve or RF must be prepared for that parameter according to Section 7.3.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Section 11.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Each day, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system are under control.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 5% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 5% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must spike all samples with surrogate standards to monitor continuing laboratory performance. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.1.7 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.6.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 10 µg/mL in methanol. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample
8.2.2 Prepare a QC check sample to contain 20 µg/L of each parameter by adding 200 µL of QC check sample concentrate to 100 mL of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze four 5-mL aliquots of the well-mixed QC check sample according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X
The large number of parameters in Table 5 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.3, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.3.
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 5% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess accuracy. For laboratories analyzing 1 to 20 samples per month, at least one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 20 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.2 Analyze one 5-mL sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second 5-mL sample aliquot with 10 µL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 5. These acceptance criteria wer calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required anlaysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 5 must be measured in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check standard should be routinely analyzed with the spiked sample.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 10 µL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 5 mL of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As a quality control check, the laboratory must spike all samples with the surrogate standard spiking solutions as described in Section 11.4, and calculate the percent recovery of each surrogate compound.
8.6 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.7 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the environmental measurements. Whenever possible, the laboratory should analyze standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
9.1 All samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of collection until analysis. If the sample contains residual chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL is sufficient for up to 5 ppm Cl
9.2 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers having a total volume of at least 25 mL. Fill the sample bottle just to overflowing in such a manner that no air bubbles pass through the sample as the bottle is being filled. Seal the bottle so that no air bubbles are entrapped in it. If preservative has been added, shake vigorously for 1 min. Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle until time of analysis.
9.3 Experimental evidence indicates that some aromatic compounds, notably benzene, toluene, and ethyl benzene are susceptible to rapid biological degradation under certain environmental conditions.
9.4 All samples must be analyzed within 14 days of collection.
10.1 At the beginning of each day that analyses are to be performed, the GC/MS system must be checked to see if acceptable performance criteria are achieved for BFB.
10.2 These performance tests require the following instrumental parameters:
10.3 At the beginning of each day, inject 2 µL of BFB solution directly on the column. Alternatively, add 2 µL of BFB solution to 5.0 mL of reagent water or standard solution and analyze the solution according to section 11. Obtain a background-corrected mass spectrum of BFB and confirm that all the key m/z criteria in Table 2 are achieved. If all the criteria are not achieved, the analyst must retune the mass spectrometer and repeat the test until all criteria are achieved.
11.1 Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and MDL that can be achieved under these conditions. An example of the separations achieved by this column is shown in Figure 5. Other packed columns or chromatographic conditions may be used if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
11.2 After achieving the key m/z abundance criteria in Section 10, calibrate the system daiy as described in Section 7.
11.3 Adjust the purge gas (helium) flow rate to 40 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device, and set the purge and trap system to purge (Figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the purging device sample introduction needle.
11.4 Allow the sample to come to ambient temperature prior to introducing it into the syringe. Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open the sample bottle (or standard) and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel to just short of overflowing. Replace the syringe plunger and compress the sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL. Since this process of taking an aliquot destroys the validity of the sample for future analysis, the analyst should fill a second syringe at this time to protect against possible loss of data. Add 10.0 µL of the surrogate spiking solution (Section 6.7) and 10.0 µL of the internal standard spiking solution (Section 7.3.2) through the valve bore, then close the valve. The surrogate and internal standards may be mixed and added as a single spiking solution.
11.5 Attach the syringe-syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve on the purging device. Open the syringe valves and inject the sample into the purging chamber.
11.6 Close both valves and purge the sample for 11.0 ±0.1 min at ambient temperature.
11.7 After the 11-min purge time, attach the trap to the chromatograph, adjust the purge and trap system to the desorb mode (Figure 4), and begin to temperature program the gas chromatograph. Introduce the trapped materials to the GC column by rapidly heating the trap to 180 °C while backflushing the trap with an inert gas between 20 and 60 mL/min for 4 min. If rapid heating of the trap cannot be achieved, the GC cloumn must be used as a secondary trap by cooling it to 30 °C (subambient temperature, if problems persist) instead of the initial program temperature of 45 °C.
11.8 While the trap is being desorbed into the gas chromatograph, empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. Wash the chamber with two 5-mL flushes of reagent water.
11.9 After desorbing the sample for 4 min, recondition the trap by returning the purge and trap system to the purge mode. Wait 15 s then close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through the trap. The trap temperature should be maintained at 180 °C. After approximately 7 min, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the trap. When the trap is cool, the next sample can be analyzed.
11.10 If the response for any m/z exceeds the working range of the system, prepare a dilution of the sample with reagent water from the aliquot in the second syringe and reanalyze.
12.1 Obtain EICPs for the primary m/z (Table 4) and at least two secondary masses for each parameter of interest. The following criteria must be met to make a qualitative identification:
12.1.1 The characteristic masses of each parameter of interest must maximize in the same or within one scan of each other.
12.1.2 The retention time must fall within ±30 s of the retention time of the authentic compound.
12.1.3 The relative peak heights of the three characteristic masses in the EICPs must fall within ±20% of the relative intensities of these masses in a reference mass spectrum. The reference mass spectrum can be obtained from a standard analyzed in the GC/MS system or from a reference library.
12.2 Structural isomers that have very similar mass spectra and less than 30 s difference in retention time, can be explicitly identified only if the resolution between authentic isomers in a standard mix is acceptable. Acceptable resolution is achieved if the baseline to valley height between the isomers is less than 25% of the sum of the two peak heights. Otherwise, structural isomers are identified as isomeric pairs.
13.1 When a parameter has been identified, the quantitation of that parameter should be based on the integrated abundance from the EICP of the primary characteristic m/z given in Table 4. If the sample produces an interference for the primary m/z, use a secondary characteristic m/z to quantitate.
Calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.3 and Equation 2.
13.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
14.2 This method was tested by 15 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 5-600 µg/L.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. “Determining Volatile Organics at Microgram-per-Litre Levels by Gas Chromatography,”
3. Bellar, T.A., and Lichtenberg, J.J. “Semi-Automated Headspace Analysis of Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for Purgeable Volatile Organic Compounds, ” Measurement of Organic Pollutants in Water and Wastewater, C.E. Van Hall, editor, American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA. Special Technical Publication 686, 1978.
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
9. Budde, W.L., and Eichelberger, J.W. “Performance Tests for the Evaluation of Computerized Eas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories,” EPA-600/4-80-025, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, April 1980.
10. Eichelberger, J.W., Harris, L.E., and Budde, W.L. “Reference Compound to Calibrate Ion Abundance Measurement in Gas Chromatography—Mass Spectrometry Systems,”
11. “Method Detection Limit for Methods 624 and 625,” Olynyk, P., Budde, W.L., and Eichelberger, J.W. Unpublished report, May 14, 1980.
12. “EPA Method Study 29 EPA Method 624—Purgeables,” EPA 600/4-84-054, National Technical Information Service, PB84-209915, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
13.“Method Performance Data for Method 624,” Memorandum from R. Slater and T. Pressley, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, January 17, 1984.
1.1 This method covers the determination of a number of organic compounds that are partitioned into an organic solvent and are amenable to gas chromatography. The parameters listed in Tables 1 and 2 may be qualitatively and quantitatively determined using this method.
1.2 The method may be extended to include the parameters listed in Table 3. Benzidine can be subject to oxidative losses during solvent concentration. Under the alkaline conditions of the extraction step, α-BHC, γ-BHC, endosulfan I and II, and endrin are subject to decomposition. Hexachlorocyclopentadiene is subject to thermal decomposition in the inlet of the gas chromatograph, chemical reaction in acetone solution, and photochemical decomposition. N-nitrosodimethylamine is difficult to separate from the solvent under the chromatographic conditions described. N-nitrosodiphenylamine decomposes in the gas chromatographic inlet and cannot be separated from diphenylamine. The preferred method for each of these parameters is listed in Table 3.
1.3 This is a gas chromatographic/mass spectrometry (GC/MS) method
1.4 The method detection limit (MDL, defined in Section 16.1)
1.5 Any modification to this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5. Depending upon the nature of the modification and the extent of intended use, the applicant may be required to demonstrate that the modifications will produce equivalent results when applied to relevant wastewaters.
1.6 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the use of a gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer and in the interpretation of mass spectra. Each analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described in Section 8.2.
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 1-L, is serially extracted with methylene chloride at a pH greater than 11 and again at a pH less than 2 using a separatory funnel or a continuous extractor.
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in the total ion current profiles. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample. The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled.
3.3 The base-neutral extraction may cause significantly reduced recovery of phenol, 2-methylphenol, and 2,4-dimethylphenol. The analyst must recognize that results obtained under these conditions are minimum concentrations.
3.4 The packed gas chromatographic columns recommended for the basic fraction may not exhibit sufficient resolution for certain isomeric pairs including the following: anthracene and phenanthrene; chrysene and benzo(a)anthracene; and benzo(b)fluoranthene and benzo(k)fluoranthene. The gas chromatographic retention time and mass spectra for these pairs of compounds are not sufficiently different to make an unambiguous identification. Alternative techniques should be used to identify and quantify these specific compounds, such as Method 610.
3.5 In samples that contain an inordinate number of interferences, the use of chemical ionization (CI) mass spectrometry may make identification easier. Tables 6 and 7 give characteristic CI ions for most of the compounds covered by this method. The use of CI mass spectrometry to support electron ionization (EI) mass spectrometry is encouraged but not required.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method have not been precisely defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: benzo(a)anthracene, benzidine, 3,3′-dichlorobenzidine, benzo(a)pyrene, α-BHC, β-BHC, δ-BHC, γ-BHC, dibenzo(a,h)anthracene, N-nitrosodimethylamine, 4,4′-DDT, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composit sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-gt, amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available, protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and protected from light during compositing. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used. before use, however, the compressible tubing should be throughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnel—2-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column—Chromatographic column, 19 mm ID, with coarse frit
5.2.3 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish—10-mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be checked at the volumes employed in the test. Ground glass stopper is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.4 Evaporative flask, Kuderna-Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-57001-0500 or equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with springs.
5.2.5 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Three all macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or equivalent).
5.2.6 Snyder column, Kuderna-Danish—Two-ball macro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or equivalent).
5.2.7 Vials—10 to 15-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.8 Continuous liquid—liquid extractor—Equipped with Teflon or glass connecting joints and stopcocks requiring no lubrication. (Hershberg-Wolf Extractor, Ace Glass Company, Vineland, N.J., P/N 6841-10 or equivalent.)
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400 °C for 30 min of Soxhlet extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control (±2 °C). The bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance—Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
5.6 GC/MS system:
5.6.1 Gas Chromatograph—An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas chromatograph and all required accessores including syringes, analytical columns, and gases. The injection port must be designed for on-column injection when using packed columns and for splitless injection when using capillary columns.
5.6.2 Column for base/neutrals—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 3% SP-2250 on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 16. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are provided in Section 13.1.
5.6.3 Column for acids—1.8 m long × 2 mm ID glass, packed with 1% SP-1240DA on Supelcoport (100/120 mesh) or equivalent. This column was used to develop the method performance statements in Section 16. Guidelines for the use of alternate column packings are given in Section 13.1.
5.6.4 Mass spectrometer—Capable of scanning from 35 to 450 amu every 7 s or less, utilizing a 70 V (nominal) electron energy in the electron impact ionization mode, and producing a mass spectrum which meets all the criteria in Table 9 when 50 ng of decafluorotriphenyl phosphine (DFTPP; bis(perfluorophenyl) phenyl phosphine) is injected through the GC inlet.
5.6.5 GC/MS interface—Any GC to MS interface that gives acceptable calibration points at 50 ng per injection for each of the parameters of interest and achieves all acceptable performance criteria (Section 12) may be used. GC to MS interfaces constructed of all glass or glass-lined materials are recommended. Glass can be deactivated by silanizing with dichlorodimethylsilane.
5.6.6 Data system—A computer system must be interfaced to the mass spectrometer that allows the contiluous acquisition and storage on machine-readable media of all mass spectra obtained throughout the duration of the chromatographic program. The computer must have software that allows searching any GC/MS data file for specific m/z and plotting such m/z abundances versus time or scan number. This type of plot is defined as an Extracted Ion Current Profile (EICP). Software must also be available that
6.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and dilute to 100 mL.
6.3 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1)—Slowly, add 50 mL of H
6.5 Acetone, methanol, methlylene chloride—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.6 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow tray.
6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 µg/µL)—standard solutions can be prepared from pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
6.7.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material. Dissolve the material in pesticide quality acetone or other suitable solvent and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96% or greater, the weight may be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock standard. Commercially prepared stock standards may be used at any concentration if they are certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.7.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.7.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with quality control check samples indicate a problem.
6.8 Surrogate standard spiking solution—Select a minimum of three surrogate compounds from Table 8. Prepare a surrogate standard spiking solution containing each selected surrogate compound at a concentration of 100 µg/mL in acetone. Addition of 1.00 mL of this solution to 1000 mL of sample is equivalent to a concentration of 100 µg/L of each surrogate standard. Store the spiking solution at 4 °C in Teflon-sealed glass container. The solution should be checked frequently for stability. The solution must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with quality control check standards indicates a problem.
6.9 DFTPP standard—Prepare a 25 µg/mL solution of DFTPP in acetone.
6.10 Quality control check sample concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in Table 4 or 5.
7.2 Internal standard calibration procedure—To use this approach, the analyst must select three or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standards is not affected by method or matrix interferences. Some recommended internal standards are listed in Table 8. Use the base peak m/z as the primary m/z for quantification of the standards. If interferences are noted, use one of the next two most intense m/z quantities for quantification.
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each parameter of interest by adding appropriate volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To each calibration standard or standard mixture, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and dilute to volume with acetone. One of the calibration standards should be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the GC/MS system.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 µL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 13 and tabulate the area of the primary characteristic m/z (Tables 4 and 5) against concentration for each compound and internal standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
7.3 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each working day by the
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The laboratory must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occuring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted certain options (detailed in Sections 10.6 and 13.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 5% of all samples to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control check standards that the operation of the measurement system is in control. This procedure is described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check standard analyses is equivalent to 5% of all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The laboratory must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of interest at a concentration of 100 µg/mL in acetone. Multiple solutions may be required. PCBs and multicomponent pesticides may be omitted from this test. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared independently from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 100 µg/L by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section 10 or 11.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in µg/L, and the standard deviation of the recovery (s) in µg/L, for each parameter using the four results.
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding acceptance criteria for precision and accuracy, respectively, found in Table 6. If s and X for all parameters of interest meet the acceptance criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, the system performance is unacceptable for that parameter.
The large number of parameters in Table 6 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.3 The laboratory must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 5% of the samples from each sample site being monitored to assess
8.3.1. The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at 100 µg/L or 1 to 5 times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or 100 µg/L.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A−B)%/T, where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC acceptance criteria found in Table 6. These acceptance criteria were calculated to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations, assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the performance of the laboratory. If the entire list of single-component parameters in Table 6 must be measured in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC check standard will be required is high. In this case the QC check standard should be routinely analyzed with the spike sample.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P
8.5 As part of the QC program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P
8.6 As a quality control check, the laboratory must spike all samples with the surrogate standard spiking solution as described in Section 10.2, and calculate the percent recovery of each surrogate compound.
8.7 It is recommended that the laboratory adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory and the nature of
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices
9.2 All sampling must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction. Fill the sample bottles and, if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 7 days of collection and completely analyzed within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Samples are usually extracted using separatory funnel techniques. If emulsions will prevent achieving acceptable solvent recovery with separatory funnel extractions, continuous extraction (Section 11) may be used. The separatory funnel extraction scheme described below assumes a sample volume of 1 L. When sample volumes of 2 L are to be extracted, use 250, 100, and 100-mL volumes of methylene chloride for the serial extraction of the base/neutrals and 200, 100, and 100-mL volumes of methylene chloride for the acids.
10.2 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L separatory funnel. Pipet 1.00 mL of the surrogate standard spiking solution into the separatory funnel and mix well. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper and adjust to pH>11 with sodium hydroxide solution.
10.3 Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake for 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centrifugation, or other physical methods. Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask. If the emulsion cannot be broken (recovery of less than 80% of the methylene chloride, corrected for the water solubility of methylene chloride), transfer the sample, solvent, and emulsion into the extraction chamber of a continuous extractor and proceed as described in Section 11.3.
10.4 Add a second 60-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction in the same manner. Label the combined extract as the base/neutral fraction.
10.5 Adjust the pH of the aqueous phase to less than 2 using sulfuric acid. Serially extract the acidified aqueous phase three times with 60-mL aliquots of methylene chloride. Collect and combine the extracts in a 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask and label the combined extracts as the acid fraction.
10.6 For each fraction, assemble a Kuderna-Danish (K-D) concentrator by attaching a 10-mL concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative flask. Other concentration devices or techniques may be used in place of the K-D concentrator if the requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
10.7 For each fraction, pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask and column with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.8 Add one or two clean boiling chips and attach a three-ball Snyder column to the evaporative flask for each fraction. Prewet each Snyder column by adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus from the water bath and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1 to 2 mL of methylene chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation.
10.9 Add another one or two clean boiling chips to the concentrator tube for each fraction and attach a two-ball micro-Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about 0.5 mL of methylene chloride to the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot water bath (60 to 65 °C) so that the concentrator tube is partially immersed in hot water. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the proper rate of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the apparent volume of liquid reaches about 0.5 mL, remove the K-D apparatus from the water bath and allow it to drain and cool for at least 10 min. Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with approximately 0.2 mL of acetone or methylene chloride. Adjust the final volume to 1.0 mL with the solvent. Stopper the concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If the extracts will be stored longer than two days, they should be transferred to Teflon-sealed screw-cap vials and labeled base/neutral or acid fraction as appropriate.
10.10 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11.1 When experience with a sample from a given source indicates that a serious emulsion problem will result or an emulsion is encountered using a separatory funnel in Section 10.3, a continuous extractor should be used.
11.2 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample volume. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper and adjust to pH >11 with sodium hydroxide solution. Transfer the sample to the continuous extractor and using a pipet, add 1.00 mL of surrogate standard spiking solution and mix well. Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake for 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the extractor.
11.3 Repeat the sample bottle rinse with an additional 50 to 100-mL portion of methylene chloride and add the rinse to the extractor.
11.4 Add 200 to 500 mL of methylene chloride to the distilling flask, add sufficient reagent water to ensure proper operation, and extract for 24 h. Allow to cool, then detach the distilling flask. Dry, concentrate, and seal the extract as in Sections 10.6 through 10.9.
11.5 Charge a clean distilling flask with 500 mL of methylene chloride and attach it to the continuous extractor. Carefully, while stirring, adjust the pH of the aqueous phase to less than 2 using sulfuric acid. Extract for 24 h. Dry, concentrate, and seal the extract as in Sections 10.6 through 10.9.
12.1 At the beginning of each day that analyses are to be performed, the GC/MS system must be checked to see if acceptable performance criteria are achieved for DFTPP.
12.2 These performance tests require the following instrumental parameters:
12.3 DFTPP performance test—At the beginning of each day, inject 2 µL (50 ng) of DFTPP standard solution. Obtain a background-corrected mass spectra of DFTPP and confirm that all the key m/z criteria in Table 9 are achieved. If all the criteria are not achieved, the analyst must retune the mass spectrometer and repeat the test until all criteria are achieved. The performance criteria must be achieved before any samples, blanks, or standards are analyzed. The taililg factor tests in Sections 12.4 and 12.5 may be performed simultaneously with the DFTPP test.
12.4 Column performance test for base/neutrals—At the beginning of each day that the base/neutral fraction is to be analyzed for benzidine, the benzidine tailing factor must be calculated. Inject 100 ng of benzidine either separately or as a part of a standard mixture that may contain DFTPP and calculate the tailing factor. The benzidine tailing factor must be less than 3.0. Calculation of the tailing factor is illustrated in Figure 13.
12.5 Column performance test for acids—At the beginning of each day that the acids are to be determined, inject 50 ng of pentachlorophenol either separately or as a part of a standard mix that may contain DFTPP. The tailing factor for pentachlorophenol must be less than 5. Calculation of the tailing factor is illustrated in Figure 13.
13.1 Table 4 summarizes the recommended gas chromatographic operating conditions for the base/neutral fraction. Table 5 summarizes the recommended gas chromatographic
13.2 After conducting the GC/MS performance tests in Section 12, calibrate the system daily as described in Section 7.
13.3 The internal standard must be added to sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before it is injected into the instrument. This procedure minimizes losses due to adsorption, chemical reaction or evaporation.
13.4 Inject 2 to 5 µL of the sample extract or standard into the GC/MS system using the solvent-flush technique.
13.5 If the response for any m/z exceeds the working range of the GC/MS system, dilute the extract and reanalyze.
13.6 Perform all qualitative and quantitative measurements as described in Sections 14 and 15. When the extracts are not being used for analyses, store them refrigerated at 4 °C, protected from light in screw-cap vials equipped with unpierced Teflon-lined septa.
14.1 Obtain EICPs for the primary m/z and the two other masses listed in Tables 4 and 5. See Section 7.3 for masses to be used with internal and surrogate standards. The following criteria must be met to make a qualitative identification:
14.1.1 The characteristic masses of each parameter of interest must maximize in the same or within one scan of each other.
14.1.2 The retention time must fall within ±30 s of the retention time of the authentic compound.
14.1.3 The relative peak heights of the three characteristic masses in the EICPs must fall within ±20% of the relative intensities of these masses in a reference mass spectrum. The reference mass spectrum can be obtained from a standard analyzed in the GC/MS system or from a reference library.
14.2 Structural isomers that have very similar mass spectra and less than 30 s difference in retention time, can be explicitly identified only if the resolution between authentic isomers in a standard mix is acceptable. Acceptable resolution is achieved if the baseline to valley height between the isomers is less than 25% of the sum of the two peak heights. Otherwise, structural isomers are identified as isomeric pairs.
15.1 When a parameter has been identified, the quantitation of that parameter will be based on the integrated abundance from the EICP of the primary characteristic m/z in Tables 4 and 5. Use the base peak m/z for internal and surrogate standards. If the sample produces an interference for the primary m/z, use a secondary characteristic m/z to quantitate.
Calculate the concentration in the sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.2.2 and Equation 3.
15.2 Report results in µg/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should be reported with the sample results.
16.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.
16.2 This method was tested by 15 laboratories using reagent water, drinking water, surface water, and industrial wastewaters spiked at six concentrations over the range 5 to 1300 µg/L.
17.1 If the sample must be screened for the presence of 2,3,7,8-TCDD, it is recommended that the reference material not be handled in the laboratory unless extensive safety precautions are employed. It is sufficient to analyze the base/neutral extract by selected ion monitoring (SIM) GC/MS techniques, as follows:
17.1.1 Concentrate the base/neutral extract to a final volume of 0.2 ml.
17.1.2 Adjust the temperature of the base/neutral column (Section 5.6.2) to 220 °C.
17.1.3 Operate the mass spectrometer to acquire data in the SIM mode using the ions at m/z 257, 320 and 322 and a dwell time no greater than 333 milliseconds per mass.
17.1.4 Inject 5 to 7 µL of the base/neutral extract. Collect SIM data for a total of 10 min.
17.1.5 The possible presence of 2,3,7,8-TCDD is indicated if all three masses exhibit simultaneous peaks at any point in the selected ion current profiles.
17.1.6 For each occurrence where the possible presence of 2,3,7,8-TCDD is indicated, calculate and retain the relative abundances of each of the three masses.
17.2 False positives to this test may be caused by the presence of single or coeluting combinations of compounds whose mass spectra contain all of these masses.
17.3 Conclusive results of the presence and concentration level of 2,3,7,8-TCDD can be obtained only from a properly equipped laboratory through the use of EPA Method 613 or other approved alternate test procedures.
1. 40 CFR part 136, appendix B.
2. “Sampling and Analysis Procedures for Screening of Industrial Effluents for Priority Pollutants,” U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1977, Revised April 1977. Available from Effluent Guidelines Division, Washington, DC 20460.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. “Standard Practices for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
4. “Carcinogens—Working With Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” (29 CFR part 1910), Occupational Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,”American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,”
8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. “Standard Practices for Sampling Water,” American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
9. “Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine, Total Residual,” Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1979.
10. Eichelberger, J.W., Harris, L.E., and Budde, W.L. “Reference Compound to Calibrate Ion Abundance Measurement in Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectometry,”
11. McNair, N.M. and Bonelli, E.J. “Basic Chromatography,” Consolidated Printing, Berkeley, California, p. 52, 1969.
12. Burke, J.A. “Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,”
13. Olynyk, P., Budde, W.L., and Eichelberger, J.W. “Method Detection Limit for Methods 624 and 625,” Unpublished report, May 14, 1980.
14. “EPA Method Study 30, Method 625, Base/Neutrals, Acids, and Pesticides,” EPA 600/4-84-053, National Technical Information Service, PB84-206572, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
To support measurement of several semivolatile pollutants, EPA has developed this attachment to EPA Method 625.
The additional semivolatile organic compounds listed in Tables 1 and 2 are added to all applicable calibration, spiking, and other solutions utilized in the determination of base/neutral and acid compounds by EPA Method 625. The instrument is to be calibrated with these compounds, using a capillary column, and all procedures and quality control tests stated in the Method must be performed.
All section and figure numbers in this Attachment reference section and figure numbers in EPA Method 625 unless noted otherwise. Sections not listed here remain unchanged.
1.1 This method is for determination of tetra- through octa-chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins (CDDs) and dibenzofurans (CDFs) in water, soil, sediment, sludge, tissue, and other sample matrices by high resolution gas chromatography/high resolution mass spectrometry (HRGC/HRMS). The method is for use in EPA's data gathering and monitoring programs associated with the Clean Water Act, the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, and the Safe Drinking Water Act. The method is based on a compilation of EPA, industry, commercial laboratory, and academic methods (References 1-6).
1.2 The seventeen 2,3,7,8-substituted CDDs/CDFs listed in Table 1 may be determined by this method. Specifications are also provided for separate determination of 2,3,7,8-tetrachloro-dibenzo-p-dioxin (2,3,7,8-TCDD) and 2,3,7,8-tetrachloro-dibenzofuran (2,3,7,8-TCDF).
1.3 The detection limits and quantitation levels in this method are usually dependent on the level of interferences rather than instrumental limitations. The minimum levels (MLs) in Table 2 are the levels at which the CDDs/CDFs can be determined with no interferences present. The Method Detection Limit (MDL) for 2,3,7,8-TCDD has been determined as 4.4 pg/L (parts-per-quadrillion) using this method.
1.4 The GC/MS portions of this method are for use only by analysts experienced with HRGC/HRMS or under the close supervision of such qualified persons. Each laboratory that uses this method must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results using the procedure in Section 9.2.
1.5 This method is “performance-based”. The analyst is permitted to modify the method to overcome interferences or lower the cost of measurements, provided that all performance criteria in this method are met.
1.6 Any modification of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered a major modification subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
Flow charts that summarize procedures for sample preparation, extraction, and analysis are given in Figure 1 for aqueous and solid samples, Figure 2 for multi-phase samples, and Figure 3 for tissue samples.
2.1 Extraction.
2.1.1 Aqueous samples (samples containing less than 1% solids)—Stable isotopically labeled analogs of 15 of the 2,3,7,8-substituted CDDs/CDFs are spiked into a 1 L sample, and the sample is extracted by one of three procedures:
2.1.1.1 Samples containing no visible particles are extracted with methylene chloride in a separatory funnel or by the solid-phase extraction technique summarized in Section 2.1.1.3. The extract is concentrated for cleanup.
2.1.1.2 Samples containing visible particles are vacuum filtered through a glass-fiber filter. The filter is extracted in a Soxhlet/Dean-Stark (SDS) extractor (Reference 7), and the filtrate is extracted with methylene chloride in a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is concentrated and combined with the SDS extract prior to cleanup.
2.1.1.3 The sample is vacuum filtered through a glass-fiber filter on top of a solid-phase extraction (SPE) disk. The filter and disk are extracted in an SDS extractor, and the extract is concentrated for cleanup.
2.1.2 Solid, semi-solid, and multi-phase samples (but not tissue)—The labeled compounds are spiked into a sample containing 10 g (dry weight) of solids. Samples containing multiple phases are pressure filtered and any aqueous liquid is discarded. Coarse solids are ground or homogenized. Any non-aqueous liquid from multi-phase samples is combined with the solids and extracted in an SDS extractor. The extract is concentrated for cleanup.
2.1.3 Fish and other tissue—The sample is extracted by one of two procedures:
2.1.3.1 Soxhlet or SDS extraction—A 20 g aliquot of sample is homogenized, and a 10 g aliquot is spiked with the labeled compounds. The sample is mixed with sodium sulfate, allowed to dry for 12-24 hours, and extracted for 18-24 hours using methylene chloride:hexane (1:1) in a Soxhlet extractor. The extract is evaporated to dryness, and the lipid content is determined.
2.1.3.2 HCl digestion—A 20 g aliquot is homogenized, and a 10 g aliquot is placed in a bottle and spiked with the labeled compounds. After equilibration, 200 mL of hydrochloric acid and 200 mL of methylene chloride:hexane (1:1) are added, and the bottle is agitated for 12-24 hours. The extract is evaporated to dryness, and the lipid content is determined.
2.2 After extraction,
2.3 After cleanup, the extract is concentrated to near dryness. Immediately prior to injection, internal standards are added to each extract, and an aliquot of the extract is injected into the gas chromatograph. The analytes are separated by the GC and detected by a high-resolution (≥10,000) mass spectrometer. Two exact m/z's are monitored for each analyte.
2.4 An individual CDD/CDF is identified by comparing the GC retention time and ion-abundance ratio of two exact m/z's with the corresponding retention time of an authentic standard and the theoretical or acquired ion-abundance ratio of the two exact m/z's. The non-2,3,7,8 substituted isomers and congeners are identified when retention times and ion-abundance ratios agree within predefined limits. Isomer specificity for 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF is achieved using GC columns that resolve these isomers from the other tetra-isomers.
2.5 Quantitative analysis is performed using selected ion current profile (SICP) areas, in one of three ways:
2.5.1 For the 15 2,3,7,8-substituted CDDs/CDFs with labeled analogs (see Table 1), the GC/MS system is calibrated, and the concentration of each compound is determined using the isotope dilution technique.
2.5.2 For 1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD, OCDF, and the labeled compounds, the GC/MS system is calibrated and the concentration of each compound is determined using the internal standard technique.
2.5.3 For non-2,3,7,8-substituted isomers and for all isomers at a given level of chlorination (
2.6 The quality of the analysis is assured through reproducible calibration and testing of the extraction, cleanup, and GC/MS systems.
Definitions are given in the glossary at the end of this method.
4.1 Solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware may yield artifacts and/or elevated baselines causing misinterpretation of chromatograms (References 8-9). Specific selection of reagents and purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required. Where possible, reagents are cleaned by extraction or solvent rinse.
4.2 Proper cleaning of glassware is extremely important, because glassware may not only contaminate the samples but may also remove the analytes of interest by adsorption on the glass surface.
4.2.1 Glassware should be rinsed with solvent and washed with a detergent solution as soon after use as is practical. Sonication of glassware containing a detergent solution for approximately 30 seconds may aid in cleaning. Glassware with removable parts, particularly separatory funnels with fluoropolymer stopcocks, must be disassembled prior to detergent washing.
4.2.2 After detergent washing, glassware should be rinsed immediately, first with methanol, then with hot tap water. The tap water rinse is followed by another methanol rinse, then acetone, and then methylene chloride.
4.2.3 Do not bake reusable glassware in an oven as a routine part of cleaning. Baking may be warranted after particularly dirty samples are encountered but should be minimized, as repeated baking of glassware may cause active sites on the glass surface that will irreversibly adsorb CDDs/CDFs.
4.2.4 Immediately prior to use, the Soxhlet apparatus should be pre-extracted with toluene for approximately three hours (see Sections 12.3.1 through 12.3.3). Separatory funnels should be shaken with methylene chloride/toluene (80/20 mixture) for two minutes, drained, and then shaken with pure methylene chloride for two minutes.
4.3 All materials used in the analysis shall be demonstrated to be free from interferences by running reference matrix method blanks initially and with each sample batch (samples started through the extraction process on a given 12-hour shift, to a maximum of 20 samples).
4.3.1 The reference matrix must simulate, as closely as possible, the sample matrix under test. Ideally, the reference matrix should not contain the CDDs/CDFs in detectable amounts, but should contain potential interferents in the concentrations expected to be found in the samples to be analyzed. For example, a reference sample of human adipose tissue containing pentachloronaphthalene can be used to exercise the cleanup systems when samples containing pentachloronaphthalene are expected.
4.3.2 When a reference matrix that simulates the sample matrix under test is not available, reagent water (Section 7.6.1) can be used to simulate water samples; playground sand (Section 7.6.2) or white quartz sand (Section 7.3.2) can be used to simulate soils; filter paper (Section 7.6.3) can be used to simulate papers and similar materials; and corn oil (Section 7.6.4) can be used to simulate tissues.
4.4 Interferences coextracted from samples will vary considerably from source to source, depending on the diversity of the site being sampled. Interfering compounds may be present at concentrations several orders of magnitude higher than the CDDs/CDFs. The most frequently encountered interferences are chlorinated biphenyls, methoxy biphenyls, hydroxydiphenyl ethers, benzylphenyl ethers, polynuclear aromatics, and pesticides. Because very low levels of CDDs/CDFs are measured by this method, the elimination of interferences is essential. The cleanup steps given in Section 13 can be used to reduce or eliminate these interferences and thereby permit reliable determination of the CDDs/CDFs at the levels shown in Table 2.
4.5 Each piece of reusable glassware should be numbered to associate that glassware with the processing of a particular sample. This will assist the laboratory in tracking possible sources of contamination for individual samples, identifying glassware associated with highly contaminated samples that may require extra cleaning, and determining when glassware should be discarded.
4.6 Cleanup of tissue—The natural lipid content of tissue can interfere in the analysis of tissue samples for the CDDs/CDFs. The lipid contents of different species and portions of tissue can vary widely. Lipids are soluble to varying degrees in various organic solvents and may be present in sufficient quantity to overwhelm the column chromatographic cleanup procedures used for cleanup of sample extracts. Lipids must be removed by the lipid removal procedures in Section 13.7, followed by alumina (Section 13.4) or Florisil (Section 13.8), and carbon (Section 13.5) as minimum additional cleanup steps. If chlorodiphenyl ethers are detected, as indicated by the presence of peaks at the exact m/z's monitored for these interferents, alumina and/or Florisil cleanup must be employed to eliminate these interferences.
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each compound or reagent used in this method has not been precisely determined; however, each chemical compound should be
5.1.1 The 2,3,7,8-TCDD isomer has been found to be acnegenic, carcinogenic, and teratogenic in laboratory animal studies. It is soluble in water to approximately 200 ppt and in organic solvents to 0.14%. On the basis of the available toxicological and physical properties of 2,3,7,8-TCDD, all of the CDDs/CDFs should be handled only by highly trained personnel thoroughly familiar with handling and cautionary procedures and the associated risks.
5.1.2 It is recommended that the laboratory purchase dilute standard solutions of the analytes in this method. However, if primary solutions are prepared, they shall be prepared in a hood, and a NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator shall be worn when high concentrations are handled.
5.2 The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material safety data sheets (MSDSs) should also be made available to all personnel involved in these analyses. It is also suggested that the laboratory perform personal hygiene monitoring of each analyst who uses this method and that the results of this monitoring be made available to the analyst. Additional information on laboratory safety can be found in References 10-13. The references and bibliography at the end of Reference 13 are particularly comprehensive in dealing with the general subject of laboratory safety.
5.3 The CDDs/CDFs and samples suspected to contain these compounds are handled using essentially the same techniques employed in handling radioactive or infectious materials. Well-ventilated, controlled access laboratories are required. Assistance in evaluating the health hazards of particular laboratory conditions may be obtained from certain consulting laboratories and from State Departments of Health or Labor, many of which have an industrial health service. The CDDs/CDFs are extremely toxic to laboratory animals. Each laboratory must develop a strict safety program for handling these compounds. The practices in References 2 and 14 are highly recommended.
5.3.1 Facility—When finely divided samples (dusts, soils, dry chemicals) are handled, all operations (including removal of samples from sample containers, weighing, transferring, and mixing) should be performed in a glove box demonstrated to be leak tight or in a fume hood demonstrated to have adequate air flow. Gross losses to the laboratory ventilation system must not be allowed. Handling of the dilute solutions normally used in analytical and animal work presents no inhalation hazards except in the case of an accident.
5.3.2 Protective equipment—Disposable plastic gloves, apron or lab coat, safety glasses or mask, and a glove box or fume hood adequate for radioactive work should be used. During analytical operations that may give rise to aerosols or dusts, personnel should wear respirators equipped with activated carbon filters. Eye protection equipment (preferably full face shields) must be worn while working with exposed samples or pure analytical standards. Latex gloves are commonly used to reduce exposure of the hands. When handling samples suspected or known to contain high concentrations of the CDDs/CDFs, an additional set of gloves can also be worn beneath the latex gloves.
5.3.3 Training—Workers must be trained in the proper method of removing contaminated gloves and clothing without contacting the exterior surfaces.
5.3.4 Personal hygiene—Hands and forearms should be washed thoroughly after each manipulation and before breaks (coffee, lunch, and shift).
5.3.5 Confinement—Isolated work areas posted with signs, segregated glassware and tools, and plastic absorbent paper on bench tops will aid in confining contamination.
5.3.6 Effluent vapors—The effluents of sample splitters from the gas chromatograph (GC) and from roughing pumps on the mass spectrometer (MS) should pass through either a column of activated charcoal or be bubbled through a trap containing oil or high-boiling alcohols to condense CDD/CDF vapors.
5.3.7 Waste Handling—Good technique includes minimizing contaminated waste. Plastic bag liners should be used in waste cans. Janitors and other personnel must be trained in the safe handling of waste.
5.3.8 Decontamination
5.3.8.1 Decontamination of personnel—Use any mild soap with plenty of scrubbing action.
5.3.8.2 Glassware, tools, and surfaces—Chlorothene NU Solvent is the least toxic solvent shown to be effective. Satisfactory cleaning may be accomplished by rinsing with Chlorothene, then washing with any detergent and water. If glassware is first rinsed with solvent, then the dish water may be disposed of in the sewer. Given the cost of disposal, it is prudent to minimize solvent wastes.
5.3.9 Laundry—Clothing known to be contaminated should be collected in plastic bags. Persons who convey the bags and launder the clothing should be advised of the hazard and trained in proper handling. The clothing may be put into a washer without contact if the launderer knows of the potential problem. The washer should be run through a cycle before being used again for other clothing.
5.3.10 Wipe tests—A useful method of determining cleanliness of work surfaces and
5.3.11 Table or wrist-action shaker—The use of a table or wrist-action shaker for extraction of tissues presents the possibility of breakage of the extraction bottle and spillage of acid and flammable organic solvent. A secondary containment system around the shaker is suggested to prevent the spread of acid and solvents in the event of such a breakage. The speed and intensity of shaking action should also be adjusted to minimize the possibility of breakage.
Brand names, suppliers, and part numbers are for illustration purposes only and no endorsement is implied. Equivalent performance may be achieved using apparatus and materials other than those specified here. Meeting the performance requirements of this method is the responsibility of the laboratory.
6.1 Sampling Equipment for Discrete or Composite Sampling
6.1.1 Sample bottles and caps
6.1.1.1 Liquid samples (waters, sludges and similar materials containing 5% solids or less)—Sample bottle, amber glass, 1.1 L minimum, with screw cap.
6.1.1.2 Solid samples (soils, sediments, sludges, paper pulps, filter cake, compost, and similar materials that contain more than 5% solids)—Sample bottle, wide mouth, amber glass, 500 mL minimum.
6.1.1.3 If amber bottles are not available, samples shall be protected from light.
6.1.1.4 Bottle caps—Threaded to fit sample bottles. Caps shall be lined with fluoropolymer.
6.1.1.5 Cleaning
6.1.1.5.1 Bottles are detergent water washed, then solvent rinsed before use.
6.1.1.5.2 Liners are detergent water washed, rinsed with reagent water (Section 7.6.1) followed by solvent, and baked at approximately 200 °C for a minimum of 1 hour prior to use.
6.1.2 Compositing equipment—Automatic or manual compositing system incorporating glass containers cleaned per bottle cleaning procedure above. Only glass or fluoropolymer tubing shall be used. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used in the pump only. Before use, the tubing shall be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsing with reagent water to minimize sample contamination. An integrating flow meter is used to collect proportional composite samples.
6.2 Equipment for Glassware Cleaning—Laboratory sink with overhead fume hood.
6.3 Equipment for Sample Preparation
6.3.1 Laboratory fume hood of sufficient size to contain the sample preparation equipment listed below.
6.3.2 Glove box (optional).
6.3.3 Tissue homogenizer—VirTis Model 45 Macro homogenizer (American Scientific Products H-3515, or equivalent) with stainless steel Macro-shaft and Turbo-shear blade.
6.3.4 Meat grinder—Hobart, or equivalent, with 3-5 mm holes in inner plate.
6.3.5 Equipment for determining percent moisture
6.3.5.1 Oven—Capable of maintaining a temperature of 110 ±5 °C.
6.3.5.2 Dessicator.
6.3.6 Balances
6.3.6.1 Analytical—Capable of weighing 0.1 mg.
6.3.6.2 Top loading—Capable of weighing 10 mg.
6.4 Extraction Apparatus
6.4.1 Water samples
6.4.1.1 pH meter, with combination glass electrode.
6.4.1.2 pH paper, wide range (Hydrion Papers, or equivalent).
6.4.1.3 Graduated cylinder, 1 L capacity.
6.4.1.4 Liquid/liquid extraction—Separatory funnels, 250 mL, 500 mL, and 2000 mL, with fluoropolymer stopcocks.
6.4.1.5 Solid-phase extraction
6.4.1.5.1 One liter filtration apparatus, including glass funnel, glass frit support, clamp, adapter, stopper, filtration flask, and vacuum tubing (Figure 4). For wastewater samples, the apparatus should accept 90 or 144 mm disks. For drinking water or other samples containing low solids, smaller disks may be used.
6.4.1.5.2 Vacuum source capable of maintaining 25 in. Hg, equipped with shutoff valve and vacuum gauge.
6.4.1.5.3 Glass-fiber filter—Whatman GMF 150 (or equivalent), 1 micron pore size, to fit filtration apparatus in Section 6.4.1.5.1.
6.4.1.5.4 Solid-phase extraction disk containing octadecyl (C
6.4.2 Soxhlet/Dean-Stark (SDS) extractor (Figure 5)—For filters and solid/sludge samples.
6.4.2.1 Soxhlet—50 mm ID, 200 mL capacity with 500 mL flask (Cal-Glass LG-6900, or equivalent, except substitute 500 mL round-bottom flask for 300 mL flat-bottom flask).
6.4.2.2 Thimble—43 × 123 to fit Soxhlet (Cal-Glass LG-6901-122, or equivalent).
6.4.2.3 Moisture trap—Dean Stark or Barret with fluoropolymer stopcock, to fit Soxhlet.
6.4.2.4 Heating mantle—Hemispherical, to fit 500 mL round-bottom flask (Cal-Glass LG-8801-112, or equivalent).
6.4.2.5 Variable transformer—Powerstat (or equivalent), 110 volt, 10 amp.
6.4.3 Apparatus for extraction of tissue.
6.4.3.1 Bottle for extraction (if digestion/extraction using HCl is used)” 500-600 mL wide-mouth clear glass, with fluoropolymer-lined cap.
6.4.3.2 Bottle for back-extraction—100-200 mL narrow-mouth clear glass with fluoropolymer-lined cap.
6.4.3.3 Mechanical shaker—Wrist-action or platform-type rotary shaker that produces vigorous agitation (Sybron Thermolyne Model LE “Big Bill” rotator/shaker, or equivalent).
6.4.3.4 Rack attached to shaker table to permit agitation of four to nine samples simultaneously.
6.4.4 Beakers—400-500 mL.
6.4.5 Spatulas—Stainless steel.
6.5 Filtration Apparatus.
6.5.1 Pyrex glass wool—Solvent-extracted by SDS for three hours minimum.
Baking glass wool may cause active sites that will irreversibly adsorb CDDs/CDFs.
6.5.2 Glass funnel—125-250 mL.
6.5.3 Glass-fiber filter paper—Whatman GF/D (or equivalent), to fit glass funnel in Section 6.5.2.
6.5.4 Drying column—15-20 mm ID Pyrex chromatographic column equipped with coarse-glass frit or glass-wool plug.
6.5.5 Buchner funnel—15 cm.
6.5.6 Glass-fiber filter paper—to fit Buchner funnel in Section 6.5.5.
6.5.7 Filtration flasks—1.5-2.0 L, with side arm.
6.5.8 Pressure filtration apparatus—Millipore YT30 142 HW, or equivalent.
6.6 Centrifuge Apparatus.
6.6.1 Centrifuge—Capable of rotating 500 mL centrifuge bottles or 15 mL centrifuge tubes at 5,000 rpm minimum.
6.6.2 Centrifuge bottles—500 mL, with screw-caps, to fit centrifuge.
6.6.3 Centrifuge tubes—12-15 mL, with screw-caps, to fit centrifuge.
6.7 Cleanup Apparatus.
6.7.1 Automated gel permeation chromatograph (Analytical Biochemical Labs, Inc, Columbia, MO, Model GPC Autoprep 1002, or equivalent).
6.7.1.1 Column—600-700 mm long × 25 mm ID, packed with 70 g of
6.7.1.2 Syringe—10 mL, with Luer fitting.
6.7.1.3 Syringe filter holder—stainless steel, and glass-fiber or fluoropolymer filters (Gelman 4310, or equivalent).
6.7.1.4 UV detectors—254 nm, preparative or semi-preparative flow cell (Isco, Inc., Type 6; Schmadzu, 5 mm path length; Beckman-Altex 152W, 8 µL micro-prep flow cell, 2 mm path; Pharmacia UV-1, 3 mm flow cell; LDC Milton-Roy UV-3, monitor #1203; or equivalent).
6.7.2 Reverse-phase high-performance liquid chromatograph.
6.7.2.1 Column oven and detector—Perkin-Elmer Model LC-65T (or equivalent) operated at 0.02 AUFS at 235 nm.
6.7.2.2 Injector—Rheodyne 7120 (or equivalent) with 50 µL sample loop.
6.7.2.3 Column—Two 6.2 mm × 250 mm Zorbax-ODS columns in series (DuPont Instruments Division, Wilmington, DE, or equivalent), operated at 50 °C with 2.0 mL/min methanol isocratic effluent.
6.7.2.4 Pump—Altex 110A (or equivalent).
6.7.3 Pipets.
6.7.3.1 Disposable, pasteur—150 mm long × 5-mm ID (Fisher Scientific 13-678-6A, or equivalent).
6.7.3.2 Disposable, serological—10 mL (6 mm ID).
6.7.4 Glass chromatographic columns.
6.7.4.1 150 mm long × 8-mm ID, (Kontes K-420155, or equivalent) with coarse-glass frit or glass-wool plug and 250 mL reservoir.
6.7.4.2 200 mm long × 15 mm ID, with coarse-glass frit or glass-wool plug and 250 mL reservoir.
6.7.4.3 300 mm long × 25 mm ID, with 300 mL reservoir and glass or fluoropolymer stopcock.
6.7.5 Stirring apparatus for batch silica cleanup of tissue extracts.
6.7.5.1 Mechanical stirrer—Corning Model 320, or equivalent.
6.7.5.2 Bottle—500-600 mL wide-mouth clear glass.
6.7.6 Oven—For baking and storage of adsorbents, capable of maintaining a constant temperature (±5 °C) in the range of 105-250 °C.
6.8 Concentration Apparatus.
6.8.1 Rotary evaporator—Buchi/Brinkman-American Scientific No. E5045-10 or equivalent, equipped with a variable temperature water bath.
6.8.1.1 Vacuum source for rotary evaporator equipped with shutoff valve at the evaporator and vacuum gauge.
6.8.1.2 A recirculating water pump and chiller are recommended, as use of tap water for cooling the evaporator wastes large volumes of water and can lead to inconsistent performance as water temperatures and pressures vary.
6.8.1.3 Round-bottom flask—100 mL and 500 mL or larger, with ground-glass fitting compatible with the rotary evaporator.
6.8.2 Kuderna-Danish (K-D) Concentrator.
6.8.2.1 Concentrator tube—10 mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025, or equivalent) with calibration verified. Ground-glass stopper (size 19/22 joint) is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
6.8.2.2 Evaporation flask—500 mL (Kontes K-570001-0500, or equivalent), attached to concentrator tube with springs (Kontes K-662750-0012 or equivalent).
6.8.2.3 Snyder column—Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0232, or equivalent).
6.8.2.4 Boiling chips.
6.8.2.4.1 Glass or silicon carbide—Approximately 10/40 mesh, extracted with methylene chloride and baked at 450 °C for one hour minimum.
6.8.2.4.2 Fluoropolymer (optional)—Extracted with methylene chloride.
6.8.2.5 Water bath—Heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of maintaining a temperature within ±2 °C, installed in a fume hood.
6.8.3 Nitrogen blowdown apparatus—Equipped with water bath controlled in the range of 30-60 °C (N-Evap, Organomation Associates, Inc., South Berlin, MA, or equivalent), installed in a fume hood.
6.8.4 Sample vials.
6.8.4.1 Amber glass—2-5 mL with fluoropolymer-lined screw-cap.
6.8.4.2 Glass—0.3 mL, conical, with fluoropolymer-lined screw or crimp cap.
6.9 Gas Chromatograph—Shall have splitless or on-column injection port for capillary column, temperature program with isothermal hold, and shall meet all of the performance specifications in Section 10.
6.9.1 GC column for CDDs/CDFs and for isomer specificity for 2,3,7,8-TCDD—60 ±5 m long × 0.32 ±0.02 mm ID; 0.25 µm 5% phenyl, 94% methyl, 1% vinyl silicone bonded-phase fused-silica capillary column (J&W DB-5, or equivalent).
6.9.2 GC column for isomer specificity for 2,3,7,8-TCDF—30 ±5 m long × 0.32 ±0.02 mm ID; 0.25 µm bonded-phase fused-silica capillary column (J&W DB-225, or equivalent).
6.10 Mass Spectrometer—28-40 eV electron impact ionization, shall be capable of repetitively selectively monitoring 12 exact m/z's minimum at high resolution (≥10,000) during a period of approximately one second, and shall meet all of the performance specifications in Section 10.
6.11 GC/MS Interface—The mass spectrometer (MS) shall be interfaced to the GC such that the end of the capillary column terminates within 1 cm of the ion source but does not intercept the electron or ion beams.
6.12 Data System—Capable of collecting, recording, and storing MS data.
7.1 pH Adjustment and Back-Extraction.
7.1.1 Potassium hydroxide—Dissolve 20 g reagent grade KOH in 100 mL reagent water.
7.1.2 Sulfuric acid—Reagent grade (specific gravity 1.84).
7.1.3 Hydrochloric acid—Reagent grade, 6N.
7.1.4 Sodium chloride—Reagent grade, prepare at 5% (w/v) solution in reagent water.
7.2 Solution Drying and Evaporation.
7.2.1 Solution drying—Sodium sulfate, reagent grade, granular, anhydrous (Baker 3375, or equivalent), rinsed with methylene chloride (20 mL/g), baked at 400 °C for one hour minimum, cooled in a dessicator, and stored in a pre-cleaned glass bottle with screw-cap that prevents moisture from entering. If, after heating, the sodium sulfate develops a noticeable grayish cast (due to the presence of carbon in the crystal matrix), that batch of reagent is not suitable for use and should be discarded. Extraction with methylene chloride (as opposed to simple rinsing) and baking at a lower temperature may produce sodium sulfate that is suitable for use.
7.2.2 Tissue drying—Sodium sulfate, reagent grade, powdered, treated and stored as above.
7.2.3 Prepurified nitrogen.
7.3 Extraction.
7.3.1 Solvents—Acetone, toluene, cyclohexane, hexane, methanol, methylene chloride, and nonane; distilled in glass, pesticide quality, lot-certified to be free of interferences.
7.3.2 White quartz sand, 60/70 mesh—For Soxhlet/Dean-Stark extraction (Aldrich Chemical, Cat. No. 27-437-9, or equivalent). Bake at 450 °C for four hours minimum.
7.4 GPC Calibration Solution—Prepare a solution containing 300 mg/mL corn oil, 15 mg/mL bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, 1.4 mg/mL pentachlorophenol, 0.1 mg/mL perylene, and 0.5 mg/mL sulfur.
7.5 Adsorbents for Sample Cleanup.
7.5.1 Silica gel.
7.5.1.1 Activated silica gel—100-200 mesh, Supelco 1-3651 (or equivalent), rinsed with methylene chloride, baked at 180 °C for a minimum of one hour, cooled in a dessicator, and stored in a precleaned glass bottle with screw-cap that prevents moisture from entering.
7.5.1.2 Acid silica gel (30% w/w)—Thoroughly mix 44.0 g of concentrated sulfuric acid with 100.0 g of activated silica gel in a clean container. Break up aggregates with a stirring rod until a uniform mixture is obtained. Store in a bottle with a fluoropolymer-lined screw-cap.
7.5.1.3 Basic silica gel—Thoroughly mix 30 g of 1N sodium hydroxide with 100 g of activated silica gel in a clean container. Break up aggregates with a stirring rod until a uniform mixture is obtained. Store in a bottle with a fluoropolymer-lined screw-cap.
7.5.1.4 Potassium silicate.
7.5.1.4.1 Dissolve 56 g of high purity potassium hydroxide (Aldrich, or equivalent) in 300 mL of methanol in a 750-1000 mL flat-bottom flask.
7.5.1.4.2 Add 100 g of silica gel and a stirring bar, and stir on a hot plate at 60-70 °C for one to two hours.
7.5.1.4.3 Decant the liquid and rinse the potassium silicate twice with 100 mL portions of methanol, followed by a single rinse with 100 mL of methylene chloride.
7.5.1.4.4 Spread the potassium silicate on solvent-rinsed aluminum foil and dry for two to four hours in a hood.
7.5.1.4.5 Activate overnight at 200-250 °C.
7.5.2 Alumina—Either one of two types of alumina, acid or basic, may be used in the cleanup of sample extracts, provided that the laboratory can meet the performance specifications for the recovery of labeled compounds described in Section 9.3. The same type of alumina must be used for all samples, including those used to demonstrate initial precision and recovery (Section 9.2) and ongoing precision and recovery (Section 15.5).
7.5.2.1 Acid alumina—Supelco 19996-6C (or equivalent). Activate by heating to 130 °C for a minimum of 12 hours.
7.5.2.2 Basic alumina—Supelco 19944-6C (or equivalent). Activate by heating to 600 °C for a minimum of 24 hours. Alternatively, activate by heating in a tube furnace at 650-700 °C under an air flow rate of approximately 400 cc/minute. Do not heat over 700 °C, as this can lead to reduced capacity for retaining the analytes. Store at 130 °C in a covered flask. Use within five days of baking.
7.5.3 Carbon.
7.5.3.1 Carbopak C—(Supelco 1-0258, or equivalent).
7.5.3.2 Celite 545—(Supelco 2-0199, or equivalent).
7.5.3.3 Thoroughly mix 9.0 g Carbopak C and 41.0 g Celite 545 to produce an 18% w/w mixture. Activate the mixture at 130 °C for a minimum of six hours. Store in a dessicator.
7.5.4 Anthropogenic isolation column—Pack the column in Section 6.7.4.3 from bottom to top with the following:
7.5.4.1 2 g silica gel (Section 7.5.1.1).
7.5.4.2 2 g potassium silicate (Section 7.5.1.4).
7.5.4.3 2 g granular anhydrous sodium sulfate (Section 7.2.1).
7.5.4.4 10 g acid silica gel (Section 7.5.1.2).
7.5.4.5 2 g granular anhydrous sodium sulfate.
7.5.5 Florisil column.
7.5.5.1 Florisil—60-100 mesh, Floridin Corp (or equivalent). Soxhlet extract in 500 g portions for 24 hours.
7.5.5.2 Insert a glass wool plug into the tapered end of a graduated serological pipet (Section 6.7.3.2). Pack with 1.5 g (approx 2 mL) of Florisil topped with approx 1 mL of sodium sulfate (Section 7.2.1) and a glass wool plug.
7.5.5.3 Activate in an oven at 130-150 °C for a minimum of 24 hours and cool for 30 minutes. Use within 90 minutes of cooling.
7.6 Reference Matrices—Matrices in which the CDDs/CDFs and interfering compounds are not detected by this method.
7.6.1 Reagent water—Bottled water purchased locally, or prepared by passage through activated carbon.
7.6.2 High-solids reference matrix—Playground sand or similar material. Prepared by extraction with methylene chloride and/or baking at 450 °C for a minimum of four hours.
7.6.3 Paper reference matrix—Glass-fiber filter, Gelman Type A, or equivalent. Cut paper to simulate the surface area of the paper sample being tested.
7.6.4 Tissue reference matrix—Corn or other vegetable oil. May be prepared by extraction with methylene chloride.
7.6.5 Other matrices—This method may be verified on any reference matrix by performing the tests given in Section 9.2. Ideally, the matrix should be free of the CDDs/CDFs, but in no case shall the background level of the CDDs/CDFs in the reference matrix exceed three times the minimum levels in Table 2. If low background levels of the CDDs/CDFs are present in the reference matrix, the spike level of the analytes used in Section 9.2 should be increased to provide a spike-to-background ratio in the range of 1:1 to 5:1 (Reference 15).
7.7 Standard Solutions—Purchased as solutions or mixtures with certification to their purity, concentration, and authenticity, or prepared from materials of known purity and composition. If the chemical purity is 98% or greater, the weight may be used without correction to compute the concentration of the standard. When not being used, standards are stored in the dark at room temperature in screw-capped vials with fluoropolymer-lined caps. A mark is placed on the vial at the level of the solution so that solvent loss by evaporation can be detected. If solvent loss has occurred, the solution should be replaced.
7.8 Stock Solutions.
7.8.1 Preparation—Prepare in nonane per the steps below or purchase as dilute solutions (Cambridge Isotope Laboratories (CIL), Woburn, MA, or equivalent). Observe the safety precautions in Section 5, and the recommendation in Section 5.1.2.
7.8.2 Dissolve an appropriate amount of assayed reference material in solvent. For example, weigh 1-2 mg of 2,3,7,8-TCDD to three significant figures in a 10 mL ground-glass-stoppered volumetric flask and fill to the mark with nonane. After the TCDD is completely dissolved, transfer the solution to a clean 15 mL vial with fluoropolymer-lined cap.
7.8.3 Stock standard solutions should be checked for signs of degradation prior to the
7.9 PAR Stock Solution
7.9.1 All CDDs/CDFs—Using the solutions in Section 7.8, prepare the PAR stock solution to contain the CDDs/CDFs at the concentrations shown in Table 3. When diluted, the solution will become the PAR (Section 7.14).
7.9.2 If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, prepare the PAR stock solution to contain these compounds only.
7.10 Labeled-Compound Spiking Solution.
7.10.1 All CDDs/CDFs—From stock solutions, or from purchased mixtures, prepare this solution to contain the labeled compounds in nonane at the concentrations shown in Table 3. This solution is diluted with acetone prior to use (Section 7.10.3).
7.10.2 If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, prepare the labeled-compound solution to contain these compounds only. This solution is diluted with acetone prior to use (Section 7.10.3).
7.10.3 Dilute a sufficient volume of the labeled compound solution (Section 7.10.1 or 7.10.2) by a factor of 50 with acetone to prepare a diluted spiking solution. Each sample requires 1.0 mL of the diluted solution, but no more solution should be prepared than can be used in one day.
7.11 Cleanup Standard—Prepare
7.12 Internal Standard(s).
7.12.1 All CDDs/CDFs—Prepare the internal standard solution to contain
7.12.2 If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, prepare the internal standard solution to contain
7.13 Calibration Standards (CS1 through CS5)—Combine the solutions in Sections 7.9 through 7.12 to produce the five calibration solutions shown in Table 4 in nonane. These solutions permit the relative response (labeled to native) and response factor to be measured as a function of concentration. The CS3 standard is used for calibration verification (VER). If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, combine the solutions appropriate to these compounds.
7.14 Precision and Recovery (PAR) Standard—Used for determination of initial (Section 9.2) and ongoing (Section 15.5) precision and recovery. Dilute 10 µL of the precision and recovery standard (Section 7.9.1 or 7.9.2) to 2.0 mL with acetone for each sample matrix for each sample batch. One mL each are required for the blank and OPR with each matrix in each batch.
7.15 GC Retention Time Window Defining Solution and Isomer Specificity Test Standard—Used to define the beginning and ending retention times for the dioxin and furan isomers and to demonstrate isomer specificity of the GC columns employed for determination of 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF. The standard must contain the compounds listed in Table 5 (CIL EDF—4006, or equivalent), at a minimum. It is not necessary to monitor the window-defining compounds if only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined. In this case, an isomer-specificity test standard containing the most closely eluted isomers listed in Table 5 (CIL EDF-4033, or equivalent) may be used.
7.16 QC Check Sample—A QC Check Sample should be obtained from a source independent of the calibration standards. Ideally, this check sample would be a certified reference material containing the CDDs/CDFs in known concentrations in a sample matrix similar to the matrix under test.
7.17 Stability of Solutions—Standard solutions used for quantitative purposes (Sections 7.9 through 7.15) should be analyzed periodically, and should be assayed against reference standards (Section 7.8.3) before further use.
8.1 Collect samples in amber glass containers following conventional sampling practices (Reference 16). Aqueous samples that flow freely are collected in refrigerated bottles using automatic sampling equipment. Solid samples are collected as grab samples using wide-mouth jars.
8.2 Maintain aqueous samples in the dark at 0-4 °C from the time of collection until receipt at the laboratory. If residual chlorine is present in aqueous samples, add 80 mg sodium thiosulfate per liter of water. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used to measure residual chlorine (Reference 17). If sample pH is greater than 9, adjust to pH 7-9 with sulfuric acid.
Maintain solid, semi-solid, oily, and mixed-phase samples in the dark at <4 °C from the time of collection until receipt at the laboratory.
Store aqueous samples in the dark at 0-4 °C. Store solid, semi-solid, oily, mixed-phase, and tissue samples in the dark at <−10 °C.
8.3 Fish and Tissue Samples.
8.3.1 Fish may be cleaned, filleted, or processed in other ways in the field, such that the laboratory may expect to receive whole fish, fish fillets, or other tissues for analysis.
8.3.2 Fish collected in the field should be wrapped in aluminum foil, and must be maintained at a temperature less than 4 °C
8.3.3 Samples must be frozen upon receipt at the laboratory and maintained in the dark at <−10 °C until prepared. Maintain unused sample in the dark at <−10 °C.
8.4 Holding Times.
8.4.1 There are no demonstrated maximum holding times associated with CDDs/CDFs in aqueous, solid, semi-solid, tissues, or other sample matrices. If stored in the dark at 0-4 °C and preserved as given above (if required), aqueous samples may be stored for up to one year. Similarly, if stored in the dark at <−10 °C, solid, semi-solid, multi-phase, and tissue samples may be stored for up to one year.
8.4.2 Store sample extracts in the dark at <−10 °C until analyzed. If stored in the dark at <−10 °C, sample extracts may be stored for up to one year.
9.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality assurance program (Reference 18). The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability, analysis of samples spiked with labeled compounds to evaluate and document data quality, and analysis of standards and blanks as tests of continued performance. Laboratory performance is compared to established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method.
If the method is to be applied to sample matrix other than water (e.g., soils, filter cake, compost, tissue) the most appropriate alternate matrix (Sections 7.6.2 through 7.6.5) is substituted for the reagent water matrix (Section 7.6.1) in all performance tests.
9.1.1 The analyst shall make an initial demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 9.2.
9.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in analytical technology, and to allow the analyst to overcome sample matrix interferences, the analyst is permitted certain options to improve separations or lower the costs of measurements. These options include alternate extraction, concentration, cleanup procedures, and changes in columns and detectors. Alternate determinative techniques, such as the substitution of spectroscopic or immuno-assay techniques, and changes that degrade method performance, are not allowed. If an analytical technique other than the techniques specified in this method is used, that technique must have a specificity equal to or better than the specificity of the techniques in this method for the analytes of interest.
9.1.2.1 Each time a modification is made to this method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 9.2. If the detection limit of the method will be affected by the change, the laboratory is required to demonstrate that the MDL (40 CFR part 136, appendix B) is lower than one-third the regulatory compliance level or one-third the ML in this method, whichever is higher. If calibration will be affected by the change, the analyst must recalibrate the instrument per Section 10.
9.1.2.2 The laboratory is required to maintain records of modifications made to this method. These records include the following, at a minimum:
9.1.2.2.1 The names, titles, addresses, and telephone numbers of the analyst(s) who performed the analyses and modification, and of the quality control officer who witnessed and will verify the analyses and modifications.
9.1.2.2.2 A listing of pollutant(s) measured, by name and CAS Registry number.
9.1.2.2.3 A narrative stating reason(s) for the modifications.
9.1.2.2.4 Results from all quality control (QC) tests comparing the modified method to this method, including:
(a) Calibration (Section 10.5 through 10.7).
(b) Calibration verification (Section 15.3).
(c) Initial precision and recovery (Section 9.2).
(d) Labeled compound recovery (Section 9.3).
(e) Analysis of blanks (Section 9.5).
(f) Accuracy assessment (Section 9.4).
9.1.2.2.5 Data that will allow an independent reviewer to validate each determination by tracing the instrument output (peak height, area, or other signal) to the final result. These data are to include:
(a) Sample numbers and other identifiers.
(b) Extraction dates.
(c) Analysis dates and times.
(d) Analysis sequence/run chronology.
(e) Sample weight or volume (Section 11).
(f) Extract volume prior to each cleanup step (Section 13).
(g) Extract volume after each cleanup step (Section 13).
(h) Final extract volume prior to injection (Section 14).
(i) Injection volume (Section 14.3).
(j) Dilution data, differentiating between dilution of a sample or extract (Section 17.5).
(k) Instrument and operating conditions.
(l) Column (dimensions, liquid phase, solid support, film thickness, etc).
(m) Operating conditions (temperatures, temperature program, flow rates).
(n) Detector (type, operating conditions, etc).
(o) Chromatograms, printer tapes, and other recordings of raw data.
(p) Quantitation reports, data system outputs, and other data to link the raw data to the results reported.
9.1.3 Analyses of method blanks are required to demonstrate freedom from contamination (Section 4.3). The procedures and criteria for analysis of a method blank are described in Sections 9.5 and 15.6.
9.1.4 The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to monitor method performance. This test is described in Section 9.3. When results of these spikes indicate atypical method performance for samples, the samples are diluted to bring method performance within acceptable limits. Procedures for dilution are given in Section 17.5.
9.1.5 The laboratory shall, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through calibration verification and the analysis of the ongoing precision and recovery aliquot that the analytical system is in control. These procedures are described in Sections 15.1 through 15.5.
9.1.6 The laboratory shall maintain records to define the quality of data that is generated. Development of accuracy statements is described in Section 9.4.
9.2 Initial Precision and Recovery (IPR)—To establish the ability to generate acceptable precision and recovery, the analyst shall perform the following operations.
9.2.1 For low solids (aqueous) samples, extract, concentrate, and analyze four 1 L aliquots of reagent water spiked with the diluted labeled compound spiking solution (Section 7.10.3) and the precision and recovery standard (Section 7.14) according to the procedures in Sections 11 through 18. For an alternative sample matrix, four aliquots of the alternative reference matrix (Section 7.6) are used. All sample processing steps that are to be used for processing samples, including preparation (Section 11), extraction (Section 12), and cleanup (Section 13), shall be included in this test.
9.2.2 Using results of the set of four analyses, compute the average concentration (X) of the extracts in ng/mL and the standard deviation of the concentration (s) in ng/mL for each compound, by isotope dilution for CDDs/CDFs with a labeled analog, and by internal standard for 1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD, OCDF, and the labeled compounds.
9.2.3 For each CDD/CDF and labeled compound, compare s and X with the corresponding limits for initial precision and recovery in Table 6. If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, compare s and X with the corresponding limits for initial precision and recovery in Table 6a. If s and X for all compounds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance is acceptable and analysis of blanks and samples may begin. If, however, any individual s exceeds the precision limit or any individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, system performance is unacceptable for that compound. Correct the problem and repeat the test (Section 9.2).
9.3 The laboratory shall spike all samples with the diluted labeled compound spiking solution (Section 7.10.3) to assess method performance on the sample matrix.
9.3.1 Analyze each sample according to the procedures in Sections 11 through 18.
9.3.2 Compute the percent recovery of the labeled compounds and the cleanup standard using the internal standard method (Section 17.2).
9.3.3 The recovery of each labeled compound must be within the limits in Table 7 when all 2,3,7,8-substituted CDDs/CDFs are determined, and within the limits in Table 7a when only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are determined. If the recovery of any compound falls outside of these limits, method performance is unacceptable for that compound in that sample. To overcome such difficulties, water samples are diluted and smaller amounts of soils, sludges, sediments, and other matrices are reanalyzed per Section 18.4.
9.4 Recovery of labeled compounds from samples should be assessed and records should be maintained.
9.4.1 After the analysis of five samples of a given matrix type (water, soil, sludge, pulp, etc.) for which the labeled compounds pass the tests in Section 9.3, compute the average percent recovery (R) and the standard deviation of the percent recovery (SR) for the labeled compounds only. Express the assessment as a percent recovery interval from R−2S
9.4.2 Update the accuracy assessment for each labeled compound in each matrix on a regular basis (e.g., after each 5-10 new measurements).
9.5 Method Blanks—Reference matrix method blanks are analyzed to demonstrate freedom from contamination (Section 4.3).
9.5.1 Prepare, extract, clean up, and concentrate a method blank with each sample batch (samples of the same matrix started through the extraction process on the same 12-hour shift, to a maximum of 20 samples). The matrix for the method blank shall be similar to sample matrix for the batch, e.g., a 1 L reagent water blank (Section 7.6.1), high-solids reference matrix blank (Section 7.6.2), paper matrix blank (Section 7.6.3); tissue blank (Section 7.6.4) or alternative reference matrix blank (Section 7.6.5). Analyze the blank immediately after analysis of the OPR (Section 15.5) to demonstrate freedom from contamination.
9.5.2 If any 2,3,7,8-substituted CDD/CDF (Table 1) is found in the blank at greater than the minimum level (Table 2) or one-third the regulatory compliance level, whichever is greater; or if any potentially interfering compound is found in the blank at the minimum level for each level of
9.6 QC Check Sample—Analyze the QC Check Sample (Section 7.16) periodically to assure the accuracy of calibration standards and the overall reliability of the analytical process. It is suggested that the QC Check Sample be analyzed at least quarterly.
9.7 The specifications contained in this method can be met if the apparatus used is calibrated properly and then maintained in a calibrated state. The standards used for calibration (Section 10), calibration verification (Section 15.3), and for initial (Section 9.2) and ongoing (Section 15.5) precision and recovery should be identical, so that the most precise results will be obtained. A GC/MS instrument will provide the most reproducible results if dedicated to the settings and conditions required for the analyses of CDDs/CDFs by this method.
9.8 Depending on specific program requirements, field replicates may be collected to determine the precision of the sampling technique, and spiked samples may be required to determine the accuracy of the analysis when the internal standard method is used.
10.1 Establish the operating conditions necessary to meet the minimum retention times for the internal standards in Section 10.2.4 and the relative retention times for the CDDs/CDFs in Table 2.
10.1.1 Suggested GC operating conditions:
All portions of the column that connect the GC to the ion source shall remain at or above the interface temperature specified above during analysis to preclude condensation of less volatile compounds.
Optimize GC conditions for compound separation and sensitivity. Once optimized, the same GC conditions must be used for the analysis of all standards, blanks, IPR and OPR aliquots, and samples.
10.1.2 Mass spectrometer (MS) resolution—Obtain a selected ion current profile (SICP) of each analyte in Table 3 at the two exact m/z's specified in Table 8 and at ≥10,000 resolving power by injecting an authentic standard of the CDDs/CDFs either singly or as part of a mixture in which there is no interference between closely eluted components.
10.1.2.1 The analysis time for CDDs/CDFs may exceed the long-term mass stability of the mass spectrometer. Because the instrument is operated in the high-resolution mode, mass drifts of a few ppm (e.g., 5 ppm in mass) can have serious adverse effects on instrument performance. Therefore, a mass-drift correction is mandatory and a lock-mass m/z from PFK is used for drift correction. The lock-mass m/z is dependent on the exact m/z's monitored within each descriptor, as shown in Table 8. The level of PFK metered into the HRMS during analyses should be adjusted so that the amplitude of the most intense selected lock-mass m/z signal (regardless of the descriptor number) does not exceed 10% of the full-scale deflection for a given set of detector parameters. Under those conditions, sensitivity changes that might occur during the analysis can be more effectively monitored.
Excessive PFK (or any other reference substance) may cause noise problems and contamination of the ion source necessitating increased frequency of source cleaning.
10.1.2.2 If the HRMS has the capability to monitor resolution during the analysis, it is acceptable to terminate the analysis when the resolution falls below 10,000 to save reanalysis time.
10.1.2.3 Using a PFK molecular leak, tune the instrument to meet the minimum required resolving power of 10,000 (10% valley) at m/z 304.9824 (PFK) or any other reference signal close to m/z 304 (from TCDF). For each descriptor (Table 8), monitor and record the resolution and exact m/z's of three to five reference peaks covering the mass range of the descriptor. The resolution must be greater than or equal to 10,000, and the deviation between the exact m/z and the theoretical m/z (Table 8) for each exact m/z monitored must be less than 5 ppm.
10.2 Ion Abundance Ratios, Minimum Levels, Signal-to-Noise Ratios, and Absolute Retention Times—Choose an injection volume of either 1 µL or 2 µL, consistent with the capability of the HRGC/HRMS instrument. Inject a 1 µL or 2 µL aliquot of the CS1 calibration solution (Table 4) using the GC conditions from Section 10.1.1. If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, the operating conditions and specifications below apply to analysis of those compounds only.
10.2.1 Measure the SICP areas for each analyte, and compute the ion abundance ratios at the exact m/z's specified in Table 8. Compare the computed ratio to the theoretical ratio given in Table 9.
10.2.1.1 The exact m/z's to be monitored in each descriptor are shown in Table 8. Each group or descriptor shall be monitored in succession as a function of GC retention time to ensure that all CDDs/CDFs are detected. Additional m/z's may be monitored in each descriptor, and the m/z's may be divided among more than the five descriptors listed in Table 8, provided that the laboratory is able to monitor the m/z's of all the CDDs/CDFs that may elute from the GC in a given retention-time window. If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, the descriptors may be modified to include only the exact m/z's for the tetra-and penta-isomers, the diphenyl ethers, and the lock m/z's.
10.2.1.2 The mass spectrometer shall be operated in a mass-drift correction mode, using perfluorokerosene (PFK) to provide lock m/z's. The lock-mass for each group of m/z's is shown in Table 8. Each lock mass shall be monitored and shall not vary by more than ±20% throughout its respective retention time window. Variations of the lock mass by more than 20% indicate the presence of coeluting interferences that may significantly reduce the sensitivity of the mass spectrometer. Reinjection of another aliquot of the sample extract will not resolve the problem. Additional cleanup of the extract may be required to remove the interferences.
10.2.2 All CDDs/CDFs and labeled compounds in the CS1 standard shall be within the QC limits in Table 9 for their respective ion abundance ratios; otherwise, the mass spectrometer shall be adjusted and this test repeated until the m/z ratios fall within the limits specified. If the adjustment alters the resolution of the mass spectrometer, resolution shall be verified (Section 10.1.2) prior to repeat of the test.
10.2.3 Verify that the HRGC/HRMS instrument meets the minimum levels in Table 2. The peaks representing the CDDs/CDFs and labeled compounds in the CS1 calibration standard must have signal-to-noise ratios (S/N) greater than or equal to 10.0. Otherwise, the mass spectrometer shall be adjusted and this test repeated until the minimum levels in Table 2 are met.
10.2.4 The absolute retention time of
10.4 Isomer Specificity.
10.4.1 Analyze the isomer specificity test standards (Section 7.15) using the procedure in Section 14 and the optimized conditions for sample analysis (Section 10.1.1).
10.4.2 Compute the percent valley between the GC peaks that elute most closely to the 2,3,7,8-TCDD and TCDF isomers, on their respective columns, per Figures 6 and 7.
10.4.3 Verify that the height of the valley between the most closely eluted isomers and the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers is less than 25% (computed as 100 x/y in Figures 6 and 7). If the valley exceeds 25%, adjust the analytical conditions and repeat the test or replace the GC column and recalibrate (Sections 10.1.2 through 10.7).
10.5 Calibration by Isotope Dilution—Isotope dilution calibration is used for the 15 2,3,7,8-substituted CDDs/CDFs for which labeled compounds are added to samples prior to extraction. The reference compound for each CDD/CDF compound is shown in Table 2.
10.5.1 A calibration curve encompassing the concentration range is prepared for each compound to be determined. The relative response (RR) (labeled to native) vs. concentration in standard solutions is plotted or computed using a linear regression. Relative response is determined according to the procedures described below. Five calibration points are employed.
10.5.2 The response of each CDD/CDF relative to its labeled analog is determined using the area responses of both the primary and secondary exact m/z's specified in Table 8, for each calibration standard, as follows:
10.5.3 To calibrate the analytical system by isotope dilution, inject a volume of calibration standards CS1 through CS5 (Section 7.13 and Table 4) identical to the volume chosen in Section 10.2, using the procedure in Section 14 and the conditions in Section
10.5.4 Linearity—If the relative response for any compound is constant (less than 20% coefficient of variation) over the five-point calibration range, an averaged relative response may be used for that compound; otherwise, the complete calibration curve for that compound shall be used over the five-point calibration range.
10.6 Calibration by Internal Standard—The internal standard method is applied to determination of 1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD (Section 17.1.2), OCDF (Section 17.1.1), the non 2,3,7,8-substituted compounds, and to the determination of labeled compounds for intralaboratory statistics (Sections 9.4 and 15.5.4).
10.6.1 Response factors—Calibration requires the determination of response factors (RF) defined by the following equation:
There is only one m/z for
10.6.2 To calibrate the analytical system by internal standard, inject 1.0 µL or 2.0 µL of calibration standards CS1 through CS5 (Section 7.13 and Table 4) using the procedure in Section 14 and the conditions in Section 10.1.1 and Table 2. Compute the response factor (RF) at each concentration.
10.6.3 Linearity—If the response factor (RF) for any compound is constant (less than 35% coefficient of variation) over the five-point calibration range, an averaged response factor may be used for that compound; otherwise, the complete calibration curve for that compound shall be used over the five-point range.
10.7 Combined Calibration—By using calibration solutions (Section 7.13 and Table 4) containing the CDDs/CDFs and labeled compounds and the internal standards, a single set of analyses can be used to produce calibration curves for the isotope dilution and internal standard methods. These curves are verified each shift (Section 15.3) by analyzing the calibration verification standard (VER, Table 4). Recalibration is required if any of the calibration verification criteria (Section 15.3) cannot be met.
10.8 Data Storage—MS data shall be collected, recorded, and stored.
10.8.1 Data acquisition—The signal at each exact m/z shall be collected repetitively throughout the monitoring period and stored on a mass storage device.
10.8.2 Response factors and multipoint calibrations—The data system shall be used to record and maintain lists of response factors (response ratios for isotope dilution) and multipoint calibration curves. Computations of relative standard deviation (coefficient of variation) shall be used to test calibration linearity. Statistics on initial performance (Section 9.2) and ongoing performance (Section 15.5) should be computed and maintained, either on the instrument data system, or on a separate computer system.
11.1 Sample preparation involves modifying the physical form of the sample so that the CDDs/CDFs can be extracted efficiently. In general, the samples must be in a liquid form or in the form of finely divided solids in order for efficient extraction to take place. Table 10 lists the phases and suggested quantities for extraction of various sample matrices.
For samples known or expected to contain high levels of the CDDs/CDFs, the smallest sample size representative of the entire sample should be used (see Section 17.5).
For all samples, the blank and IPR/OPR aliquots must be processed through the same steps as the sample to check for contamination and losses in the preparation processes.
11.1.1 For samples that contain particles, percent solids and particle size are determined using the procedures in Sections 11.2 and 11.3, respectively.
11.1.2 Aqueous samples—Because CDDs/CDFs may be bound to suspended particles, the preparation of aqueous samples is dependent on the solids content of the sample.
11.1.2.1 Aqueous samples visibly absent particles are prepared per Section 11.4 and extracted directly using the separatory funnel or SPE techniques in Sections 12.1 or 12.2, respectively.
11.1.2.2 Aqueous samples containing visible particles and containing one percent suspended solids or less are prepared using the procedure in Section 11.4. After preparation, the sample is extracted directly using the SPE technique in 12.2 or filtered per Section 11.4.3. After filtration, the particles and filter are extracted using the SDS procedure in Section 12.3 and the filtrate is extracted using the separatory funnel procedure in Section 12.1.
11.1.2.3 For aqueous samples containing greater than one percent solids, a sample aliquot sufficient to provide 10 g of dry solids is used, as described in Section 11.5.
11.1.3 Solid samples are prepared using the procedure described in Section 11.5 followed by extraction via the SDS procedure in Section 12.3.
11.1.4 Multiphase samples—The phase(s) containing the CDDs/CDFs is separated from the non-CDD/CDF phase using pressure filtration and centrifugation, as described in Section 11.6. The CDDs/CDFs will be in the organic phase in a multiphase sample in which an organic phase exists.
11.1.5 Procedures for grinding, homogenization, and blending of various sample phases are given in Section 11.7.
11.1.6 Tissue samples—Preparation procedures for fish and other tissues are given in Section 11.8.
11.2 Determination of Percent Suspended Solids.
This aliquot is used for determining the solids content of the sample, not for determination of CDDs/CDFs.
11.2.1 Aqueous liquids and multi-phase samples consisting of mainly an aqueous phase.
11.2.1.1 Dessicate and weigh a GF/D filter (Section 6.5.3) to three significant figures.
11.2.1.2 Filter 10.0 ±0.02 mL of well-mixed sample through the filter.
11.2.1.3 Dry the filter a minimum of 12 hours at 110 ±5 °C and cool in a dessicator.
11.2.1.4 Calculate percent solids as follows:
11.2.2 Non-aqueous liquids, solids, semi-solid samples, and multi-phase samples in which the main phase is not aqueous; but not tissues.
11.2.2.1 Weigh 5-10 g of sample to three significant figures in a tared beaker.
11.2.2.2 Dry a minimum of 12 hours at 110 ±5 °C, and cool in a dessicator.
11.2.2.3 Calculate percent solids as follows:
11.3 Determination of Particle Size.
11.3.1 Spread the dried sample from Section 11.2.2.2 on a piece of filter paper or aluminum foil in a fume hood or glove box.
11.3.2 Estimate the size of the particles in the sample. If the size of the largest particles is greater than 1 mm, the particle size must be reduced to 1 mm or less prior to extraction using the procedures in Section 11.7.
11.4 Preparation of Aqueous Samples Containing 1% Suspended Solids or Less.
11.4.1 Aqueous samples visibly absent particles are prepared per the procedure below and extracted directly using the separatory funnel or SPE techniques in Sections 12.1 or 12.2, respectively. Aqueous samples containing visible particles and one percent suspended solids or less are prepared using the procedure below and extracted using either the SPE technique in Section 12.2 or further prepared using the filtration procedure in Section 11.4.3. The filtration procedure is followed by SDS extraction of the filter and particles (Section 12.3) and separatory funnel extraction of the filtrate (Section 12.1). The SPE procedure is followed by SDS extraction of the filter and disk.
11.4.2 Preparation of sample and QC aliquots.
11.4.2.1 Mark the original level of the sample on the sample bottle for reference. Weigh the sample plus bottle to ±1.
11.4.2.2 Spike 1.0 mL of the diluted labeled-compound spiking solution (Section 7.10.3) into the sample bottle. Cap the bottle and mix the sample by careful shaking. Allow the sample to equilibrate for one to two hours, with occasional shaking.
11.4.2.3 For each sample or sample batch (to a maximum of 20 samples) to be extracted during the same 12-hour shift, place two 1.0 L aliquots of reagent water in clean sample bottles or flasks.
11.4.2.4 Spike 1.0 mL of the diluted labeled-compound spiking solution (Section 7.10.3) into both reagent water aliquots. One of these aliquots will serve as the method blank.
11.4.2.5 Spike 1.0 mL of the PAR standard (Section 7.14) into the remaining reagent water aliquot. This aliquot will serve as the OPR (Section 15.5).
11.4.2.6 If SPE is to be used, add 5 mL of methanol to the sample, cap and shake the
11.4.3 Filtration of particles.
11.4.3.1 Assemble a Buchner funnel (Section 6.5.5) on top of a clean filtration flask. Apply vacuum to the flask, and pour the entire contents of the sample bottle through a glass-fiber filter (Section 6.5.6) in the Buchner funnel, swirling the sample remaining in the bottle to suspend any particles.
11.4.3.2 Rinse the sample bottle twice with approximately 5 mL portions of reagent water to transfer any remaining particles onto the filter.
11.4.3.3 Rinse any particles off the sides of the Buchner funnel with small quantities of reagent water.
11.4.3.4 Weigh the empty sample bottle to ±1 g. Determine the weight of the sample by difference. Save the bottle for further use.
11.4.3.5 Extract the filtrate using the separatory funnel procedure in Section 12.1.
11.4.3.6 Extract the filter containing the particles using the SDS procedure in Section 12.3.
11.5 Preparation of Samples Containing Greater Than 1% Solids.
11.5.1 Weigh a well-mixed aliquot of each sample (of the same matrix type) sufficient to provide 10 g of dry solids (based on the solids determination in Section 11.2) into a clean beaker or glass jar.
11.5.2 Spike 1.0 mL of the diluted labeled compound spiking solution (Section 7.10.3) into the sample.
11.5.3 For each sample or sample batch (to a maximum of 20 samples) to be extracted during the same 12-hour shift, weigh two 10 g aliquots of the appropriate reference matrix (Section 7.6) into clean beakers or glass jars.
11.5.4 Spike 1.0 mL of the diluted labeled compound spiking solution (Section 7.10.3) into each reference matrix aliquot. One aliquot will serve as the method blank. Spike 1.0 mL of the PAR standard (Section 7.14) into the other reference matrix aliquot. This aliquot will serve as the OPR (Section 15.5).
11.5.5 Stir or tumble and equilibrate the aliquots for one to two hours.
11.5.6 Decant excess water. If necessary to remove water, filter the sample through a glass-fiber filter and discard the aqueous liquid.
11.5.7 If particles >1mm are present in the sample (as determined in Section 11.3.2), spread the sample on clean aluminum foil in a hood. After the sample is dry, grind to reduce the particle size (Section 11.7).
11.5.8 Extract the sample and QC aliquots using the SDS procedure in Section 12.3.
11.6 Multiphase Samples.
11.6.1 Using the percent solids determined in Section 11.2.1 or 11.2.2, determine the volume of sample that will provide 10 g of solids, up to 1 L of sample.
11.6.2 Pressure filter the amount of sample determined in Section 11.6.1 through Whatman GF/D glass-fiber filter paper (Section 6.5.3). Pressure filter the blank and OPR aliquots through GF/D papers also. If necessary to separate the phases and/or settle the solids, centrifuge these aliquots prior to filtration.
11.6.3 Discard any aqueous phase (if present). Remove any non-aqueous liquid present and reserve the maximum amount filtered from the sample (Section 11.6.1) or 10 g, whichever is less, for combination with the solid phase (Section 12.3.5).
11.6.4 If particles >1mm are present in the sample (as determined in Section 11.3.2) and the sample is capable of being dried, spread the sample and QC aliquots on clean aluminum foil in a hood. After the aliquots are dry or if the sample cannot be dried, reduce the particle size using the procedures in Section 11.7 and extract the reduced particles using the SDS procedure in Section 12.3. If particles >1mm are not present, extract the particles and filter in the sample and QC aliquots directly using the SDS procedure in Section 12.3.
11.7 Sample grinding, homogenization, or blending—Samples with particle sizes greater than 1 mm (as determined in Section 11.3.2) are subjected to grinding, homogenization, or blending. The method of reducing particle size to less than 1 mm is matrix-dependent. In general, hard particles can be reduced by grinding with a mortar and pestle. Softer particles can be reduced by grinding in a Wiley mill or meat grinder, by homogenization, or in a blender.
11.7.1 Each size-reducing preparation procedure on each matrix shall be verified by running the tests in Section 9.2 before the procedure is employed routinely.
11.7.2 The grinding, homogenization, or blending procedures shall be carried out in a glove box or fume hood to prevent particles from contaminating the work environment.
11.7.3 Grinding—Certain papers and pulps, slurries, and amorphous solids can be ground in a Wiley mill or heavy duty meat grinder. In some cases, reducing the temperature of the sample to freezing or to dry ice or liquid nitrogen temperatures can aid in the grinding process. Grind the sample aliquots from Section 11.5.7 or 11.6.4 in a clean grinder. Do not allow the sample temperature to exceed 50 °C. Grind the blank and reference matrix aliquots using a clean grinder.
11.7.4 Homogenization or blending—Particles that are not ground effectively, or particles greater than 1 mm in size after grinding, can often be reduced in size by high speed homogenization or blending. Homogenize and/or blend the particles or filter from
11.7.5 Extract the aliquots using the SDS procedure in Section 12.3.
11.8 Fish and Other Tissues—Prior to processing tissue samples, the laboratory must determine the exact tissue to be analyzed. Common requests for analysis of fish tissue include whole fish—skin on, whole fish—skin removed, edible fish fillets (filleted in the field or by the laboratory), specific organs, and other portions. Once the appropriate tissue has been determined, the sample must be homogenized.
11.8.1 Homogenization.
11.8.1.1 Samples are homogenized while still frozen, where practical. If the laboratory must dissect the whole fish to obtain the appropriate tissue for analysis, the unused tissues may be rapidly refrozen and stored in a clean glass jar for subsequent use.
11.8.1.2 Each analysis requires 10 g of tissue (wet weight). Therefore, the laboratory should homogenize at least 20 g of tissue to allow for re-extraction of a second aliquot of the same homogenized sample, if re-analysis is required. When whole fish analysis is necessary, the entire fish is homogenized.
11.8.1.3 Homogenize the sample in a tissue homogenizer (Section 6.3.3) or grind in a meat grinder (Section 6.3.4). Cut tissue too large to feed into the grinder into smaller pieces. To assure homogeneity, grind three times.
11.8.1.4 Transfer approximately 10 g (wet weight) of homogenized tissue to a clean, tared, 400-500 mL beaker. For the alternate HCl digestion/extraction, transfer the tissue to a clean, tared 500-600 mL wide-mouth bottle. Record the weight to the nearest 10 mg.
11.8.1.5 Transfer the remaining homogenized tissue to a clean jar with a fluoropolymer-lined lid. Seal the jar and store the tissue at <−10 °C. Return any tissue that was not homogenized to its original container and store at <−10 °C.
11.8.2 QC aliquots.
11.8.2.1 Prepare a method blank by adding approximately 10 g of the oily liquid reference matrix (Section 7.6.4) to a 400-500 mL beaker. For the alternate HCl digestion/extraction, add the reference matrix to a 500-600 mL wide-mouth bottle. Record the weight to the nearest 10 mg.
11.8.2.2 Prepare a precision and recovery aliquot by adding approximately 10 g of the oily liquid reference matrix (Section 7.6.4) to a separate 400-500 mL beaker or wide-mouth bottle, depending on the extraction procedure to be used. Record the weight to the nearest 10 mg. If the initial precision and recovery test is to be performed, use four aliquots; if the ongoing precision and recovery test is to be performed, use a single aliquot.
11.8.3 Spiking
11.8.3.1 Spike 1.0 mL of the labeled compound spiking solution (Section 7.10.3) into the sample, blank, and OPR aliquot.
11.8.3.2 Spike 1.0 mL of the PAR standard (Section 7.14) into the OPR aliquot.
11.8.4 Extract the aliquots using the procedures in Section 12.4.
Extraction procedures include separatory funnel (Section 12.1) and solid phase (Section 12.2) for aqueous liquids; Soxhlet/Dean-Stark (Section 12.3) for solids, filters, and SPE disks; and Soxhlet extraction (Section 12.4.1) and HCl digestion (Section 12.4.2) for tissues. Acid/base back-extraction (Section 12.5) is used for initial cleanup of extracts.
Macro-concentration procedures include rotary evaporation (Section 12.6.1), heating mantle (Section 12.6.2), and Kuderna-Danish (K-D) evaporation (Section 12.6.3). Micro-concentration uses nitrogen blowdown (Section 12.7).
12.1 Separatory funnel extraction of filtrates and of aqueous samples visibly absent particles.
12.1.1 Pour the spiked sample (Section 11.4.2.2) or filtrate (Section 11.4.3.5) into a 2 L separatory funnel. Rinse the bottle or flask twice with 5 mL of reagent water and add these rinses to the separatory funnel.
12.1.2 Add 60 mL methylene chloride to the empty sample bottle (Section 12.1.1), seal, and shake 60 seconds to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel, and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for two minutes with periodic venting. Allow the organic layer to separate from the aqueous phase for a minimum of 10 minutes. If an emulsion forms and is more than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation (see note below). Drain the methylene chloride extract through a solvent-rinsed glass funnel approximately one-half full of granular anhydrous sodium sulfate (Section 7.2.1) supported on clean glass-fiber paper into a solvent-rinsed concentration device (Section 12.6).
If an emulsion forms, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include stirring, filtration through glass wool, use of phase separation paper, centrifugation, use of an ultrasonic bath with ice, addition of NaCl, or other physical methods. Alternatively, solid-phase or other extraction techniques may be used to prevent emulsion formation. Any alternative technique is acceptable so long as the requirements in Section 9 are met.
Experience with aqueous samples high in dissolved organic materials (e.g., paper mill effluents) has shown that acidification of the
12.1.3 Extract the water sample two more times with 60 mL portions of methylene chloride. Drain each portion through the sodium sulfate into the concentrator. After the third extraction, rinse the separatory funnel with at least 20 mL of methylene chloride, and drain this rinse through the sodium sulfate into the concentrator. Repeat this rinse at least twice. Set aside the funnel with sodium sulfate if the extract is to be combined with the extract from the particles.
12.1.4 Concentrate the extract using one of the macro-concentration procedures in Section 12.6.
12.1.4.1 If the extract is from a sample visibly absent particles (Section 11.1.2.1), adjust the final volume of the concentrated extract to approximately 10 mL with hexane, transfer to a 250 mL separatory funnel, and back-extract using the procedure in Section 12.5.
12.1.4.2 If the extract is from the aqueous filtrate (Section 11.4.3.5), set aside the concentration apparatus for addition of the SDS extract from the particles (Section 12.3.9.1.2).
12.2 SPE of Samples Containing Less Than 1% Solids (References 19-20).
12.2.1 Disk preparation.
12.2.1.1 Place an SPE disk on the base of the filter holder (Figure 4) and wet with toluene. While holding a GMF 150 filter above the SPE disk with tweezers, wet the filter with toluene and lay the filter on the SPE disk, making sure that air is not trapped between the filter and disk. Clamp the filter and SPE disk between the 1 L glass reservoir and the vacuum filtration flask.
12.2.1.2 Rinse the sides of the filtration flask with approx 15 mL of toluene using a squeeze bottle or syringe. Apply vacuum momentarily until a few drops appear at the drip tip. Release the vacuum and allow the filter/disk to soak for approx one minute. Apply vacuum and draw all of the toluene through the filter/disk. Repeat the wash step with approx 15 mL of acetone and allow the filter/disk to air dry.
12.2.1.3 Re-wet the filter/disk with approximately 15 mL of methanol, allowing the filter/disk to soak for approximately one minute. Pull the methanol through the filter/disk using the vacuum, but retain a layer of methanol approximately 1 mm thick on the filter. Do not allow the disk to go dry from this point until the end of the extraction.
12.2.1.4 Rinse the filter/disk with two 50-mL portions of reagent water by adding the water to the reservoir and pulling most through, leaving a layer of water on the surface of the filter.
12.2.2 Extraction.
12.2.2.1 Pour the spiked sample (Section 11.4.2.2), blank (Section 11.4.2.4), or IPR/OPR aliquot (Section 11.4.2.5) into the reservoir and turn on the vacuum to begin the extraction. Adjust the vacuum to complete the extraction in no less than 10 minutes. For samples containing a high concentration of particles (suspended solids), filtration times may be eight hours or longer.
12.2.2.2 Before all of the sample has been pulled through the filter/disk, rinse the sample bottle with approximately 50 mL of reagent water to remove any solids, and pour into the reservoir. Pull through the filter/disk. Use additional reagent water rinses until all visible solids are removed.
12.2.2.3 Before all of the sample and rinses have been pulled through the filter/disk, rinse the sides of the reservoir with small portions of reagent water.
12.2.2.4 Allow the filter/disk to dry, then remove the filter and disk and place in a glass Petri dish. Extract the filter and disk per Section 12.3.
12.3 SDS Extraction of Samples Containing Particles, and of Filters and/or Disks.
12.3.1 Charge a clean extraction thimble (Section 6.4.2.2) with 5.0 g of 100/200 mesh silica (Section 7.5.1.1) topped with 100 g of quartz sand (Section 7.3.2).
Do not disturb the silica layer throughout the extraction process.
12.3.2 Place the thimble in a clean extractor. Place 30-40 mL of toluene in the receiver and 200-250 mL of toluene in the flask.
12.3.3 Pre-extract the glassware by heating the flask until the toluene is boiling. When properly adjusted, one to two drops of toluene will fall per second from the condenser tip into the receiver. Extract the apparatus for a minimum of three hours.
12.3.4 After pre-extraction, cool and disassemble the apparatus. Rinse the thimble with toluene and allow to air dry.
12.3.5 Load the wet sample, filter, and/or disk from Section 11.4.3.6, 11.5.8, 11.6.4, 11.7.3, 11.7.4, or 12.2.2.4 and any nonaqueous liquid from Section 11.6.3 into the thimble and manually mix into the sand layer with a clean metal spatula, carefully breaking up any large lumps of sample.
12.3.6 Reassemble the pre-extracted SDS apparatus, and add a fresh charge of toluene to the receiver and reflux flask. Apply power
12.3.7 Drain the water from the receiver at one to two hours and eight to nine hours, or sooner if the receiver fills with water. Reflux the sample for a total of 16-24 hours. Cool and disassemble the apparatus. Record the total volume of water collected.
12.3.8 Remove the distilling flask. Drain the water from the Dean-Stark receiver and add any toluene in the receiver to the extract in the flask.
12.3.9 Concentrate the extract using one of the macro-concentration procedures in Section 12.6 per the following:
12.3.9.1 Extracts from the particles in an aqueous sample containing less than 1% solids (Section 11.4.3.6).
12.3.9.1.1 Concentrate the extract to approximately 5 mL using the rotary evaporator or heating mantle procedures in Section 12.6.1 or 12.6.2.
12.3.9.1.2 Quantitatively transfer the extract through the sodium sulfate (Section 12.1.3) into the apparatus that was set aside (Section 12.1.4.2) and reconcentrate to the level of the toluene.
12.3.9.1.3 Adjust to approximately 10 mL with hexane, transfer to a 250 mL separatory funnel, and proceed with back-extraction (Section 12.5).
12.3.9.2 Extracts from particles (Sections 11.5 through 11.6) or from the SPE filter and disk (Section 12.2.2.4)—Concentrate to approximately 10 mL using the rotary evaporator or heating mantle (Section 12.6.1 or 12.6.2), transfer to a 250 mL separatory funnel, and proceed with back-extraction (Section 12.5).
12.4 Extraction of Tissue—Two procedures are provided for tissue extraction.
12.4.1 Soxhlet extraction (Reference 21).
12.4.1.1 Add 30-40 g of powdered anhydrous sodium sulfate to each of the beakers (Section 11.8.4) and mix thoroughly. Cover the beakers with aluminum foil and allow to equilibrate for 12-24 hours. Remix prior to extraction to prevent clumping.
12.4.1.2 Assemble and pre-extract the Soxhlet apparatus per Sections 12.3.1 through 12.3.4, except use the methylene chloride:hexane (1:1) mixture for the pre-extraction and rinsing and omit the quartz sand. The Dean-Stark moisture trap may also be omitted, if desired.
12.4.1.3 Reassemble the pre-extracted Soxhlet apparatus and add a fresh charge of methylene chloride:hexane to the reflux flask.
12.4.1.4 Transfer the sample/sodium sulfate mixture (Section 12.4.1.1) to the Soxhlet thimble, and install the thimble in the Soxhlet apparatus.
12.4.1.5 Rinse the beaker with several portions of solvent mixture and add to the thimble. Fill the thimble/receiver with solvent. Extract for 18-24 hours.
12.4.1.6 After extraction, cool and disassemble the apparatus.
12.4.1.7 Quantitatively transfer the extract to a macro-concentration device (Section 12.6), and concentrate to near dryness. Set aside the concentration apparatus for re-use.
12.4.1.8 Complete the removal of the solvent using the nitrogen blowdown procedure (Section 12.7) and a water bath temperature of 60 °C. Weigh the receiver, record the weight, and return the receiver to the blowdown apparatus, concentrating the residue until a constant weight is obtained.
12.4.1.9 Percent lipid determination—The lipid content is determined by extraction of tissue with the same solvent system (methylene chloride:hexane) that was used in EPA's National Dioxin Study (Reference 22) so that lipid contents are consistent with that study.
12.4.1.9.1 Redissolve the residue in the receiver in hexane and spike 1.0 mL of the cleanup standard (Section 7.11) into the solution.
12.4.1.9.2 Transfer the residue/hexane to the anthropogenic isolation column (Section 13.7.1) or bottle for the acidified silica gel batch cleanup (Section 13.7.2), retaining the boiling chips in the concentration apparatus. Use several rinses to assure that all material is transferred. If necessary, sonicate or heat the receiver slightly to assure that all material is re-dissolved. Allow the receiver to dry. Weigh the receiver and boiling chips.
12.4.1.9.3 Calculate the lipid content to the nearest three significant figures as follows:
12.4.1.9.4 It is not necessary to determine the lipid content of the blank, IPR, or OPR aliquots.
12.4.2 HCl digestion/extraction and concentration (References 23-26).
12.4.2.1 Add 200 mL of 6 N HCl and 200 mL of methylene chloride:hexane (1:1) to the sample and QC aliquots (Section 11.8.4).
12.4.2.2 Cap and shake each bottle one to three times. Loosen the cap in a hood to vent excess pressure. Shake each bottle for 10-30 seconds and vent.
12.4.2.3 Tightly cap and place on shaker. Adjust the shaker action and speed so that the acid, solvent, and tissue are in constant motion. However, take care to avoid such violent action that the bottle may be dislodged from the shaker. Shake for 12-24 hours.
12.4.2.4 After digestion, remove the bottles from the shaker. Allow the bottles to stand so that the solvent and acid layers separate.
12.4.2.5 Decant the solvent through a glass funnel with glass-fiber filter (Sections 6.5.2 through 6.5.3) containing approximately 10 g of granular anhydrous sodium sulfate (Section 7.2.1) into a macro-concentration apparatus (Section 12.6). Rinse the contents of the bottle with two 25 mL portions of hexane and pour through the sodium sulfate into the apparatus.
12.4.2.6 Concentrate the solvent to near dryness using a macro-concentration procedure (Section 12.6).
12.4.2.7 Complete the removal of the solvent using the nitrogen blowdown apparatus (Section 12.7) and a water bath temperature of 60 °C. Weigh the receiver, record the weight, and return the receiver to the blowdown apparatus, concentrating the residue until a constant weight is obtained.
12.4.2.8 Percent lipid determination—The lipid content is determined in the same solvent system [methylene chloride:hexane (1:1)] that was used in EPA's National Dioxin Study (Reference 22) so that lipid contents are consistent with that study.
12.4.2.8.1 Redissolve the residue in the receiver in hexane and spike 1.0 mL of the cleanup standard (Section 7.11) into the solution.
12.4.2.8.2 Transfer the residue/hexane to the narrow-mouth 100-200 mL bottle retaining the boiling chips in the receiver. Use several rinses to assure that all material is transferred, to a maximum hexane volume of approximately 70 mL. Allow the receiver to dry. Weigh the receiver and boiling chips.
12.4.2.8.3 Calculate the percent lipid per Section 12.4.1.9.3. It is not necessary to determine the lipid content of the blank, IPR, or OPR aliquots.
12.4.2.9 Clean up the extract per Section 13.7.3.
12.5 Back-Extraction with Base and Acid.
12.5.1 Spike 1.0 mL of the cleanup standard (Section 7.11) into the separatory funnels containing the sample and QC extracts from Section 12.1.4.1, 12.3.9.1.3, or 12.3.9.2.
12.5.2 Partition the extract against 50 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (Section 7.1.1). Shake for two minutes with periodic venting into a hood. Remove and discard the aqueous layer. Repeat the base washing until no color is visible in the aqueous layer, to a maximum of four washings. Minimize contact time between the extract and the base to prevent degradation of the CDDs/CDFs. Stronger potassium hydroxide solutions may be employed for back-extraction, provided that the laboratory meets the specifications for labeled compound recovery and demonstrates acceptable performance using the procedure in Section 9.2.
12.5.3 Partition the extract against 50 mL of sodium chloride solution (Section 7.1.4) in the same way as with base. Discard the aqueous layer.
12.5.4 Partition the extract against 50 mL of sulfuric acid (Section 7.1.2) in the same way as with base. Repeat the acid washing until no color is visible in the aqueous layer, to a maximum of four washings.
12.5.5 Repeat the partitioning against sodium chloride solution and discard the aqueous layer.
12.5.6 Pour each extract through a drying column containing 7-10 cm of granular anhydrous sodium sulfate (Section 7.2.1). Rinse the separatory funnel with 30-50 mL of solvent, and pour through the drying column. Collect each extract in a round-bottom flask. Re-concentrate the sample and QC aliquots per Sections 12.6 through 12.7, and clean up the samples and QC aliquots per Section 13.
12.6 Macro-Concentration—Extracts in toluene are concentrated using a rotary evaporator or a heating mantle; extracts in methylene chloride or hexane are concentrated using a rotary evaporator, heating mantle, or Kuderna-Danish apparatus.
12.6.1 Rotary evaporation—Concentrate the extracts in separate round-bottom flasks.
12.6.1.1 Assemble the rotary evaporator according to manufacturer's instructions, and warm the water bath to 45 °C. On a daily basis, preclean the rotary evaporator by concentrating 100 mL of clean extraction solvent through the system. Archive both the concentrated solvent and the solvent in the catch flask for a contamination check if necessary. Between samples, three 2-3 mL aliquots of solvent should be rinsed down the feed tube into a waste beaker.
12.6.1.2 Attach the round-bottom flask containing the sample extract to the rotary evaporator. Slowly apply vacuum to the system, and begin rotating the sample flask.
12.6.1.3 Lower the flask into the water bath, and adjust the speed of rotation and the temperature as required to complete concentration in 15-20 minutes. At the proper rate of concentration, the flow of solvent into the receiving flask will be steady, but no bumping or visible boiling of the extract will occur.
If the rate of concentration is too fast, analyte loss may occur.
12.6.1.4 When the liquid in the concentration flask has reached an apparent volume of approximately 2 mL, remove the flask from the water bath and stop the rotation. Slowly and carefully admit air into the system. Be sure not to open the valve so quickly that the sample is blown out of the flask. Rinse the feed tube with approximately 2 mL of solvent.
12.6.1.5 Proceed to Section 12.6.4 for preparation for back-extraction or micro-concentration and solvent exchange.
12.6.2 Heating mantle—Concentrate the extracts in separate round-bottom flasks.
12.6.2.1 Add one or two clean boiling chips to the round-bottom flask, and attach a three-ball macro Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding approximately 1 mL of solvent through the top. Place the round-bottom flask in a heating mantle, and apply heat as required to complete the concentration in 15-20 minutes. At the proper rate of distillation, the balls of the column will actively chatter, but the chambers will not flood.
12.6.2.2 When the liquid has reached an apparent volume of approximately 10 mL, remove the round-bottom flask from the heating mantle and allow the solvent to drain and cool for at least 10 minutes. Remove the Snyder column and rinse the glass joint into the receiver with small portions of solvent.
12.6.2.3 Proceed to Section 12.6.4 for preparation for back-extraction or micro-concentration and solvent exchange.
12.6.3 Kuderna-Danish (K-D)—Concentrate the extracts in separate 500 mL K-D flasks equipped with 10 mL concentrator tubes. The K-D technique is used for solvents such as methylene chloride and hexane. Toluene is difficult to concentrate using the K-D technique unless a water bath fed by a steam generator is used.
12.6.3.1 Add one to two clean boiling chips to the receiver. Attach a three-ball macro Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding approximately 1 mL of solvent through the top. Place the K-D apparatus in a hot water bath so that the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with steam.
12.6.3.2 Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15-20 minutes. At the proper rate of distillation, the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood.
12.6.3.3 When the liquid has reached an apparent volume of 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus from the bath and allow the solvent to drain and cool for at least 10 minutes. Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1-2 mL of solvent. A 5 mL syringe is recommended for this operation.
12.6.3.4 Remove the three-ball Snyder column, add a fresh boiling chip, and attach a two-ball micro Snyder column to the concentrator tube. Prewet the column by adding approximately 0.5 mL of solvent through the top. Place the apparatus in the hot water bath.
12.6.3.5 Adjust the vertical position and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5-10 minutes. At the proper rate of distillation, the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood.
12.6.3.6 When the liquid reaches an apparent volume of 0.5 mL, remove the apparatus from the water bath and allow to drain and cool for at least 10 minutes.
12.6.3.7 Proceed to 12.6.4 for preparation for back-extraction or micro-concentration and solvent exchange.
12.6.4 Preparation for back-extraction or micro-concentration and solvent exchange.
12.6.4.1 For back-extraction (Section 12.5), transfer the extract to a 250 mL separatory funnel. Rinse the concentration vessel with small portions of hexane, adjust the hexane volume in the separatory funnel to 10-20 mL, and proceed to back-extraction (Section 12.5).
12.6.4.2 For determination of the weight of residue in the extract, or for clean-up procedures other than back-extraction, transfer the extract to a blowdown vial using two to three rinses of solvent. Proceed with micro-concentration and solvent exchange (Section 12.7).
12.7 Micro-Concentration and Solvent Exchange.
12.7.1 Extracts to be subjected to GPC or HPLC cleanup are exchanged into methylene chloride. Extracts to be cleaned up using silica gel, alumina, carbon, and/or Florisil are exchanged into hexane.
12.7.2 Transfer the vial containing the sample extract to a nitrogen blowdown device. Adjust the flow of nitrogen so that the surface of the solvent is just visibly disturbed.
A large vortex in the solvent may cause analyte loss.
12.7.3 Lower the vial into a 45 °C water bath and continue concentrating.
12.7.3.1 If the extract is to be concentrated to dryness for weight determination (Sections 12.4.1.8, 12.4.2.7, and 13.7.1.4), blow dry until a constant weight is obtained.
12.7.3.2 If the extract is to be concentrated for injection into the GC/MS or the solvent is to be exchanged for extract cleanup, proceed as follows:
12.7.4 When the volume of the liquid is approximately 100 L, add 2-3 mL of the desired solvent (methylene chloride for GPC and HPLC, or hexane for the other cleanups) and continue concentration to approximately 100 µL. Repeat the addition of solvent and concentrate once more.
12.7.5 If the extract is to be cleaned up by GPC, adjust the volume of the extract to 5.0 mL with methylene chloride. If the extract is to be cleaned up by HPLC, further concentrate the extract to 30 µL. Proceed with GPC or HPLC cleanup (Section 13.2 or 13.6, respectively).
12.7.6 If the extract is to be cleaned up by column chromatography (alumina, silica gel, Carbopak/Celite, or Florisil), bring the final
12.7.7 If the extract is to be concentrated for injection into the GC/MS (Section 14), quantitatively transfer the extract to a 0.3 mL conical vial for final concentration, rinsing the larger vial with hexane and adding the rinse to the conical vial. Reduce the volume to approximately 100 µL. Add 10 µL of nonane to the vial, and evaporate the solvent to the level of the nonane. Seal the vial and label with the sample number. Store in the dark at room temperature until ready for GC/MS analysis. If GC/MS analysis will not be performed on the same day, store the vial at <−10 °C.
13.1 Cleanup may not be necessary for relatively clean samples (e.g., treated effluents, groundwater, drinking water). If particular circumstances require the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use any or all of the procedures below or any other appropriate procedure. Before using a cleanup procedure, the analyst must demonstrate that the requirements of Section 9.2 can be met using the cleanup procedure. If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, the cleanup procedures may be optimized for isolation of these two compounds.
13.1.1 Gel permeation chromatography (Section 13.2) removes high molecular weight interferences that cause GC column performance to degrade. It should be used for all soil and sediment extracts and may be used for water extracts that are expected to contain high molecular weight organic compounds (e.g., polymeric materials, humic acids).
13.1.2 Acid, neutral, and basic silica gel (Section 13.3), alumina (Section 13.4), and Florisil (Section 13.8) are used to remove nonpolar and polar interferences. Alumina and Florisil are used to remove chlorodiphenyl ethers.
13.1.3 Carbopak/Celite (Section 13.5) is used to remove nonpolar interferences.
13.1.4 HPLC (Section 13.6) is used to provide specificity for the 2,3,7,8-substituted and other CDD and CDF isomers.
13.1.5 The anthropogenic isolation column (Section 13.7.1), acidified silica gel batch adsorption procedure (Section 13.7.2), and sulfuric acid and base back-extraction (Section 13.7.3) are used for removal of lipids from tissue samples.
13.2 Gel Permeation Chromatography (GPC).
13.2.1 Column packing.
13.2.1.1 Place 70-75 g of SX-3 Bio-beads (Section 6.7.1.1) in a 400-500 mL beaker.
13.2.1.2 Cover the beads with methylene chloride and allow to swell overnight (a minimum of 12 hours).
13.2.1.3 Transfer the swelled beads to the column (Section 6.7.1.1) and pump solvent through the column, from bottom to top, at 4.5-5.5 mL/minute prior to connecting the column to the detector.
13.2.1.4 After purging the column with solvent for one to two hours, adjust the column head pressure to 7-10 psig and purge for four to five hours to remove air. Maintain a head pressure of 7-10 psig. Connect the column to the detector (Section 6.7.1.4).
13.2.2 Column calibration.
13.2.2.1 Load 5 mL of the calibration solution (Section 7.4) into the sample loop.
13.2.2.2 Inject the calibration solution and record the signal from the detector. The elution pattern will be corn oil, bis(2-ethyl hexyl)phthalate, pentachlorophenol, perylene, and sulfur.
13.2.2.3 Set the “dump time” to allow >85% removal of the corn oil and >85% collection of the phthalate.
13.2.2.4 Set the “collect time” to the peak minimum between perylene and sulfur.
13.2.2.5 Verify the calibration with the calibration solution after every 20 extracts. Calibration is verified if the recovery of the pentachlorophenol is greater than 85%. If calibration is not verified, the system shall be recalibrated using the calibration solution, and the previous 20 samples shall be re-extracted and cleaned up using the calibrated GPC system.
13.2.3 Extract cleanup—GPC requires that the column not be overloaded. The column specified in this method is designed to handle a maximum of 0.5 g of high molecular weight material in a 5 mL extract. If the extract is known or expected to contain more than 0.5 g, the extract is split into aliquots for GPC, and the aliquots are combined after elution from the column. The residue content of the extract may be obtained gravimetrically by evaporating the solvent from a 50 µL aliquot.
13.2.3.1 Filter the extract or load through the filter holder (Section 6.7.1.3) to remove the particles. Load the 5.0 mL extract onto the column.
13.2.3.2 Elute the extract using the calibration data determined in Section 13.2.2. Collect the eluate in a clean 400-500 mL beaker.
13.2.3.3 Rinse the sample loading tube thoroughly with methylene chloride between extracts to prepare for the next sample.
13.2.3.4 If a particularly dirty extract is encountered, a 5.0 mL methylene chloride blank shall be run through the system to check for carry-over.
13.2.3.5 Concentrate the eluate per Sections 12.6 and 12.7 for further cleanup or injection into the GC/MS.
13.3 Silica Gel Cleanup.
13.3.1 Place a glass-wool plug in a 15 mm ID chromatography column (Section 6.7.4.2). Pack the column bottom to top with: 1 g silica gel (Section 7.5.1.1), 4 g basic silica gel (Section 7.5.1.3), 1 g silica gel, 8 g acid silica
13.3.2 Pre-elute the column with 50-100 mL of hexane. Close the stopcock when the hexane is within 1 mm of the sodium sulfate. Discard the eluate. Check the column for channeling. If channeling is present, discard the column and prepare another.
13.3.3 Apply the concentrated extract to the column. Open the stopcock until the extract is within 1 mm of the sodium sulfate.
13.3.4 Rinse the receiver twice with 1 mL portions of hexane, and apply separately to the column. Elute the CDDs/CDFs with 100 mL hexane, and collect the eluate.
13.3.5 Concentrate the eluate per Sections 12.6 and 12.7 for further cleanup or injection into the HPLC or GC/MS.
13.3.6 For extracts of samples known to contain large quantities of other organic compounds (such as paper mill effluents), it may be advisable to increase the capacity of the silica gel column. This may be accomplished by increasing the strengths of the acid and basic silica gels. The acid silica gel (Section 7.5.1.2) may be increased in strength to as much as 44% w/w (7.9 g sulfuric acid added to 10 g silica gel). The basic silica gel (Section 7.5.1.3) may be increased in strength to as much as 33% w/w (50 mL 1N NaOH added to 100 g silica gel), or the potassium silicate (Section 7.5.1.4) may be used.
The use of stronger acid silica gel (44% w/w) may lead to charring of organic compounds in some extracts. The charred material may retain some of the analytes and lead to lower recoveries of CDDs/CDFs. Increasing the strengths of the acid and basic silica gel may also require different volumes of hexane than those specified above to elute the analytes off the column. Therefore, the performance of the method after such modifications must be verified by the procedure in Section 9.2.
13.4 Alumina Cleanup.
13.4.1 Place a glass-wool plug in a 15 mm ID chromatography column (Section 6.7.4.2).
13.4.2 If using acid alumina, pack the column by adding 6 g acid alumina (Section 7.5.2.1). If using basic alumina, substitute 6 g basic alumina (Section 7.5.2.2). Tap the column to settle the adsorbents.
13.4.3 Pre-elute the column with 50-100 mL of hexane. Close the stopcock when the hexane is within 1 mm of the alumina.
13.4.4 Discard the eluate. Check the column for channeling. If channeling is present, discard the column and prepare another.
13.4.5 Apply the concentrated extract to the column. Open the stopcock until the extract is within 1 mm of the alumina.
13.4.6 Rinse the receiver twice with 1 mL portions of hexane and apply separately to the column. Elute the interfering compounds with 100 mL hexane and discard the eluate.
13.4.7 The choice of eluting solvents will depend on the choice of alumina (acid or basic) made in Section 13.4.2.
13.4.7.1 If using acid alumina, elute the CDDs/CDFs from the column with 20 mL methylene chloride:hexane (20:80 v/v). Collect the eluate.
13.4.7.2 If using basic alumina, elute the CDDs/CDFs from the column with 20 mL methylene chloride:hexane (50:50 v/v). Collect the eluate.
13.4.8 Concentrate the eluate per Sections 12.6 and 12.7 for further cleanup or injection into the HPLC or GC/MS.
13.5 Carbon Column.
13.5.1 Cut both ends from a 10 mL disposable serological pipet (Section 6.7.3.2) to produce a 10 cm column. Fire-polish both ends and flare both ends if desired. Insert a glass-wool plug at one end, and pack the column with 0.55 g of Carbopak/Celite (Section 7.5.3.3) to form an adsorbent bed approximately 2 cm long. Insert a glass-wool plug on top of the bed to hold the adsorbent in place.
13.5.2 Pre-elute the column with 5 mL of toluene followed by 2 mL of methylene chloride: methanol:toluene (15:4:1 v/v), 1 mL of methylene chloride:cyclohexane (1:1 v/v), and 5 mL of hexane. If the flow rate of eluate exceeds 0.5 mL/minute, discard the column.
13.5.3 When the solvent is within 1 mm of the column packing, apply the sample extract to the column. Rinse the sample container twice with 1 mL portions of hexane and apply separately to the column. Apply 2 mL of hexane to complete the transfer.
13.5.4 Elute the interfering compounds with two 3 mL portions of hexane, 2 mL of methylene chloride:cyclohexane (1:1 v/v), and 2 mL of methylene chloride:methanol:toluene (15:4:1 v/v). Discard the eluate.
13.5.5 Invert the column, and elute the CDDs/CDFs with 20 mL of toluene. If carbon particles are present in the eluate, filter through glass-fiber filter paper.
13.5.6 Concentrate the eluate per Sections 12.6 and 12.7 for further cleanup or injection into the HPLC or GC/MS.
13.6 HPLC (Reference 6).
13.6.1 Column calibration.
13.6.1.1 Prepare a calibration standard containing the 2,3,7,8-substituted isomers and/or other isomers of interest at a concentration of approximately 500 pg/µL in methylene chloride.
13.6.1.2 Inject 30 µL of the calibration solution into the HPLC and record the signal from the detector. Collect the eluant for reuse. The elution order will be the tetra- through octa-isomers.
13.6.1.3 Establish the collection time for the tetra-isomers and for the other isomers of interest. Following calibration, flush the injection system with copious quantities of
13.6.1.4 Verify the calibration with the calibration solution after every 20 extracts. Calibration is verified if the recovery of the CDDs/CDFs from the calibration standard (Section 13.6.1.1) is 75-125% compared to the calibration (Section 13.6.1.2). If calibration is not verified, the system shall be recalibrated using the calibration solution, and the previous 20 samples shall be re-extracted and cleaned up using the calibrated system.
13.6.2 Extract cleanup—HPLC requires that the column not be overloaded. The column specified in this method is designed to handle a maximum of 30 µL of extract. If the extract cannot be concentrated to less than 30 µL, it is split into fractions and the fractions are combined after elution from the column.
13.6.2.1 Rinse the sides of the vial twice with 30 µL of methylene chloride and reduce to 30 µL with the evaporation apparatus (Section 12.7).
13.6.2.2 Inject the 30 µL extract into the HPLC.
13.6.2.3 Elute the extract using the calibration data determined in Section 13.6.1. Collect the fraction(s) in a clean 20 mL concentrator tube containing 5 mL of hexane:acetone (1:1 v/v).
13.6.2.4 If an extract containing greater than 100 ng/mL of total CDD or CDF is encountered, a 30 µL methylene chloride blank shall be run through the system to check for carry-over.
13.6.2.5 Concentrate the eluate per Section 12.7 for injection into the GC/MS.
13.7 Cleanup of Tissue Lipids—Lipids are removed from the Soxhlet extract using either the anthropogenic isolation column (Section 13.7.1) or acidified silica gel (Section 13.7.2), or are removed from the HCl digested extract using sulfuric acid and base back-extraction (Section 13.7.3).
13.7.1 Anthropogenic isolation column (References 22 and 27)—Used for removal of lipids from the Soxhlet/SDS extraction (Section 12.4.1).
13.7.1.1 Prepare the column as given in Section 7.5.4.
13.7.1.2 Pre-elute the column with 100 mL of hexane. Drain the hexane layer to the top of the column, but do not expose the sodium sulfate.
13.7.1.3 Load the sample and rinses (Section 12.4.1.9.2) onto the column by draining each portion to the top of the bed. Elute the CDDs/CDFs from the column into the apparatus used for concentration (Section 12.4.1.7) using 200 mL of hexane.
13.7.1.4 Concentrate the cleaned up extract (Sections 12.6 through 12.7) to constant weight per Section 12.7.3.1. If more than 500 mg of material remains, repeat the cleanup using a fresh anthropogenic isolation column.
13.7.1.5 Redissolve the extract in a solvent suitable for the additional cleanups to be used (Sections 13.2 through 13.6 and 13.8).
13.7.1.6 Spike 1.0 mL of the cleanup standard (Section 7.11) into the residue/solvent.
13.7.1.7 Clean up the extract using the procedures in Sections 13.2 through 13.6 and 13.8. Alumina (Section 13.4) or Florisil (Section 13.8) and carbon (Section 13.5) are recommended as minimum additional cleanup steps.
13.7.1.8 Following cleanup, concentrate the extract to 10 µL as described in Section 12.7 and proceed with the analysis in Section 14.
13.7.2 Acidified silica gel (Reference 28)—Procedure alternate to the anthropogenic isolation column (Section 13.7.1) that is used for removal of lipids from the Soxhlet/SDS extraction (Section 12.4.1).
13.7.2.1 Adjust the volume of hexane in the bottle (Section 12.4.1.9.2) to approximately 200 mL.
13.7.2.2 Spike 1.0 mL of the cleanup standard (Section 7.11) into the residue/solvent.
13.7.2.3 Drop the stirring bar into the bottle, place the bottle on the stirring plate, and begin stirring.
13.7.2.4 Add 30-100 g of acid silica gel (Section 7.5.1.2) to the bottle while stirring, keeping the silica gel in motion. Stir for two to three hours.
30 grams of silica gel should be adequate for most samples and will minimize contamination from this source.
13.7.2.5 After stirring, pour the extract through approximately 10 g of granular anhydrous sodium sulfate (Section 7.2.1) contained in a funnel with glass-fiber filter into a macro contration device (Section 12.6). Rinse the bottle and sodium sulfate with hexane to complete the transfer.
13.7.2.6 Concentrate the extract per Sections 12.6 through 12.7 and clean up the extract using the procedures in Sections 13.2 through 13.6 and 13.8. Alumina (Section 13.4) or Florisil (Section 13.8) and carbon (Section 13.5) are recommended as minimum additional cleanup steps.
13.7.3 Sulfuric acid and base back-extraction. Used with HCl digested extracts (Section 12.4.2).
13.7.3.1 Spike 1.0 mL of the cleanup standard (Section 7.11) into the residue/solvent (Section 12.4.2.8.2).
13.7.3.2 Add 10 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid to the bottle. Immediately cap and shake one to three times. Loosen cap in a hood to vent excess pressure. Cap and shake the bottle so that the residue/solvent is exposed to the acid for a total time of approximately 45 seconds.
13.7.3.3 Decant the hexane into a 250 mL separatory funnel making sure that no acid
13.7.3.4 Back extract the solvent/residue with 50 mL of potassium hydroxide solution per Section 12.5.2, followed by two reagent water rinses.
13.7.3.5 Drain the extract through a filter funnel containing approximately 10 g of granular anhydrous sodium sulfate in a glass-fiber filter into a macro concentration device (Section 12.6).
13.7.3.6 Concentrate the cleaned up extract to a volume suitable for the additional cleanups given in Sections 13.2 through 13.6 and 13.8. Gel permeation chromatography (Section 13.2), alumina (Section 13.4) or Florisil (Section 13.8), and Carbopak/Celite (Section 13.5) are recommended as minimum additional cleanup steps.
13.7.3.7 Following cleanup, concentrate the extract to 10 L as described in Section 12.7 and proceed with analysis per Section 14.
13.8 Florisil Cleanup (Reference 29).
13.8.1 Pre-elute the activated Florisil column (Section 7.5.3) with 10 mL of methylene chloride followed by 10 mL of hexane:methylene chloride (98:2 v/v) and discard the solvents.
13.8.2 When the solvent is within 1 mm of the packing, apply the sample extract (in hexane) to the column. Rinse the sample container twice with 1 mL portions of hexane and apply to the column.
13.8.3 Elute the interfering compounds with 20 mL of hexane:methylene chloride (98:2) and discard the eluate.
13.8.4 Elute the CDDs/CDFs with 35 mL of methylene chloride and collect the eluate. Concentrate the eluate per Sections 12.6 through 12.7 for further cleanup or for injection into the HPLC or GC/MS.
14.1 Establish the operating conditions given in Section 10.1.
14.2 Add 10 uL of the appropriate internal standard solution (Section 7.12) to the sample extract immediately prior to injection to minimize the possibility of loss by evaporation, adsorption, or reaction. If an extract is to be reanalyzed and evaporation has occurred, do not add more instrument internal standard solution. Rather, bring the extract back to its previous volume (e.g., 19 L) with pure nonane only (18 L if 2 L injections are used).
14.3 Inject 1.0 µL or 2.0 µL of the concentrated extract containing the internal standard solution, using on-column or splitless injection. The volume injected must be identical to the volume used for calibration (Section 10). Start the GC column initial isothermal hold upon injection. Start MS data collection after the solvent peak elutes. Stop data collection after the OCDD and OCDF have eluted. If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, stop data collection after elution of these compounds. Return the column to the initial temperature for analysis of the next extract or standard.
15.1 At the beginning of each 12-hour shift during which analyses are performed, GC/MS system performance and calibration are verified for all CDDs/CDFs and labeled compounds. For these tests, analysis of the CS3 calibration verification (VER) standard (Section 7.13 and Table 4) and the isomer specificity test standards (Section 7.15 and Table 5) shall be used to verify all performance criteria. Adjustment and/or recalibration (Section 10) shall be performed until all performance criteria are met. Only after all performance criteria are met may samples, blanks, IPRs, and OPRs be analyzed.
15.2 MS Resolution—A static resolving power of at least 10,000 (10% valley definition) must be demonstrated at the appropriate m/z before any analysis is performed. Static resolving power checks must be performed at the beginning and at the end of each 12-hour shift according to procedures in Section 10.1.2. Corrective actions must be implemented whenever the resolving power does not meet the requirement.
15.3 Calibration Verification.
15.3.1 Inject the VER standard using the procedure in Section 14.
15.3.2 The m/z abundance ratios for all CDDs/CDFs shall be within the limits in Table 9; otherwise, the mass spectrometer shall be adjusted until the m/z abundance ratios fall within the limits specified, and the verification test shall be repeated. If the adjustment alters the resolution of the mass spectrometer, resolution shall be verified (Section 10.1.2) prior to repeat of the verification test.
15.3.3 The peaks representing each CDD/CDF and labeled compound in the VER standard must be present with S/N of at least 10; otherwise, the mass spectrometer shall be adjusted and the verification test repeated.
15.3.4 Compute the concentration of each CDD/CDF compound by isotope dilution (Section 10.5) for those compounds that have labeled analogs (Table 1). Compute the concentration of the labeled compounds by the internal standard method (Section 10.6). These concentrations are computed based on the calibration data in Section 10.
15.3.5 For each compound, compare the concentration with the calibration verification limit in Table 6. If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, compare the concentration to the limit in Table 6a. If all compounds meet the acceptance criteria, calibration has been verified and analysis of standards and sample extracts may proceed. If, however, any compound fails its respective limit, the measurement system is not performing properly for
15.4 Retention Times and GC Resolution.
15.4.1 Retention times.
15.4.1.1 Absolute—The absolute retention times of the
15.4.1.2 Relative—The relative retention times of CDDs/CDFs and labeled compounds in the verification test (Section 15.3) shall be within the limits given in Table 2.
15.4.2 GC resolution.
15.4.2.1 Inject the isomer specificity standards (Section 7.15) on their respective columns.
15.4.2.2 The valley height between 2,3,7,8-TCDD and the other tetra-dioxin isomers at m/z 319.8965, and between 2,3,7,8-TCDF and the other tetra-furan isomers at m/z 303.9016 shall not exceed 25% on their respective columns (Figures 6 and 7).
15.4.3 If the absolute retention time of any compound is not within the limits specified or if the 2,3,7,8-isomers are not resolved, the GC is not performing properly. In this event, adjust the GC and repeat the verification test (Section 15.3) or recalibrate (Section 10), or replace the GC column and either verify calibration or recalibrate.
15.5 Ongoing Precision and Recovery.
15.5.1 Analyze the extract of the ongoing precision and recovery (OPR) aliquot (Section 11.4.2.5, 11.5.4, 11.6.2, 11.7.4, or 11.8.3.2) prior to analysis of samples from the same batch.
15.5.2 Compute the concentration of each CDD/CDF by isotope dilution for those compounds that have labeled analogs (Section 10.5). Compute the concentration of 1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD, OCDF, and each labeled compound by the internal standard method (Section 10.6).
15.5.3 For each CDD/CDF and labeled compound, compare the concentration to the OPR limits given in Table 6. If only 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF are to be determined, compare the concentration to the limits in Table 6a. If all compounds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance is acceptable and analysis of blanks and samples may proceed. If, however, any individual concentration falls outside of the range given, the extraction/concentration processes are not being performed properly for that compound. In this event, correct the problem, re-prepare, extract, and clean up the sample batch and repeat the ongoing precision and recovery test (Section 15.5).
15.5.4 Add results that pass the specifications in Section 15.5.3 to initial and previous ongoing data for each compound in each matrix. Update QC charts to form a graphic representation of continued laboratory performance. Develop a statement of laboratory accuracy for each CDD/CDF in each matrix type by calculating the average percent recovery (R) and the standard deviation of percent recovery (S
15.6 Blank—Analyze the method blank extracted with each sample batch immediately following analysis of the OPR aliquot to demonstrate freedom from contamination and freedom from carryover from the OPR analysis. The results of the analysis of the blank must meet the specifications in Section 9.5.2 before sample analyses may proceed.
A CDD, CDF, or labeled compound is identified in a standard, blank, or sample when all of the criteria in Sections 16.1 through 16.4 are met.
16.1 The signals for the two exact m/z's in Table 8 must be present and must maximize within the same two seconds.
16.2 The signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) for the GC peak at each exact m/z must be greater than or equal to 2.5 for each CDD or CDF detected in a sample extract, and greater than or equal to 10 for all CDDs/CDFs in the calibration standard (Sections 10.2.3 and 15.3.3).
16.3 The ratio of the integrated areas of the two exact m/z's specified in Table 8 must be within the limit in Table 9, or within ±10% of the ratio in the midpoint (CS3) calibration or calibration verification (VER), whichever is most recent.
16.4 The relative retention time of the peak for a 2,3,7,8-substituted CDD or CDF must be within the limit in Table 2. The retention time of peaks representing non-2,3,7,8-substituted CDDs/CDFs must be within the retention time windows established in Section 10.3.
16.5 Confirmatory Analysis—Isomer specificity for 2,3,7,8-TCDF cannot be achieved on the DB-5 column. Therefore, any sample in which 2,3,7,8-TCDF is identified by analysis on a DB-5 column must have a confirmatory analysis performed on a DB-225, SP-2330, or equivalent GC column. The operating conditions in Section 10.1.1 may be adjusted to optimize the analysis on the second GC column, but the GC/MS must meet the mass resolution and calibration specifications in Section 10.
16.6 If the criteria for identification in Sections 16.1 through 16.5 are not met, the CDD or CDF has not been identified and the results may not be reported for regulatory compliance purposes. If interferences preclude identification, a new aliquot of sample
17.0 Quantitative Determination
17.1 Isotope Dilution Quantitation—By adding a known amount of a labeled compound to every sample prior to extraction, correction for recovery of the CDD/CDF can be made because the CDD/CDF and its labeled analog exhibit similar effects upon extraction, concentration, and gas chromatography. Relative response (RR) values are used in conjunction with the initial calibration data described in Section 10.5 to determine concentrations directly, so long as labeled compound spiking levels are constant, using the following equation:
17.1.1 Because of a potential interference, the labeled analog of OCDF is not added to the sample. Therefore, OCDF is quantitated against labeled OCDD. As a result, the concentration of OCDF is corrected for the recovery of the labeled OCDD. In instances where OCDD and OCDF behave differently during sample extraction, concentration, and cleanup procedures, this may decrease the accuracy of the OCDF results. However, given the low toxicity of this compound relative to the other dioxins and furans, the potential decrease in accuracy is not considered significant.
17.1.2 Because
17.1.3 Any peaks representing non-2,3,7,8-substituted CDDs/CDFs are quantitated using an average of the response factors from all of the labeled 2,3,7,8-isomers at the same level of chlorination.
17.2 Internal Standard Quantitation and Labeled Compound Recovery.
17.2.1 Compute the concentrations of 1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD, OCDF, the
There is only one m/z for the
17.2.2 Using the concentration in the extract determined above, compute the percent recovery of the
17.3 The concentration of a CDD/CDF in the solid phase of the sample is computed using the concentration of the compound in the extract and the weight of the solids (Section 11.5.1), as follows:
17.4 The concentration of a CDD/CDF in the aqueous phase of the sample is computed using the concentration of the compound in
17.5 If the SICP area at either quantitation m/z for any compound exceeds the calibration range of the system, a smaller sample aliquot is extracted.
17.5.1 For aqueous samples containing 1% solids or less, dilute 100 mL, 10 mL, etc., of sample to 1 L with reagent water and re-prepare, extract, clean up, and analyze per Sections 11 through 14.
17.5.2 For samples containing greater than 1% solids, extract an amount of sample equal to
17.5.3 If a smaller sample size will not be representative of the entire sample, dilute the sample extract by a factor of 10, adjust the concentration of the instrument internal standard to 100 pg/µL in the extract, and analyze an aliquot of this diluted extract by the internal standard method.
17.6 Results are reported to three significant figures for the CDDs/CDFs and labeled compounds found in all standards, blanks, and samples.
17.6.1 Reporting units and levels.
17.6.1.1 Aqueous samples—Report results in pg/L (parts-per-quadrillion).
17.6.1.2 Samples containing greater than 1% solids (soils, sediments, filter cake, compost)—Report results in ng/kg based on the dry weight of the sample. Report the percent solids so that the result may be corrected.
17.6.1.3 Tissues—Report results in ng/kg of wet tissue, not on the basis of the lipid content of the sample. Report the percent lipid content, so that the data user can calculate the concentration on a lipid basis if desired.
17.6.1.4 Reporting level.
17.6.1.4.1 Standards (VER, IPR, OPR) and samples—Report results at or above the minimum level (Table 2). Report results below the minimum level as not detected or as required by the regulatory authority.
17.6.1.4.2 Blanks—Report results above one-third the ML.
17.6.2 Results for CDDs/CDFs in samples that have been diluted are reported at the least dilute level at which the areas at the quantitation m/z's are within the calibration range (Section 17.5).
17.6.3 For CDDs/CDFs having a labeled analog, results are reported at the least dilute level at which the area at the quantitation m/z is within the calibration range (Section 17.5) and the labeled compound recovery is within the normal range for the method (Section 9.3 and Tables 6, 6a, 7, and 7a).
17.6.4 Additionally, if requested, the total concentration of all isomers in an individual level of chlorination (
18.1 Some samples may contain high levels (>10 ng/L; >1000 ng/kg) of the compounds of interest, interfering compounds, and/or polymeric materials. Some extracts will not concentrate to 10 µL (Section 12.7); others may overload the GC column and/or mass spectrometer.
18.2 Analyze a smaller aliquot of the sample (Section 17.5) when the extract will not concentrate to 10 µL after all cleanup procedures have been exhausted.
18.3 Chlorodiphenyl Ethers—If chromatographic peaks are detected at the retention time of any CDDs/CDFs in any of the m/z channels being monitored for the chlorodiphenyl ethers (Table 8), cleanup procedures must be employed until these interferences are removed. Alumina (Section 13.4) and Florisil (Section 13.8) are recommended for removal of chlorodiphenyl ethers.
18.4 Recovery of Labeled Compounds—In most samples, recoveries of the labeled compounds will be similar to those from reagent water or from the alternate matrix (Section 7.6).
18.4.1 If the recovery of any of the labeled compounds is outside of the normal range (Table 7), a diluted sample shall be analyzed (Section 17.5).
18.4.2 If the recovery of any of the labeled compounds in the diluted sample is outside of normal range, the calibration verification standard (Section 7.13) shall be analyzed and calibration verified (Section 15.3).
18.4.3 If the calibration cannot be verified, a new calibration must be performed and the original sample extract reanalyzed.
18.4.4 If the calibration is verified and the diluted sample does not meet the limits for labeled compound recovery, the method does not apply to the sample being analyzed and the result may not be reported for regulatory compliance purposes. In this case, alternate extraction and cleanup procedures in this method must be employed to resolve the interference. If all cleanup procedures in this method have been employed and labeled compound recovery remains outside of the normal range, extraction and/or cleanup procedures that are beyond this scope of this method will be required to analyze these samples.
19.1 The solvents used in this method pose little threat to the environment when managed properly. The solvent evaporation techniques used in this method are amenable to solvent recovery, and it is recommended that the laboratory recover solvents wherever feasible.
19.2 Standards should be prepared in volumes consistent with laboratory use to minimize disposal of standards.
20.1 It is the laboratory's responsibility to comply with all federal, state, and local regulations governing waste management, particularly the hazardous waste identification rules and land disposal restrictions, and to protect the air, water, and land by minimizing and controlling all releases from fume hoods and bench operations. Compliance is also required with any sewage discharge permits and regulations.
20.2 Samples containing HCl to pH <2 are hazardous and must be neutralized before being poured down a drain or must be handled as hazardous waste.
20.3 The CDDs/CDFs decompose above 800 °C. Low-level waste such as absorbent paper, tissues, animal remains, and plastic gloves may be burned in an appropriate incinerator. Gross quantities (milligrams) should be packaged securely and disposed of through commercial or governmental channels that are capable of handling extremely toxic wastes.
20.4 Liquid or soluble waste should be dissolved in methanol or ethanol and irradiated with ultraviolet light with a wavelength shorter than 290 nm for several days. Use F40 BL or equivalent lamps. Analyze liquid wastes, and dispose of the solutions when the CDDs/CDFs can no longer be detected.
20.5 For further information on waste management, consult “The Waste Management Manual for Laboratory Personnel” and “Less is Better—Laboratory Chemical Management for Waste Reduction,” available from the American Chemical Society's Department of Government Relations and Science Policy, 1155 16th Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036.
Method performance was validated and performance specifications were developed using data from EPA's international interlaboratory validation study (References 30-31) and the EPA/paper industry Long-Term Variability Study of discharges from the pulp and paper industry (58 FR 66078).
1. Tondeur, Yves. “Method 8290: Analytical Procedures and Quality Assurance for Multimedia Analysis of Polychlorinated Dibenzo-
2. “Measurement of 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorinated Dibenzo-
3. “NCASI Procedures for the Preparation and Isomer Specific Analysis of Pulp and Paper Industry Samples for 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF,” National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement Inc., 260 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10016, Technical Bulletin No. 551, Pre-Release Copy, July 1988.
4. “Analytical Procedures and Quality Assurance Plan for the Determination of PCDD/PCDF in Fish,” USEPA, Environmental Research Laboratory, 6201 Congdon Boulevard, Duluth, MN 55804, April 1988.
5. Tondeur, Yves. “Proposed GC/MS Methodology for the Analysis of PCDDs and PCDFs in Special Analytical Services Samples,” Triangle Laboratories, Inc., 801-10 Capitola Dr, Research Triangle Park, NC 27713, January 1988; updated by personal communication September 1988.
6. Lamparski, L.L. and Nestrick, T.J. “Determination of Tetra-, Hexa-, Hepta-, and Octachlorodibenzo-
7. Lamparski, L.L. and Nestrick, T.J. “Novel Extraction Device for the Determination of Chlorinated Dibenzo-
8. Patterson, D.G., et. al. “Control of Interferences in the Analysis of Human Adipose Tissue for 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-
9. Stanley, John S. and Sack, Thomas M. “Protocol for the Analysis of 2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-
10. “Working with Carcinogens,” Department of Health, Education, & Welfare, Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, NIOSH, Publication 77-206, August 1977, NTIS PB-277256.
11. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” OSHA 2206, 29 CFR 1910.
12. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” ACS Committee on Chemical Safety, 1979.
13. “Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater,” 18th edition and later revisions, American Public Health Association, 1015 15th St, N.W., Washington, DC 20005, 1-35: Section 1090 (Safety), 1992.
14. “Method 613—2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin,” 40 CFR 136 (49 FR 43234), October 26, 1984, Section 4.1.
15. Provost, L.P. and Elder, R.S. “Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,” American Laboratory, 15: 56-83, 1983.
16. “Standard Practice for Sampling Water,” ASTM Annual Book of Standards, ASTM, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187, 1980.
17. “Methods 330.4 and 330.5 for Total Residual Chlorine,” USEPA, EMSL, Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA 600/4-79-020, March 1979.
18. “Handbook of Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater Laboratories,” USEPA EMSL, Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-600/4-79-019, March 1979.
19. Williams, Rick. Letter to Bill Telliard, June 4, 1993, available from the EPA Sample Control Center operated by DynCorp Viar, Inc., 300 N Lee St, Alexandria, VA 22314, 703-519-1140.
20. Barkowski, Sarah. Fax to Sue Price, August 6, 1992, available from the EPA Sample Control Center operated by DynCorp Viar, Inc., 300 N Lee St, Alexandria VA 22314, 703-519-1140.
21. “Analysis of Multi-media, Multi-concentration Samples for Dioxins and Furans, PCDD/PCDF Analyses Data Package”, Narrative for Episode 4419, MRI Project No. 3091-A, op.cit. February 12, 1993, Available from the EPA Sample Control Center operated by DynCorp Viar Inc, 300 N Lee St, Alexandria, VA 22314 (703-519-1140).
22. “Analytical Procedures and Quality Assurance Plan for the Determination of PCDD/PCDF in Fish”, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research Laboratory, Duluth, MN 55804, EPA/600/3-90/022, March 1990.
23. Afghan, B.K., Carron, J., Goulden, P.D., Lawrence, J., Leger, D., Onuska, F., Sherry, J., and Wilkenson, R.J., “Recent Advances in Ultratrace Analysis of Dioxins and Related Halogenated Hydrocarbons”, Can J. Chem., 65: 1086-1097, 1987.
24. Sherry, J.P. and Tse, H. “A Procedure for the Determination of Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-dioxins in Fish”, Chemosphere, 20: 865-872, 1990.
25. “Preliminary Fish Tissue Study”, Results of Episode 4419, available from the EPA Sample Control Center operated by DynCorp Viar, Inc., 300 N Lee St, Alexandria, VA 22314, 703-519-1140.
26. Nestrick, Terry L. DOW Chemical Co., personal communication with D.R. Rushneck, April 8, 1993. Details available from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Sample Control Center operated by DynCorp Viar Inc, 300 N Lee St, Alexandria, VA 22314, 703-519-1140.
27. Barnstadt, Michael. “Big Fish Column”, Triangle Laboratories of RTP, Inc., SOP 129-90, 27 March 27, 1992.
28. “Determination of Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins (PCDD) and Dibenzofurans (PCDF) in Environmental Samples Using EPA Method 1613”, Chemical Sciences Department, Midwest Research Institute, 425 Volker Boulevard, Kansas City, MO 44110-2299, Standard Operating Procedure No. CS-153, January 15, 1992.
29. Ryan, John J. Raymonde Lizotte and William H. Newsome, J. Chromatog. 303 (1984) 351-360.
30. Telliard, William A., McCarty, Harry B., and Riddick, Lynn S. “Results of the Interlaboratory Validation Study of USEPA Method 1613 for the Analysis of Tetra-through Octachlorinated Dioxins and Furans by Isotope Dilution GC/MS,” Chemosphere, 27, 41-46 (1993).
31. “Results of the International Interlaboratory Validation Study of USEPA Method 1613”, October 1994, available from the EPA Sample Control Center operated by DynCorp Viar, Inc., 300 N Lee St, Alexandria, VA 22314, 703-519-1140.
These definitions and purposes are specific to this method but have been conformed to common usage as much as possible.
24.1 Units of weight and Measure and Their Abbreviations.
24.1.1 Symbols:
24.2 Definitions and Acronyms (in Alphabetical Order).
Analyte—A CDD or CDF tested for by this method. The analytes are listed in Table 1.
Calibration Standard (CAL)—A solution prepared from a secondary standard and/or stock solutions and used to calibrate the response of the instrument with respect to analyte concentration.
Calibration Verification Standard (VER)—The mid-point calibration standard (CS3) that is used in to verify calibration. See Table 4.
CDD—Chlorinated Dibenzo-p-ioxin—The isomers and congeners of tetra-through octa-chlorodibenzo-p-dioxin.
CDF—Chlorinated Dibenzofuran—The isomers and congeners of tetra-through octa-chlorodibenzofuran.
CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5—See Calibration standards and Table 4.
Field Blank—An aliquot of reagent water or other reference matrix that is placed in a sample container in the laboratory or the field, and treated as a sample in all respects, including exposure to sampling site conditions, storage, preservation, and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the field blank is to determine if the field or sample transporting procedures and environments have contaminated the sample.
GC—Gas chromatograph or gas chromatography.
GPC—Gel permeation chromatograph or gel permeation chromatography.
HPLC—High performance liquid chromatograph or high performance liquid chromatography.
HRGC—High resolution GC.
HRMS—High resolution MS.
IPR—Initial precision and recovery; four aliquots of the diluted PAR standard analyzed to establish the ability to generate acceptable precision and accuracy. An IPR is performed prior to the first time this method is used and any time the method or instrumentation is modified.
K-D—Kuderna-Danish concentrator; a device used to concentrate the analytes in a solvent.
Laboratory Blank—See method blank.
Laboratory Control sample (LCS)—See ongoing precision and recovery standard (OPR).
Laboratory Reagent Blank—See method blank.
May—This action, activity, or procedural step is neither required nor prohibited.
May Not—This action, activity, or procedural step is prohibited.
Method Blank—An aliquot of reagent water that is treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware, equipment, solvents, reagents, internal standards, and surrogates that are used with samples. The method blank is used to determine if analytes or interferences are present in the laboratory environment, the reagents, or the apparatus.
Minimum Level (ML)—The level at which the entire analytical system must give a recognizable signal and acceptable calibration point for the analyte. It is equivalent to the concentration of the lowest calibration standard, assuming that all method-specified sample weights, volumes, and cleanup procedures have been employed.
MS—Mass spectrometer or mass spectrometry.
Must—This action, activity, or procedural step is required.
OPR—Ongoing precision and recovery standard (OPR); a laboratory blank spiked with known quantities of analytes. The OPR is analyzed exactly like a sample. Its purpose is to assure that the results produced by the laboratory remain within the limits specified in this method for precision and recovery.
PAR—Precision and recovery standard; secondary standard that is diluted and spiked to form the IPR and OPR.
PFK—Perfluorokerosene; the mixture of compounds used to calibrate the exact m/z scale in the HRMS.
Preparation Blank—See method blank.
Primary Dilution Standard—A solution containing the specified analytes that is purchased or prepared from stock solutions and diluted as needed to prepare calibration solutions and other solutions.
Quality Control Check Sample (QCS)—A sample containing all or a subset of the analytes at known concentrations. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the laboratory or is prepared from a source of standards different from the source of calibration standards. It is used to check laboratory performance with test materials prepared external to the normal preparation process.
Reagent Water—Water demonstrated to be free from the analytes of interest and potentially interfering substances at the method detection limit for the analyte.
Relative Standard Deviation (RSD)—The standard deviation times 100 divided by the mean. Also termed “coefficient of variation.”
RF—Response factor. See Section 10.6.1.
RR—Relative response. See Section 10.5.2.
RSD—See relative standard deviation.
SDS—Soxhlet/Dean-Stark extractor; an extraction device applied to the extraction of solid and semi-solid materials (Reference 7).
Should—This action, activity, or procedural step is suggested but not required.
SICP—Selected ion current profile; the line described by the signal at an exact m/z.
SPE—Solid-phase extraction; an extraction technique in which an analyte is extracted from an aqueous sample by passage over or through a material capable of reversibly adsorbing the analyte. Also termed liquid-solid extraction.
Stock Solution—A solution containing an analyte that is prepared using a reference material traceable to EPA, the National Institute of Science and Technology (NIST), or a source that will attest to the purity and authenticity of the reference material.
TCDD—Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin.
TCDF—Tetrachlorodibenzofuran.
VER—See calibration verification standard.
1.1 This method is designed to determine the volatile toxic organic pollutants associated with the 1976 Consent Decree and additional compounds amenable to purge and trap gas chromatography-mass spectrometry (GC/MS).
1.2 The chemical compounds listed in table 1 may be determined in municipal and industrial discharges by this method. The methmd is designed to meet the survey requirements of Effluent Guidelines Division (EGD) and the National Pollutants Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) under 40 CFR 136.1 and 136.5. Any modifications of this method, beyond those expressly permitted, shall be considered as major modifications subject to application and approval of alternate test procedures under 40 CFR 136.4 and 136.5.
1.3 The detection limit of this method is usually dependent on the level of interferences rather than instrumental limitations. The limits in table 2 represent the minimum quantity that can be detected with no interferences present.
1.4 The GC/MS portions of this method are for use only by analysts experienced with GC/MS or under the close supervision of such qualified persons. Laboratories unfamiliar with the analyses of environmental samples by GC/MS should run the performance tests in reference 1 before beginning.
2.1 Stable isotopically labeled analogs of the compounds of interest are added to a 5 mL water sample. The sample is purged at 20-25 °C with an inert gas in a specially designed chamber. The volatile organic compounds are transferred from the aqueous phase into the gaseous phase where they are passed into a sorbent column and trapped. After purging is completed, the trap is backflushed and heated rapidly to desorb the compounds into a gas chromatograph (GC). The compounds are separated by the GC and detected by a mass spectrometer (MS) (references 2 and 3). The labeled compounds serve to correct the variability of the analytical technique.
2.2 Identification of a compound (qualitative analysis) is performed by comparing the GC retention time and the background corrected characteristic spectral masses with those of authentic standards.
2.3 Quantitative analysis is performed by GC/MS using extracted ion current profile (EICP) areas. Isotope dilution is used when labeled compounds are available; otherwise, an internal standard method is used.
2.4 Quality is assured through reproducible calibration and testing of the purge and trap and GC/MS systems.
3.1 Impurities in the purge gas, organic compounds out-gassing from the plumbing upstream of the trap, and solvent vapors in the laboratory account for the majority of contamination problems. The analytical system is demonstrated to be free from interferences under conditions of the analysis by analyzing blanks initially and with each sample lot (samples analyzed on the same 8 hr shift), as described in Section 8.5.
3.2 Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organic compounds (particularly methylene chloride) through the bottle seal during shipment and storage. A field blank prepared from reagent water and carried through the sampling and handling protocol serves as a check on such contamination.
3.3 Contamination by carry-over can occur when high level and low level samples are analyzed sequentially. To reduce carry-over, the purging device and sample syringe are rinsed between samples with reagent water. When an unusually concentrated sample is encountered, it is followed by analysis of a reagent water blank to check for carry-over. For samples containing large amounts of water soluble materials, suspended solids, high boiling compounds, or high levels or purgeable compounds, the purge device is washed with soap solution, rinsed with tap and distilled water, and dried in an oven at 100-125 °C. The trap and other parts of the system are also subject to contamination; therefore, frequent bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.
3.4 Interferences resulting from samples will vary considerably from source to source, depending on the diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each compound or reagent used in this method has not been precisely determined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. Exposure to these compounds should be reduced to the lowest possible level. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in these analyses. Additional information on laboratory safety can be found in references 4-6.
4.2 The following compounds covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: benzene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, and vinyl chloride. Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood, and a NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when high concentrations are handled.
5.1 Sample bottles for discrete sampling.
5.1.1 Bottle—25 to 40 mL with screw cap (Pierce 13075, or equivalent). Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry at >105 °C for one hr minimum before use.
5.1.2 Septum—Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce 12722, or equivalent), cleaned as above and baked at 100-200 °C, for one hour minimum.
5.2 Purge and trap device—consists of purging device, trap, and desorber. Complete devices are commercially available.
5.2.1 Purging device—designed to accept 5 mL samples with water column at least 3 cm deep. The volume of the gaseous head space between the water and trap shall be less than 15 mL. The purge gas shall be introduced less than 5 mm from the base of the water column and shall pass through the water as bubbles with a diameter less than 3 mm. The purging device shown in Figure 1 meets these criteria.
5.2.2 Trap—25 to 30 cm × 2.5 mm i.d. minimum, containing the following:
5.2.2.1 Methyl silicone packing—one ±0.2 cm, 3 percent OV-1 on 60/80 mesh Chromosorb W, or equivalent.
5.2.2.2 Porous polymer—15 ±1.0 cm, Tenax GC (2,6-diphenylene oxide polymer), 60/80 mesh, chromatographic grade, or equivalent.
5.2.2.3 Silica gel—8 ±1.0 cm, Davison Chemical, 35/60 mesh, grade 15, or equivalent. The trap shown in Figure 2 meets these specifications.
5.2.3 Desorber—shall heat the trap to 175 ±5 °C in 45 seconds or less. The polymer section of the trap shall not exceed 180 °C, and the remaining sections shall not exceed 220 °C. The desorber shown in Figure 2 meets these specifications.
5.2.4 The purge and trap device may be a separate unit or coupled to a GC as shown in Figures 3 and 4.
5.3 Gas chromatograph—shall be linearly temperature programmable with initial and final holds, shall contain a glass jet separator as the MS interface, and shall produce results which meet the calibration (Section 7), quality assurance (Section 8), and performance tests (Section 11) of this method.
5.3.1 Column—2.8 ±0.4 m × 2 ±0.5 mm i. d. glass, packekd with one percent SP-1000 on Carbopak B, 60/80 mesh, or equivalent.
5.4 Mass spectrometer—70 eV electron impact ionization; shall repetitively scan from 20 to 250 amu every 2-3 seconds, and produce a unit resolution (valleys between m/z 174-176 less than 10 percent of the height of the m/z 175 peak), background corrected mass spectrum from 50 ng 4-bromo-fluorobenzene (BFB) injected into the GC. The BFB spectrum shall meet the mass-intensity criteria in Table 3. All portions of the GC column, transfer lines, and separator which connect the GC column to the ion source shall remain at or above the column temperature during analysis to preclude condensation of less volatile compounds.
5.5 Data system—shall collect and record MS data, store mass intensity data in spectral libraries, process GC/MS data and generate reports, and shall calculate and record response factors.
5.5.1 Data acquisition—mass spectra shall be collected continuously throughout the analysis and stored on a mass storage device.
5.5.2 Mass spectral libraries—user created libraries containing mass spectra obtained from analysis of authentic standards shall be employed to reverse search GC/MS runs for the compounds of interest (Section 7.2).
5.5.3 Data processing—the data system shall be used to search, locate, identify, and quantify the compounds of interest in each GC/MS analysis. Software routines shall be employed to compute retention times and EICP areas. Displays of spectra, mass chromatograms, and library comparisons are required to verify results.
5.5.4 Response factors and multipoint calibrations—the data system shall be used to record and maintain lists of response factors (response ratios for isotope dilution) and generate multi-point calibration curves (Section 7). Computations of relative standard deviation (coefficient of variation) are useful for testing calibration linearity. Statistics on initial and on-going performance shall be maintained (Sections 8 and 11).
5.6 Syringes—5 mL glass hypodermic, with Luer-lok tips.
5.7 Micro syringes—10, 25, and 100 uL.
5.8 Syringe valves—2-way, with Luer ends (Telfon or Kel-F).
5.9 Syringe—5 mL, gas-tight, with shut-off valve.
5.10 Bottles—15 mL., screw-cap with Telfon liner.
5.11 Balance—analytical, capable of weighing 0.1 mg.
6.1 Reagent water—water in which the compounds of interest and interfering compounds are not detected by this method (Section 11.7). It may be generated by any of the following methods:
6.1.1 Activated carbon—pass tap water through a carbon bed (Calgon Filtrasorb-300, or equivalent).
6.1.2 Water purifier—pass tap water through a purifier (Millipore Super Q, or equivalent).
6.1.3 Boil and purge—heat tap water to 90-100 °C and bubble contaminant free inert gas through it for approx one hour. While still hot, transfer the water to screw-cap bottles and seal with a Teflon-lined cap.
6.2 Sodium thiosulfate—ACS granular.
6.3 Methanol—pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.4 Standard solutions—purchased as solution or mixtures with certification to their purity, concentration, and authenticity, or prepared from materials of known purity and composition. If compound purity is 96 percent or greater, the weight may be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the standard.
6.5 Preparation of stock solutions—prepare in methanol using liquid or gaseous standards per the steps below. Observe the safety precautions given in Section 4.
6.5.1 Place approx 9.8 mL of methanol in a 10 mL ground glass stoppered volumetric flask. Allow the flask to stand unstoppered for approximately 10 minutes or until all methanol wetted surfaces have dried. In each case, weigh the flask, immediately add the compound, then immediately reweigh to prevent evaporation losses from affecting the measurement.
6.5.1.1 Liquids—using a 100 µL syringe, permit 2 drops of liquid to fall into the methanol without contacting the leck of the flask. Alternatively, inject a known volume of the compound into the methanol in the flask using a micro-syringe.
6.5.1.2 Gases (chloromethane, bromomethane, chloroethane, vinyl chloride)—fill a valved 5 mL gas-tight syringe with the compound. Lower the needle to approximately 5 mm above the methanol meniscus. Slowly introduce the compound above the surface of the meniscus. The gas will dissolve rapidly in the methanol.
6.5.2 Fill the flask to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting several times. Calculate the concentration in mg/mL (µg/µL) from the weight gain (or density if a known volume was injected).
6.5.3 Transfer the stock solution to a Teflon sealed screw-cap-bottle. Store, with minimal headspace, in the dark at −10 to −20 °C.
6.5.4 Prepare fresh standards weekly for the gases and 2-chloroethylvinyl ether. All other standards are replaced after one month, or sooner if comparison with check standards indicate a change in concentration. Quality control check standards that can be used to determine the accuracy of calibration standards are available from the US Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio.
6.6 Labeled compound spiking solution—from stock standard solutions prepared as above, or from mixtures, prepare the spiking solution to contain a concentration such that a 5-10 µL spike into each 5 mL sample, blank, or aqueous standard analyzed will result in a concentration of 20 µg/L of each labeled compound. For the gases and for the water soluble compounds (acrolein, acrylonitrile, acetone, diethyl ether, and MEK), a concentration of 100 µg/L may be used. Include the internal standards (Section 7.5) in this solution so that a concentration of 20 µg/L in each sample, blank, or aqueous standard will be produced.
6.7 Secondary standards—using stock solutions, prepare a secondary standard in methanol to contain each pollutant at a concentration of 500 µg/mL For the gases and water soluble compounds (Section 6.6), a concentration of 2.5 mg/mL may be used.
6.7.1 Aqueous calibration standards—using a 25 µL syringe, add 20 µL of the secondary standard (Section 6.7) to 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000 mL of reagent water to produce concentrations of 200, 100, 50, 20, and 10 µg/L, respectively. If the higher concentration standard for the gases and water soluble compounds was chosen (Section 6.6), these compounds will be at concentrations of 1000, 500, 250, 100, and 50 µg/L in the aqueous calibration standards.
6.7.2 Aqueous performance standard—an aqueous standard containing all pollutants, internal standards, labeled compounds, and BFB is prepared daily, and analyzed each shift to demonstrate performance (Section 11). This standard shall contain either 20 or 100 µg/L of the labeled and pollutant gases and water soluble compounds, 10 µg/L BFB, and 20 µg/L of all other pollutants, labeled compounds, and internal standards. It may be the nominal 20 µg/L aqueous calibration standard (Section 6.7.1).
6.7.3 A methanolic standard containing all pollutants and internal standards is prepared to demonstrate recovery of these compounds when syringe injection and purge and trap analyses are compared. This standard shall contain either 100 µg/mL or 500 µg/mL of the gases and water soluble compounds, and 100 µg/mL of the remaining pollutants
6.7.4 Other standards which may be needed are those for test of BFB performance (Section 7.1) and for collection of mass spectra for storage in spectral libraries (Section 7.2).
7.1 Assemble the gas chromatographic apparatus and establish operating conditions given in table 2. By injecting standards into the GC, demonstrate that the analytical system meets the detection limits in table 2 and the mass-intensity criteria in table 3 for 50 ng BFB.
7.2 Mass spectral libraries—detection and identification of the compound of interest are dependent upon the spectra stored in user created libraries.
7.2.1 Obtain a mass spectrum of each pollutant and labeled compound and each internal standard by analyzing an authentic standard either singly or as part of a mixture in which there is no interference between closely eluted components. That only a single compound is present is determined by examination of the spectrum. Fragments not attributable to the compound under study indicate the presence of an interfering compound. Adjust the analytical conditions and scan rate (for this test only) to produce an undistorted spectrum at the GC peak maximum. An undistorted spectrum will usually be obtained if five complete spectra are collected across the upper half of the GC peak. Software algorithms designed to “enhance” the spectrum may eliminate distortion, but may also eliminate authentic m/z's or introduce other distortion.
7.2.3 The authentic reference spectrum is obtained under BFB tuning conditions (Section 7.1 and table 3) to normalize it to spectra from other instruments.
7.2.4 The spectrum is edited by saving the 5 most intense mass spectral peaks and all other mass spectral peaks greater than 10 percent of the base peak. This spectrum is stored for reverse search and for compound confirmation.
7.3 Assemble the purge and trap device. Pack the trap as shown in Figure 2 and condition overnight at 170-180 °C by backflushing with an inert gas at a flow rate of 20-30 mL/min. Condition traps daily for a minimum of 10 minutes prior to use.
7.3.1 Analyze the aqueous performance standard (Section 6.7.2) according to the purge and trap procedure in Section 10. Compute the area at the primary m/z (table 4) for each compound. Compare these areas to those obtained by injecting one µL of the methanolic standard (Section 6.7.3) to determine compound recovery. The recovery shall be greater than 20 percent for the water soluble compounds, and 60-110 percent for all other compounds. This recovery is demonstrated initially for each purge and trap GC/MS system. The test is repeated only if the purge and trap or GC/MS systems are modified in any way that might result in a change in recovery.
7.3.2 Demonstrate that 100 ng toluene (or toluene-d8) produces an area at m/z 91 (or 99) approx one-tenth that required to exceed the linear range of the system. The exact value must be determined by experience for each instrument. It is used to match the calibration range of the instrument to the analytical range and detection limits required.
7.4 Calibration by isotope dilution—the isotope dilution approach is used for the purgeable organic compounds when appropriate labeled compounds are available and when interferences do not preclude the analysis. If labeled compounds are not available, or interferences are present, internal standard methods (Section 7.5 or 7.6) are used. A calibration curve encompassing the concentration range of interest is prepared for each compound determined. The relative response (RR) vs concentration (µg/L) is plotted or computed using a linear regression. An example of a calibration curve for toluene using toluene-d8 is given in figure 5. Also shown are the ±10 percent error limits (dotted lines). Relative response is determined according to the procedures described below. A minimum of five data points are required for calibration (Section 7.4.4).
7.4.1 The relative response (RR) of pollutant to labeled compound is determined from isotope ratio values calculated from acquired data. Three isotope ratios are used in this process:
The correct way to calculate RR is: RR=(R
7.4.2 In most cases, the retention times of the pollutant and labeled compound are the same and isotope ratios (R's) can be calculated from the EICP areas, where: R=(area at m
R
7.4.3 An example of the above calculations can be taken from the data plotted in figure 6 for toluene and toluene-d8. For these data, R
Not all labeled compounds elute before their pollutant analogs.
7.4.4 To calibrate the analytical system by isotope dilution, analyze a 5 mL aliquot of each of the aqueous calibration standards (Section 6.7.1) spiked with an appropriate constant amount of the labeled compound spiking solution (Section 6.6), using the purge and trap procedure in section 10. Compute the RR at each concentration.
7.4.5 Linearity—if the ratio of relative response to concentration for any compound is constant (less than 20 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5 point calibration range, an averaged relative response/concentration ratio may be used for that compound; otherwise, the complete calibration curve for that compound shall be used over the 5 point calibration range.
7.5 Calibration by internal standard—used when criteria for isotope dilution (Section 7.4) cannot be met. The method is applied to pollutants having no labeled analog and to the labeled compounds. The internal standards used for volatiles analyses are bromochloromethane, 2-bromo-1-chloropropane, and 1,4-dichlorobutane. Concentrations of the labeled compounds and pollutants without labeled analogs are computed relative to the nearest eluted internal standard, as shown in table 2.
7.5.1 Response factors—calibration requires the determination of response factors (RF) which are defined by the following equation:
RF=(A
C
C
7.5.2 The response factor is determined at 10, 20, 50, 100, and 200 ug/L for the pollutants (optionally at five times these concentrations for gases and water soluble pollutants—see Section 6.7), in a way analogous to that for calibration by isotope dilution (Section 7.4.4). The RF is plotted against concentration for each compound in the standard (C
7.5.3 Linearity—if the response factor (RF) for any compound is constant (less than 35 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5 point calibration range, an averaged response factor may be used for that compound; otherwise, the complete calibration curve for that compound shall be used over the 5 point range.
7.6 Combined calibration—by adding the isotopically labeled compounds and internal standards (Section 6.6) to the aqueous calibration standards (Section 6.7.1), a single set of analyses can be used to produce calibration curves for the isotope dilution and internal standard methods. These curves are verified each shift (Section 11.5) by purging the aqueous performance standard (Section 6.7.2). Recalibration is required only if calibration and on-going performance (Section 11.5) criteria cannot be met.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality assurance program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability, analysis of samples spiked with labeled compounds to evaluate and document data quality, and analysis of standards and blanks as tests of continued performance. Laboratory performance is compared to established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method.
8.1.1 The analyst shall make an initial demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 The analyst is permitted to modify this method to improve separations or lower the costs of measurements, provided all performance specifications are met. Each time a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2 to demonstrate method performance.
8.1.3 Analyses of blanks are required to demonstrate freedom from contamination and that the compounds of interest and interfering compounds have not been carried over from a previous analysis (Section 3). The procedures and criteria for analysis of a blank are described in Sections 8.5 and 11.7.
8.1.4 The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to monitor method performance. This test is described in Section 8.3. When results of these spikes indicate atypical method performance for samples, the samples are diluted to bring method performance within acceptable limits (Section 14.2).
8.1.5 The laboratory shall, on an on-going basis, demonstrate through the analysis of the aqueous performance standard (Section 6.7.2) that the analysis system is in control. This procedure is described in Sections 11.1 and 11.5.
8.1.6 The laboratory shall maintain records to define the quality of data that is generated. Development of accuracy statements is described in Sections 8.4 and 11.5.2.
8.2 Initial precision and accuracy—to establish the ability to generate acceptable precision and accuracy, the analyst shall perform the following operations:
8.2.1 Analyze two sets of four 5-mL aliquots (8 aliquots total) of the aqueous performance standard (Section 6.7.2) according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.2.2 Using results of the first set of four analyses in Section 8.2.1, compute the average recovery (X
8.2.3 For each compound, compare s and X
The large number of compounds in table 5 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail one of the acceptance criteria when all compoulds are analyzed. To determine if the analytical system is out of control, or if the failure can be attributed to probability, proceed as follows:
8.2.4 Using the results of the second set of four analyses, compute s and X
8.3 The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to assess method performance on the sample matrix.
8.3.1 Spike and analyze each sample according to the method beginning in Section 10.
8.3.2 Compute the percent recovery (P) of the labeled compounds using the internal standard method (Section 7.5).
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery for each compound with the corresponding labeled compound recovery limit in table 5. If the recovery of any compound falls outside its warning limit, method performance is unacceptable for that compound in that sample. Therefore, the sample matrix is complex and the sample is to be diluted and reanalyzed, per Section 14.2.
8.4 As part of the QA program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples shall be assessed and records shall be maintained. After the analysis of five wastewater samples for which the labeled compounds pass the tests in Section 8.3.3, compute the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of the percent recovery (s
8.5 Blanks—reagent water blanks are analyzed to demonstrate freedom from carry-over (Section 3) and contamination.
8.5.1 The level at which the purge and trap system will carry greater than 5 µg/L of a pollutant of interest (table 1) into a succeeding blank shall be determined by analyzing successively larger concentrations of these compounds. When a sample contains this concentration or more, a blank shall be analyzed immediately following this sample to demonstrate no carry-over at the 5 µg/L level.
8.5.2 With each sample lot (samples analyzed on the same 8 hr shift), a blank shall be analyzed immediately after analysis of the aqueous performance standard (Section 11.1) to demonstrate freedom from contamination. If any of the compounds of interest (table 1) or any potentially interfering compound is found in a blank at greater than 10 µg/L (assuming a response factor of 1 relative to the nearest eluted internal standard for compounds not listed in table 1), analysis of samples is halted until the source of contamination is eliminated and a blank shows no evidence of contamination at this level.
8.6 The specifications contained in this method can be met if the apparatus used is calibrated properly, then maintained in a calibrated state.
The standards used for calibration (Section 7), calibration verification (Section 11.5) and for initial (Section 8.2) and on-going (Section 11.5) precision and accuracy should be identical, so that the most precise results will be obtained. The GC/MS instrument in particular will provide the most reproducible results if dedicated to the settings and conditions required for the analyses of volatiles by this method.
8.7 Depending on specific program requirements, field replicates may be collected to determine the precision of the sampling technique, and spiked samples may be required to determine the accuracy of the analysis when internal or external standard methods are used.
9.1 Grab samples are collected in glass containers having a total volume greater than 20 mL. Fill sample bottles so that no air bubbles pass through the sample as the bottle is filled. Seal each bottle so that no air bubbles are entrapped. Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle until time of analysis.
9.2 Samples are maintained at 0-4 °C from the time of collection until analysis. If the sample contains residual chlorine, add sodium thiosulfate preservative (10 mg/40 mL) to the empty sample bottles just prior to shipment to the sample site. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine (Reference 8). If preservative has been added, shake bottle vigorously for one minute immediately after filling.
9.3 Experimental evidence indicates that some aromatic compounds, notably benzene, toluene, and ethyl benzene are susceptible to rapid biological degradation under certain environmental conditions. Refrigeration alone may not be adequate to preserve these compounds in wastewaters for more than seven days. For this reason, a separate sample should be collected, acidified, and analyzed when these aromatics are to be determined. Collect about 500 mL of sample in a clean container.
Adjust the pH of the sample to about 2 by adding HCl (1+1) while stirring. Check pH with narrow range (1.4 to 2.8) pH paper. Fill a sample container as described in Section 9.1. If residual chlorine is present, add sodium thiosulfate to a separate sample container and fill as in Section 9.1.
9.4 All samples shall be analyzed within 14 days of collection.
10.1 Remove standards and samples from cold storage and bring to 20-25 °.
10.2 Adjust the purge gas flow rate to 40 ±4 mL/min. Attach the trap inlet to the purging device and set the valve to the purge mode (figure 3). Open the syringe valve located on the purging device sample introduction needle (figure 1).
10.3 Remove the plunger from a 5-mL syringe and attach a closed syringe valve. Open the sample bottle and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel until it overflows. Replace the plunger and compress the sample. Open the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the sample volume to 5.0 mL. Because this process of taking an aliquot destroys the validity of the sample for future analysis, fill a second syringe at this time to protect against possible loss of data. Add an appropriate amount of the labeled compound spiking solution (Section 6.6) through the valve bore, then close the valve.
10.4 Attach the syringe valve assembly to the syringe valve on the purging device. Open both syringe valves and inject the sample into the purging chamber.
10.5 Close both valves and purge the sample for 11.0 ±0.1 minutes at 20-25 °C.
10.6 After the 11 minute purge time, attach the trap to the chromatograph and set the purge and trap apparatus to the desorb mode (figure 4). Desorb the trapped compounds into the GC column by heating the trap to 170-180 °C while backflushing with carrier gas at 20-60 mL/min for four minutes. Start MS data acquisition upon start of the desorb cycle, and start the GC column temperature program 3 minutes later. Table 1 summarizes the recommended operating conditions for the gas chromatograph. Included in this table are retention times and detection limits that were achieved under these conditions. Other columns may be used provided the requirements in Section 8 can be met. If the priority pollutant gases produce GC peaks so broad that the precision and recovery specifications (Section 8.2) cannot be met, the column may be cooled to ambient or sub-ambient temperatures to sharpen these peaks.
10.7 While analysis of the desorbed compounds proceeds, empty the purging chamber using the sample introduction syringe. Wash the chamber with two 5-mL portions of reagent water. After the purging device has been emptied, allow the purge gas to vent through the chamber until the frit is dry, so that it is ready for the next sample.
10.8 After desorbing the sample for four minutes, recondition the trap by returning to the purge mode. Wait 15 seconds, then close the syringe valve on the purging device to begin gas flow through the trap. Maintain the trap temperature at 170-180 °C. After approximately seven minutes, turn off the trap heater and open the syringe valve to stop the gas flow through the trap. When cool, the trap is ready for the next sample.
11.1 At the beginning of each 8 hr shift during which analyses are performed, system calibration and performance shall be verified for all pollutants and labeled compounds. For these tests, analysis of the aqueous performance standard (Section 6.7.2) shall be used to verify all performance criteria. Adjustment and/or recalibration (per Section 7) shall be performed until all performance criteria are met. Only after all performance criteria are met may blanks and samples be analyzed.
11.2 BFB spectrum validity—the criteria in table 3 shall be met.
11.3 Retention times—the absolute retention times of all compounds shall approximate those given in Table 2.
11.4 GC resolution—the valley height between toluene and toluene-d8 (at m/z 91 and 99 plotted on the same graph) shall be less than 10 percent of the taller of the two peaks.
11.5 Calibration verification and on-going precision and accuracy—compute the concentration of each polutant (Table 1) by isotope dilution (Section 7.4) for those compmunds which have labeled analogs. Compute the concentration of each pollutant (Table 1) which has no labeled analog by the internal standard method (Section 7.5). Compute the concentration of the labeled compounds by the internal standard method. These concentrations are computed based on the calibration data determined in Section 7.
11.5.1 For each pollutant and labeled compound, compare the concentration with the corresponding limit for on-going accuracy in Table 5. If all compmunds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance is acceptable and analysis of blanks and samples may continue. If any individual value falls outside the range given, system performance is unacceptable for that compound.
The large number of compounds in Table 5 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail the acceptance criteria when all compounds are analyzed. To determine if the analytical system is out of control, or if the failure may be attributed to probability, proceed as follows:
11.5.1.1 Analyze a second aliquot of the aqueous performance standard (Section 6.7.2).
11.5.1.2 Compute the concentration for only those compounds which failed the first test (Section 11.5.1). If these compounds now pass, system performance is acceptable for all compounds and analyses of blanks and samples may proceed. If, however, any of the compounds fail again, the measurement system is not performing properly for these compounds. In this event, locate and correct the problem or recalibrate the system (Section 7), and repeat the entire test (Section 11.1) for all compounds.
11.5.2 Add results which pass the specification in 11.5.1.2 to initial (Section 8.2) and previous on-going data. Update QC charts to form a graphic representation of laboratory performance (Figure 7). Develop a statement of accuracy for each pollutant and labeled compound by calculating the average percentage recovery (R) and the standard deviation of percent recovery (s
12.1 Labeled compounds and pollutants having no labeled analog:
12.1.1 The signals for all characteristic masses stored in the spectral library (Section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within the same two consecutive scans.
12.1.2 Either (1) the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two (0.5 to 2 times) for all masses stored in the library.
12.1.3 The retention time relative to the nearest eluted internal standard shall be within ±7 scans or ±20 seconds, whichever is greater.
12.2 Pollutants having a labeled analog:
12.2.1 The signals for all characteristic masses stored in the spectral library (Section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within the same two consecutive scans.
12.2.2 Either (1) the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two for all masses stored in the spectral library.
12.2.3 The retention time difference between the pollutant and its labeled analog shall agree within ±2 scans or ±6 seconds (whichever is greater) of this difference in the shift standard (Section 11.1).
12.3 Masses present in the experimental mass spectrum that are not present in the reference mass spectrum shall be accounted for by contaminant or background ions. If the experimental mass spectrum is contaminated, an experienced spectrometrist (Section 1.4) is to determine the presence or absence of the compound.
13.1 Isotope dilution—by adding a known amount of a labeled compound to every sample prior to purging, correction for recovery of the pollutant can be made because the pollutant and its labeled analog exhibit the same effects upon purging, desorption, and gas chromatography. Relative response (RR) values for sample mixtures are used in conjunction with calibration curves described in Section 7.4 to determine concentrations directly, so long as labeled compound spiking levels are constant. For the toluene example given in Figure 6 (Section 7.4.3), RR would be equal to 1.174. For this RR value, the toluene calibration curve given in Figure 5 indicates a concentration of 31.8 µg/L.
13.2 Internal standard—calculate the concentration using the response factor determined from calibration data (Section 7.5) and the following equation:
Concentration =(A
13.3 If the EICP area at the quantitation mass for any compound exceeds the calibration range of the system, the sample is diluted by successive factors of 10 and these dilutions are analyzed until the area is within the calibration range.
13.4 Report results for all pollutants and labeled compounds (Table 1) found in all standards, blanks, and samples, in µg/L to three significant figures. Results for samples which have been diluted are reported at the least dilute level at which the area at the quantitation mass is within the calibration range (Section 13.3) and the labeled compound recovery is within the normal range for the Method (Section 14.2).
14.1 Untreated effluents and other samples frequently contain high levels (>1000 µg/L) of the compounds of interest and of interfering compounds. Some samples will foam excessively when purged; others will overload the trap/or GC column.
14.2 Dilute 0.5 mL of sample with 4.5 mL of reagent water and analyze this diluted sample when labeled compound recovery is outside the range given in Table 5. If the recovery remains outside of the range for this diluted sample, the aqueous performance standard shall be analyzed (Section 11) and calibration verified (Section 11.5). If the recovery for the labeled compmund in the aqueous performance standard is outside the range given in Table 5, the analytical system is out of control. In this case, the instrumelt shall be repaired, the performance specifications in Section 11 shall be met, and the analysis of the undiluted sample shall be repeated. If the recovery for the aqueous performance standard is within the range given in Table 5, the method does not work on the sample being analyzed and the result may not be reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
14.3 Reverse search computer programs can misinterpret the spectrum of chromatographically unresolved pollutant and labeled compound pairs with overlapping spectra when a high level of the pollutant is present. Examine each chromatogram for peaks greater than the height of the internal standard peaks. These peaks can obscure the compounds of interest.
15.1 The specifications for this method were taken from the inter-laboratory validation of EPA Method 624 (reference 9). Method 1624 has been shown to yield slightly better performance on treated effluents than Method 624. Additional method performance data can be found in Reference 10.
1. “Performance Tests for the Evaluation of Computerized Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories,” USEPA, EMSL/Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-600/4-80-025 (April 1980).
2. Bellar, T.A. and Lichtenberg, J.J., “Journal American Water Works Association,”
3. Bellar, T.A. and Lichtenberg, J.J., “Semi-automated Headspace Analysis of Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for Purgeable Volatile Organic Compounds,” in
4. “Working with Carcinogens,” DHEW, PHS, NIOSH, Publication 77-206 (1977).
5. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry,” 29 CFR part 1910, OSHA 2206, (1976).
6. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories,” American Chemical Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety (1979).
7. “Handbook of Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater Laboratories,” USEPA, EMSL/Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-4-79-019 (March 1979).
8. “Methods 330.4 and 330.5 for Total Residual Chlorine,” USEPA, EMSL/Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-4-79-020 (March 1979).
9. “EPA Method Study 29 EPA Method 624—Purgeables,” EPA 600/4-84-054, National Technical Information Service, PB84-209915, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
10. “Colby, B.N., Beimer, R.G., Rushneck, D.R., and Telliard, W.A., “Isotope Dilution Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry for the Determination of Priority Pollutants in Industrial Effluents,” USEPA, Effluent Guidelines Division, Washington, DC 20460 (1980).
1.1 This method is designed to determine the semivolatile toxic organic pollutants associated with the 1976 Consent Decree and additional compounds amenable to extraction and analysis by capillary column gas chromatography-mass spectrometry (GC/MS).
1.2 The chemical compounds listed in Tables 1 and 2 may be determined in municipal and industrial discharges by this method. The method is designed to meet the survey
1.3 The detection limit of this method is usually dependent on the level of interferences rather than instrumental limitations. The limits listed in Tables 3 and 4 represent the minimum quantity that can be detected with no interferences present.
1.4 The GC/MS portions of this method are for use only by analysts experienced with GC/MS or under the close supervision of such qualified persons. Laboratories unfamiliar with analyses of environmental samples by GC/MS should run the performance tests in reference 1 before beginning.
2.1 Stable isotopically labeled analogs of the compounds of interest are added to a one liter wastewater sample. The sample is extracted at pH 12-13, then at pH <2 with methylene chloride using continuous extraction techniques. The extract is dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to a volume of one mL. An internal standard is added to the extract, and the extract is injected into the gas chromatograph (GC). The compounds are separated by GC and detected by a mass spectrometer (MS). The labeled compounds serve to correct the variability of the analytical technique.
2.2 Identification of a compound (qualitative analysis) is performed by comparing the GC retention time and background corrected characteristic spectral masses with those of authentic standards.
2.3 Quantitative analysis is performed by GC/MS using extracted ion current profile (EICP) areas. Isotope dilution is used when labeled compounds are available; otherwise, an internal standard method is used.
2.4 Quality is assured through reproducible calibration and testing of the extraction and GC/MS systems.
3.1 Solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware may yield artifacts and/or elevated baselines causing misinterpretation of chromatograms and spectra. All materials shall be demonstrated to be free from interferences under the conditions of analysis by running method blanks initially and with each sample lot (samples started through the extraction process on a given 8 hr shift, to a maximum of 20). Specific selection of reagents and purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required. Glassware and, where possible, reagents are cleaned by solvent rinse and baking at 450 °C for one hour minimum.
3.2 Interferences coextracted from samples will vary considerably from source to source, depending on the diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being samples.
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each compound or reagent used in this method has not been precisely determined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. Exposure to these compounds should be reduced to the lowest possible level. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel involved in these analyses. Additional information on laboratory safety can be found in references 2-4.
4.2 The following compounds covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known or suspected human or mammalian carcinogens: benzidine benzo(a)anthracene, 3,3′-dichlorobenzidine, benzo(a)pyrene, dibenzo(a,h)anthracene, N-nitrosodimethylamine, and β-naphtylamine. Primary standards of these compounds shall be prepared in a hood, and a NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when high concentrations are handled.
5.1 Sampling equipment for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Sample bottle, amber glass, 1.1 liters minimum. If amber bottles are not available, samples shall be protected from light. Bottles are detergent water washed, then solvent rinsed or baked at 450 °C for one hour minimum before use.
5.1.2 Bottle caps—threaded to fit sample bottles. Caps are lined with Teflon. Aluminum foil may be substituted if the sample is not corrosive. Liners are detergent water washed, then reagent water (Section 6.5) and solvent rinsed, and baked at approximately 200 °C for one hour minimum before use.
5.1.3 Compositing equipment—automatic or manual compositing system incorporating glass containers for collection of a minimum 1.1 liters. Sample containers are kept at 0 to 4 °C during sampling. Glass or Teflon tubing only shall be used. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used in the pump only. Before use, the tubing is thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsings with reagent water (Section 6.5) to minimize sample contamination. An integrating flow meter is used to collect proportional composite samples.
5.2 Continuous liquid-liquid extractor—Teflon or glass conncecting joints and stopcocks without lubrication (Hershberg-Wolf Extractor) one liter capacity, Ace Glass 6841-10, or equivalent.
5.3 Drying column—15 to 20 mm i.d. Pyrex chromatographic column equipped with coarse glass frit or glass wool plug.
5.4 Kuderna-Danish (K-D) apparatus
5.4.1 Concentrator tube—10mL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025, or equivalent) with calibration verified. Ground glass stopper (size 19/22 joint) is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.4.2 Evaporation flask—500 mL (Kontes K-570001-0500, or equivalent), attached to concentrator tube with springs (Kontes K-662750-0012).
5.4.3 Snyder column—three ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0232, or equivalent).
5.4.4 Snyder column—two ball micro (Kontes K-469002-0219, or equivalent).
5.4.5 Boiling chips—approx 10/40 mesh, extracted with methylene chloride and baked at 450 °C for one hr minimum.
5.5 Water bath—heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temperature control ±2 °C, installed in a fume hood.
5.6 Sample vials—amber glass, 2-5 mL with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.7 Analytical balance—capable of weighing 0.1 mg.
5.8 Gas chromatograph—shall have splitless or on-column injection port for capillary column, temperature program with 30 °C hold, and shall meet all of the performance specifications in Section 12.
5.8.1 Column—30 ±5 m×0.25 ±0.02 mm i.d. 5% phenyl, 94% methyl, 1% vinyl silicone bonded phase fused silica capillary column (J & W DB-5, or equivalent).
5.9 Mass spectrometer—70 eV electron impact ionization, shall repetitively scan from 35 to 450 amu in 0.95 to 1.00 second, and shall produce a unit resolution (valleys between m/z 441-442 less than 10 percent of the height of the 441 peak), backgound corrected mass spectrum from 50 ng decafluorotriphenylphosphine (DFTPP) introduced through the GC inlet. The spectrum shall meet the mass-intensity criteria in Table 5 (reference 5). The mass spectrometer shall be interfaced to the GC such that the end of the capillary column terminates within one centimeter of the ion source but does not intercept the electron or ion beams. All portions of the column which connect the GC to the ion source shall remain at or above the column temperature during analysis to preclude condensation of less volatile compounds.
5.10 Data system—shall collect and record MS data, store mass-intensity data in spectral libraries, process GC/MS data, generate reports, and shall compute and record response factors.
5.10.1 Data acquisition—mass spectra shall be collected continuously throughout the analysis and stored on a mass storage device.
5.10.2 Mass spectral libraries—user created libraries containing mass spectra obtained from analysis of authentic standards shall be employed to reverse search GC/MS runs for the compounds of interest (Section 7.2).
5.10.3 Data processing—the data system shall be used to search, locate, identify, and quantify the compounds of interest in each GC/MS analysis. Software routines shall be employed to compute retention times and peak areas. Displays of spectra, mass chromatograms, and library comparisons are required to verify results.
5.10.4 Response factors and multipoint calibrations—the data system shall be used to record and maintain lists of response factors (response ratios for isotope dilution) and multipoint calibration curves (Section 7). Computations of relative standard deviation (coefficient of variation) are useful for testing calibration linearity. Statistics on initial (Section 8.2) and on-going (Section 12.7) performance shall be computed and maintained.
6.1 Sodium hydroxide—reagent grade, 6N in reagent water.
6.2 Sulfuric acid—reagent grade, 6N in reagent water.
6.3 Sodium sulfate—reagent grade, granular anhydrous, rinsed with methylene chloride (20 mL/g) and conditioned at 450 °C for one hour minimum.
6.4 Methylene chloride—distilled in glass (Burdick and Jackson, or equivalent).
6.5 Reagent water—water in which the compounds of interest and interfering compounds are not detected by this method.
6.6 Standard solutions—purchased as solutions or mixtures with certification to their purity, concentration, and authenticity, or prepared from materials of known purity and composition. If compound purity is 96 percent or greater, the weight may be used without correction to compute the concentration of the standard. When not being used, standards are stored in the dark at −20 to −10 °C in screw-capped vials with Teflon-lined lids. A mark is placed on the vial at the level of the solution so that solvent evaporation loss can be detected. The vials are brought to room temperature prior to use. Any precipitate is redissolved and solvent is added if solvent loss has occurred.
6.7 Preparation of stock solutions—prepare in methylene chloride, benzene, p-dioxane, or a mixture of these solvents per the steps below. Observe the safety precautions in Section 4. The large number of labeled and unlabeled acid, base/neutral, and Appendix C compounds used for combined
6.7.1 Dissolve an appropriate amount of assayed reference material in a suitable solvent. For example, weigh 400 mg naphthalene in a 10 mL ground glass stoppered volumetric flask and fill to the mark with benzene. After the naphthalene is completely dissolved, transfer the solution to a 15 mL vial with Teflon-lined cap.
6.7.2 Stock standard solutions should be checked for signs of degradation prior to the preparation of calibration or performance test standards. Quality control check samples that can be used to determine the accuracy of calibration standards are available from the US Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
6.7.3 Stock standard solutions shall be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with quality control check samples indicates a change in concentration.
6.8 Labeled compound spiking solution—from stock standard solutions prepared as above, or from mixtures, prepare the spiking solution at a concentration of 200 µg/mL, or at a concentration appropriate to the MS response of each compound.
6.9 Secondary standard—using stock solutions (Section 6.7), prepare a secondary standard containing all of the compounds in Tables 1 and 2 at a concentration of 400 µg/mL, or higher concentration appropriate to the MS response of the compound.
6.10 Internal standard solution—prepare 2,2′-difluorobiphenyl (DFB) at a concentration of 10 mg/mL in benzene.
6.11 DFTPP solution—prepare at 50 µg/mL in acetone.
6.12 Solutions for obtaining authentic mass spectra (Section 7.2)—prepare mixtures of compounds at concentrations which will assure authentic spectra are obtained for storage in libraries.
6.13 Calibration solutions—combine 0.5 mL of the solution in Section 6.8 with 25, 50, 125, 250, and 500 uL of the solution in section 6.9 and bring to 1.00 mL total volume each. This will produce calibration solutions of nominal 10, 20, 50, 100, and 200 µg/mL of the pollutants and a constant nominal 100 µg/mL of the labeled compounds. Spike each solution with 10 µL of the internal standard solution (Section 6.10). These solutions permit the relative response (labeled to unlabeled) to be measured as a function of concentration (Section 7.4).
6.14 Precision and recovery standard—used for determination of initial (Section 8.2) and on-going (Section 12.7) precision and recovery. This solution shall contain the pollutants and labeled compounds at a nominal concentration of 100 µg/mL.
6.15 Stability of solutions—all standard solutions (Sections 6.8-6.14) shall be analyzed within 48 hours of preparation and on a monthly basis thereafter for signs of degradation. Standards will remain acceptable if the peak area at the quantitation mass relative to the DFB internal standard remains within ±15 percent of the area obtained in the initial analysis of the standard.
7.1 Assemble the GC/MS and establish the operating conditions in Table 3. Analyze standards per the procedure in Section 11 to demonstrate that the analytical system meets the detection limits in Tables 3 and 4, and the mass-intensity criteria in Table 5 for 50 ng DFTPP.
7.2 Mass spectral libraries—detection and identification of compounds of interest are dependent upon spectra stored in user created libraries.
7.2.1 Obtain a mass spectrum of each pollutant, labeled compound, and the internal standard by analyzing an authentic standard either singly or as part of a mixture in which there is no interference between closely eluted components. That only a single compound is present is determined by examination of the spectrum. Fragments not attributable to the compound under study indicate the presence of an interfering compound.
7.2.2 Adjust the analytical conditions and scan rate (for this test only) to produce an undistorted spectrum at the GC peak maximum. An undistorted spectrum will usually be obtained if five complete spectra are collected across the upper half of the GC peak. Software algorithms designed to “enhance” the spectrum may eliminate distortion, but may also eliminate authentic masses or introduce other distortion.
7.2.3 The authentic reference spectrum is obtained under DFTPP tuning conditions (Section 7.1 and Table 5) to normalize it to spectra from other instruments.
7.2.4 The spectrum is edited by saving the 5 most intense mass spectral peaks and all other mass spectral peaks greater than 10 percent of the base peak. This edited spectrum is stored for reverse search and for compound confirmation.
7.3 Analytical range—demonstrate that 20 ng anthracene or phenanthrene produces an area at m/z 178 approx one-tenth that required to exceed the linear range of the system. The exact value must be determined by experience for each instrument. It is used to match the calibration range of the instrument to the analytical range and detection limits required, and to diagnose instrument
7.3.1 Polar compound detection—demonstrate that unlabeled pentachlorophenol and benzidine are detectable at the 50 µg/mL level (per all criteria in Section 13). The 50 µg/mL calibration standard (Section 6.13) can be used to demonstrate this performance.
7.4 Calibration with isotope dilution—isotope dilution is used when (1) labeled compounds are available, (2) interferences do not preclude its use, and (3) the quantitation mass extracted ion current profile (EICP) area for the compound is in the calibration range. If any of these conditions preclude isotope dilution, internal standard methods (Section 7.5 or 7.6) are used.
7.4.1 A calibration curve encompassing the concentration range is prepared for each compound to be determined. The relative response (pollutant to labeled) vs concentration in standard solutions is plotted or computed using a linear regression. The example in Figure 1 shows a calibration curve for phenol using phenol-d5 as the isotopic diluent. Also shown are the ±10 percent error limits (dotted lines). Relative Reponse (RR) is determined according to the procedures described below. A minimum of five data points are employed for calibration.
7.4.2 The relative response of a pollutant to its labeled analog is determined from isotope ratio values computed from acquired data. Three isotope ratios are used in this process:
R
R
R
The m/z's are selected such that R
7.4.3 Capillary columns usually separate the pollutant-labeled pair, with the labeled compound eluted first (Figure 2). For this case, R
7.4.4 Special precautions are taken when the pollutant-labeled pair is not separated, or when another labeled compound with interfering spectral masses overlaps the pollutant (a case which can occur with isomeric compounds). In this case, it is necessary to determine the respective contributions of the pollutant and labeled compounds to the respective EICP areas. If the peaks are separated well enough to permit the data system or operator to remove the contributions of the compounds to each other, the equations in Section 7.4.3 apply. This usually occurs when the height of the valley between the two GC peaks at the same m/z is less than 10 percent of the height of the shorter of the two peaks. If significant GC and spectral overlap occur, RR is computed using the following equation:
RR = (R
7.4.5 To calibrate the analytical system by isotope dilution, analyze a 1.0 µL aliquot of each of the calibration standards (Section 6.13) using the procedure in Section 11. Compute the RR at each concentration.
7.4.6 Linearity—if the ratio of relative response to concentration for any compound is constant (less than 20 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5 point calibration range, and averaged relative response/concentration ratio may be used for that compound; otherwise, the complete calibration curve for that compound shall be used over the 5 point calibration range.
7.5 Calibration by internal standard—used when criteria for istope dilution (Section 7.4) cannot be met. The internal standard to be used for both acid and base/neutral analyses is 2,2′-difluorobiphenyl. The internal standard method is also applied to determination of compounds having no labeled analog, and to measurement of labeled compounds for intra-laboratory statistics (Sections 8.4 and 12.7.4).
7.5.1 Response factors—calibration requires the determination of response factors (RF) which are defined by the following equation:
7.5.1.1 The response factor is determined for at least five concentrations appropriate to the response of each compound (Section 6.13); nominally, 10, 20, 50, 100, and 200 µg/mL. The amount of internal standard added to each extract is the same (100 µg/mL) so that C
7.5.1.2 Linearity—if the response factor (RF) for any compound is constant (less than 35 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5
7.6 Combined calibration—by using calibration solutions (Section 6.13) containing the pollutants, labeled compounds, and the internal standard, a single set of analyses can be used to produce calibration curves for the isotope dilution and internal standard methods. These curves are verified each shift (Section 12.5) by analyzing the 100 µg/mL calibration standard (Section 6.13). Recalibration is required only if calibration verification (Section 12.5) criteria cannot be met.
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality assurance program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability, analysis of samples spiked with labeled compounds to evaluate and document data quality, and analysis of standards and blanks as tests of continued performance. Laboratory performance is compared to established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method.
8.1.1 The analyst shall make an initial demonstration of the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 The analyst is permitted to modify this method to improve separations or lower the costs of measurements, provided all performance specifications are met. Each time a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure in Section 8.2 to demonstrate method performance.
8.1.3 Analyses of blanks are required to demonstrate freedom from contamination. The procedures and criteria for analysis of a blank are described in Section 8.5.
8.1.4 The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to monitor method performance. This test is described in Section 8.3. When results of these spikes indicate atypical method performance for samples, the samples are diluted to bring method performance within acceptable limits (Section 15).
8.1.5 The laboratory shall, on an on-going basis, demonstrate through calibration verification and the analysis of the precision and recovery standard (Section 6.14) that the analysis system is in control. These procedures are described in Sections 12.1, 12.5, and 12.7.
8.1.6 The laboratory shall maintain records to define the quality of data that is generated. Development of accuracy statements is described in Section 8.4.
8.2 Initial precision and accuracy—to establish the ability to generate acceptable precision and accuracy, the analyst shall perform the following operations:
8.2.1 Extract, concentrate, and analyze two sets of four one-liter aliquots (8 aliquots total) of the precision and recovery standard (Section 6.14) according to the procedure in Section 10.
8.2.2 Using results of the first set of four analyses, compute the average recovery (X
8.2.3 For each compound, compare s and X
The large number of compounds in Table 8 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail the acceptance criteria when all compounds are analyzed. To determine if the analytical system is out of control, or if the failure can be attributed to probability, proceed as follows:
8.2.4 Using the results of the second set of four analyses, compute s and X
8.3 The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to assess method performance on the sample matrix.
8.3.1 Analyze each sample according to the method in Section 10.
8.3.2 Compute the percent recovery (P) of the labeled compounds using the internal standard methmd (Section 7.5).
8.3.3 Compare the labeled compound recovery for each compound with the corresponding limits in Table 8. If the recovery of any compounds falls outside its warning limit, method performance is unacceptable for that compound in that sample, Therefore, the sample is complex and is to be diluted and reanalyzed per Section 15.4.
8.4 As part of the QA program for the laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater samples shall be assessed and records shall
8.5 Blanks—reagent water blanks are analyzed to demonstrate freedom from contamination.
8.5.1 Extract and concentrate a blank with each sample lot (samples started through the extraction process on the same 8 hr shift, to a maximum of 20 samples). Analyze the blank immediately after analysis of the precision and recovery standard (Section 6.14) to demonstrate freedom from contamination.
8.5.2 If any of the compounds of interest (Tables 1 and 2) or any potentially interfering compound is found in a blank at greater than 10 µg/L (assuming a response factor of 1 relative to the internal standard for compounds not listed in Tables 1 and 2), analysis of samples is halted until the source of contamination is eliminated and a blank shows no evidence of contamination at this level.
8.6 The specifications contained in this method can be met if the apparatus used is calibrated properly, then maintained in a calibrated state. The standards used for calibration (Section 7), calibration verification (Section 12.5), and for initial (Section 8.2) and on-going (Section 12.7) precision and recovery should be identical, so that the most precise results will be obtained. The GC/MS instrument in particular will provide the most reproducible results if dedicated to the settings and conditions required for the analysis of semi-volatiles by this method.
8.7 Depending on specific program requirements, field replicates may be collected to determine the precision of the sampling technique, and spiked samples may be required to determine the accuracy of the analysis when internal or external standard methods are used.
9.1 Collect samples in glass containers following conventional sampling practices (Reference 7). Composite samples are collected in refrigerated glass containers (Section 5.1.3) in accordance with the requirements of the sampling program.
9.2 Maintain samples at 0-4 °C from the time collectimn until extraction. If residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg sodium thiosulfate per liter of water. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used to measure residual chlorine (Reference 8).
9.3 Begin sample extraction within seven days of collection, and analyze all extracts within 40 days of extraction.
10.1 Labeled compound spiking—measure 1.00 ±0.01 liter of sample into a glass container. For untreated effluents, and samples which are expected to be difficult to extract and/or concentrate, measure an additional 10.0 ±0.1 mL and dilute to a final volume of 1.00 ±0.01 liter with reagent water in a glass container.
10.1.1 For each sample or sample lot (to a maximum of 20) to be extracted at the same time, place three 1.00 ±0.10 liter aliquots of reagent water in glass containers.
10.1.2 Spike 0.5 mL of the labeled compound spiking solution (Section 6.8) into all samples and one reagant water aliquot.
10.1.3 Spike 1.0 mL of the precision and recovery standard (Section 6.14) into the two remaining reagent water aliquots.
10.1.4 Stir and equilibrate all solutions for 1-2 hr.
10.2 Base/neutral extraction—place 100-150 mL methylene chloride in each continuous extractor and 200-300 in each distilling flask.
10.2.1 Pour the sample(s), blank, and standard aliquots into the extractors. Rinse the glass containers with 50-100 mL methylene chloride and add to the respective extractor.
10.2.2 Adjust the pH of the waters in the extractors to 12-13 with 6N NaOH while monitoring with a pH meter. Begin the extraction by heating the flask until the methylene chloride is boiling. When properly adjusted, 1-2 drops of methylene chloride per second will fall from the condensor tip into the water. After 1-2 hours of extraction, test the pH and readjust to 12-13 if required. Extract for 18-24 hours.
10.2.3 Remove the distilling flask, estimate and record the volume of extract (to the nearest 100 mL), and pour the contents through a drying column containing 7 to 10 cm anhydrous sodium sulfate. Rinse the distilling flask with 30-50 mL of methylene chloride and pour through the drying column. Collect the solution in a 500 mL K-D evaporator flask equipped with a 10 mL concentrator tube. Seal, label as the base/neutral fraction, and concentrate per Sections 10.4 to 10.5.
10.3 Acid extraction—adjust the pH of the waters in the extractors to 2 or less using 6N sulfuric acid. Charge clean distilling flasks with 300-400 mL of methylene chloride. Test and adjust the pH of the waters after the first 1-2 hr of extraction. Extract for 18-24 hours.
10.3.1 Repeat Section 10.2.3, except label as the acid fraction.
10.4 Concentration—concentrate the extracts in separate 500 mL K-D flasks equipped with 10 mL concentrator tubes.
10.4.1 Add 1 to 2 clean boiling chips to the flask and attach a three-ball macro Snyder column. Prewet the column by adding approximately one mL of methylene chloride through the top. Place the K-D apparatus in a hot water bath so that the entire lower rounded surface of the flask is bathed with steam. Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 15 to 20 minutes. At the proper rate of distillation, the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the liquid has reached an apparent volume of 1 mL, remove the K-D apparatus from the bath and allow the solvent to drain and cool for at least 10 minutes. Remove the Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the concentrator tube with 1-2 mL of methylene chloride. A 5-mL syringe is recommended for this operation.
10.4.2 For performance standards (Sections 8.2 and 12.7) and for blanks (Section 8.5), combine the acid and base/neutral extracts for each at this point. Do not combine the acid and base/neutral extracts for samples.
10.5 Add a clean boiling chip and attach a two ball micro Snyder column to the concentrator tube. Prewet the column by adding approx 0.5 mL methylene chloride through the top. Place the apparatus in the hot water bath. Adjust the vertical position and the water temperature as required to complete the concentration in 5-10 minutes. At the proper rate of distillation, the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will not flood. When the liquid reaches an apparent volume of approx 0.5 mL, remove the apparatus from the water bath and allow to drain and cool for at least 10 minutes. Remove the micro Snyder column and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with approx 0.2 mL of methylene chloride. Adjust the final volume to 1.0 mL.
10.6 Transfer the concentrated extract to a clean screw-cap vial. Seal the vial with a Teflon-lined lid, and mark the level on the vial. Label with the sample number and fraction, and store in the dark at −20 to −10 °C until ready for analysis.
11.1 Establish the operating conditions given in Table 3 or 4 for analysis of the base/neutral or acid extracts, respectively. For analysis of combined extracts (Section 10.4.2), use the operating conditions in Table 3.
11.2 Bring the concentrated extract (Section 10.6) or standard (Sections 6.13 through 6.14) to room temperature and verify that any precipitate has redissolved. Verify the level on the extract (Sections 6.6 and 10.6) and bring to the mark with solvent if required.
11.3 Add the internal standard solution (Section 6.10) to the extract (use 1.0 uL of solution per 0.1 mL of extract) immediately prior to injection to minimize the possibility of loss by evaporation, adsorption, or reaction. Mix thoroughly.
11.4 Inject a volume of the standard solution or extract such that 100 ng of the internal standard will be injected, using on-column or splitless injection. For 1 mL extracts, this volume will be 1.0 uL. Start the GC column initial isothermal hold upon injection. Start MS data collection after the solvent peak elutes. Stop data collection after the benzo (ghi) perylene or pentachlorophenol peak elutes for the base/neutral or acid fraction, respectively. Return the column to the initial temperature for analysis of the next sample.
12.1 At the beginning of each 8 hr shift during which analyses are performed, GC/MS system performance and calibration are verified for all pollutants and labeled compounds. For these tests, analysis of the 100 µg/mL calibration standard (Section 6.13) shall be used to verify all performance criteria. Adjustment and/or recalibration (per Section 7) shall be performed until all performance criteria are met. Only after all performance criteria are met may samples, blanks, and precision and recovery standards be analyzed.
12.2 DFTPP spectrum validity—inject 1 µL of the DFTPP solution (Section 6.11) either separately or within a few seconds of injection of the standard (Section 12.1) analyzed at the beginning of each shift. The criteria in Table 5 shall be met.
12.3 Retention times—the absolute retention time of 2,2′-difluorobiphenyl shall be within the range of 1078 to 1248 seconds and the relative retention times of all pollutants and labeled compounds shall fall within the limits given in Tables 3 and 4.
12.4 GC resolution—the valley height between anthracene and phenanthrene at m/z 178 (or the analogs at m/z 188) shall not exceed 10 percent of the taller of the two peaks.
12.5 Calibration verification—compute the concentration of each pollutant (Tables 1 and 2) by isotope dilution (Section 7.4) for those compounds which have labeled analogs. Compute the concentration of each pollutant which has no labeled analog by the internal standard method (Section 7.5). Compute the concentration of the labeled compounds by the internal standard method. These concentrations are computed based on the calibration data determined in Section 7.
12.5.1 For each pollutant and labeled compound being tested, compare the concentration with the calibration verification limit
12.6 Multiple peaks—each compound injected shall give a single, distinct GC peak.
12.7 On-going precision and accuracy.
12.7.1 Analyze the extract of one of the pair of precision and recovery standards (Section 10.1.3) prior to analysis of samples from the same lot.
12.7.2 Compute the concentration of each pollutant (Tables 1 and 2) by isotope dilution (Section 7.4) for those compounds which have labeled analogs. Compute the concentration of each pollutant which has no labeled analog by the internal standard method (Section 7.5). Compute the concentration of the labeled compounds by the internal standard method.
12.7.3 For each pollutant and labeled compound, compare the concentration with the limits for on-going accuracy in Table 8. If all compounds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance is acceptable and analysis of blanks and samples may proceed. If, however, any individual concentration falls outside of the range given, system performance is unacceptable for that compound.
The large number of compounds in Table 8 present a substantial probability that one or more will fail when all compounds are analyzed. To determine if the extraction/concentration system is out of control or if the failure is caused by probability, proceed as follows:
12.7.3.1 Analyze the second aliquot of the pair of precision and recovery standard (Section 10.1.3).
12.7.3.2 Compute the concentration of only those pollutants or labeled compounds that failed the previous test (Section 12.7.3). If these compounds now pass, the extraction/concentration processes are in control and analysis of blanks and samples may proceed. If, however, any of the same compounds fail again, the extraction/concentration processes are not being performed properly for these compounds. In this event, correct the problem, re-extract the sample lot (Section 10) and repeat the on-going precision and recovery test (Section 12.7).
12.7.4 Add results which pass the specifications in Section 12.7.2 to initial and previous on-going data. Update QC charts to perform a graphic representation of continued laboratory performance (Figure 5). Develop a statement of laboratory accuracy for each pollutant and labeled compound by calculating the average percent recovery (R) and the standard deviation of percent recovery (s
13.1 Qualititative determination is accomplished by comparison of data from analysis of a sample or blank with data from analysis of the shift standard (Section 12.1) and with data stored in the spectral libraries (Section 7.2.4). Identification is confirmed when spectra and retention times agree per the criteria below.
13.2 Labeled compounds and pollutants having no labeled analog:
13.2.1 The signals for all characteristic masses stored in the spectral library (Section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within the same two consecutive scans.
13.2.2 Either (1) the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two (0.5 to 2 times) for all masses stored in the library.
13.2.3 The retention time relative to the nearest eluted internal standard shall be within ±15 scans or ±15 seconds, whichever is greater of this difference in the shift standard (Section 12.1).
13.3 Pollutants having a labled analog:
13.3.1 The signals for all characteristic masses stored in the spectral library (Section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within the same two consecutive scans.
13.3.2. Either (1) the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the corrected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two for all masses stored in the spectral library.
13.3.3. The retention time difference between the pollutant and its labeled analog shall agree within ±6 scans or ±6 seconds (whichever is greater) of this difference in the shift standard (Section 12.1).
13.4 Masses present in the experimental mass spectrum that are not present in the reference mass spectrum shall be accounted for by contaminant or background ions. If the experimental mass spectrum is contaminated, an experienced spectrometrist (Section 1.4) is to determine the presence or absence of the cmmpound.
14.1 Isotope dilution—by adding a known amount of a labeled compound to every sample prior to extraction, correction for recovery of the pollutant can be made because the pollutant and its labeled analog exhibit the same effects upon extraction, concentration, and gas chromatography. Relative response (RR) values for mixtures are used in conjunction with calibration curves described in
14.2 Internal standard—compute the concentration in the extract using the response factor determined from calibration data (Section 7.5) and the following equation: C
14.3 The concentration of the pollutant in water is computed using the volumes of the original water sample (Section 10.1) and the final extract volume (Section 10.5), as follows: Concentration in water (µg/L)=(C
14.4 If the EICP area at the quantitiation mass for any compound exceeds the calibration range of the system, the extract of the dilute aliquot (Section 10.1) is analyzed by isotope dilution; otherwise, the extract is diluted by a factor of 10, 9 µL of internal standard solution (Section 6.10) are added to a 1.0 mL aliquot, and this diluted extract is analyzed by the internal standard method (Section 14.2). Quantify each compound at the highest concentration level within the calibration range.
14.5 Report results for all pollutants and labeled compounds (Tables 1 and 2) found in all standards, blanks, and samples in µg/L, to three significant figures. Results for samples which have been diluted are reported at the least dilute level at which the area at the quantitation mass is within the calibration range (Section 14.4) and the labeled compound recovery is within the normal range for the method (Section 15.4).
15.1 Untreated effluents and other samples frequently contain high levels (>1000 µg/L) of the compounds of interest, interfering compounds, and/or polymeric materials. Some samples will not concentrate to one mL (Section 10.5); others will overload the GC column and/or mass spectrometer.
15.2 Analyze the dilute aliquot (Section 10.1) when the sample will not concentrate to 1.0 mL. If a dilute aliquot was not extracted, and the sample holding time (Section 9.3) has not been exceeded, dilute an aliquot of the sample with reagent water and re-extract (Section 10.1); otherwise, dilute the extract (Section 14.4) and analyze by the internal standard method (Section 14.2).
15.3 Recovery of internal standard—the EICP area of the internal standard should be within a factor of two of the area in the shift standard (Section 12.1). If the absolute areas of the labeled compounds are within a factor of two of the respective areas in the shift standard, and the internal standard area is less than one-half of its respective area, then internal standard loss in the extract has occurred. In this case, use one of the labeled compounds (perferably a polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon) to compute the concentration of a pollutant with no labeled analog.
15.4 Recovery of labeled compounds—in most samples, labeled compound recoveries will be similar to those from reagent water (Section 12.7). If the labeled compound recovery is outside the limits given in Table 8, the dilute extract (Section 10.1) is analyzed as in Section 14.4. If the recoveries of all labeled compounds and the internal staldard are low (per the criteria above), then a loss in instrument sensitivity is the most likely cause. In this case, the 100 µg/mL calibration standard (Section 12.1) shall be analyzed and calibration verified (Section 12.5). If a loss in sensitivity has occurred, the instrument shall be repaired, the performance specifications in Section 12 shall be met, and the extract reanalyzed. If a loss in instrument sensitivity has not occurred, the method does not work on the sample being analyzed and the result may not be reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
16.1 Interlaboratory performance for this method is detailed in references 9 and 10.
16.2 A chromatogram of the 100 µg/mL acid/base/neutral calibration standard (Section 6.13) is shown in Figure 6.
1. “Performance Tests for the Evaluation of Computerized Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories” USEPA, EMSL/Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-600/4-80-025 (April 1980).
2. “Working with Carcinogens,” DHEW, PHS, CDC, NIOSH, Publication 77-206, (August 1977).
3. “OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry” OSHA 2206, 29 CFR part 1910 (January 1976).
4. “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories, ” ACS Committee on Chemical Safety (1979).
5. “Reference Compound to Calibrate Ion Abundance Measurement in Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry Systems,” J.W. Eichelberger, L.E. Harris, and W.L. Budde, Anal. Chem.,
6. “Handbook of Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater Laboratories,” USEPA, EMSL/Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-600/4-79-019 (March 1979).
7. “Standard Practice for Sampling Water,” ASTM Annual Book of Standards, ASTM, Philadelphia, PA, 76 (1980).
8. “Methods 330.4 and 330.5 for Total Residual Chlorine,” USEPA, EMSL/ Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA 600/4-70-020 (March 1979).
9. Colby, B.N., Beimer, R.G., Rushneck, D.R., and Telliard, W.A., “Isotope Dilution Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry for the determination of Priority Pollutants in Industrial Effluents.” USEPA, Effluent Guidelines Division, Washington, DC 20460 (1980).
10. “Inter-laboratory Validation of US Environmental Protection Agency Method 1625,” USEPA, Effluent Guidelines Division, Washington, DC 20460 (June 15, 1984).
To support measurement of several semivolatile pollutants, EPA has developed this attachment to EPA Method 1625B.
The additional semivolatile organic compounds listed in Tables 1 and 2 are added to all applicable calibration, spiking, and other solutions utilized in the determination of semivolatile compounds by EPA Method 1625. The instrument is to be calibrated with these compounds, and all procedures and quality control tests described in the Method must be performed.
All section and figure numbers in this Attachment reference section and figure numbers in EPA Method 1625 Revision B unless noted otherwise. Sections not listed here remain unchanged.
The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the analyte concentration is greater than zero and is determined from analysis of a sample in a given matrix containing the analyte.
This procedure is designed for applicability to a wide variety of sample types ranging from reagent (blank) water containing analyte to wastewater containing analyte. The MDL for an analytical procedure may vary as a function of sample type. The procedure requires a complete, specific, and well defined analytical method. It is essential that all sample processing steps of the analytical method be included in the determination of the method detection limit.
The MDL obtained by this procedure is used to judge the significance of a single measurement of a future sample.
The MDL procedure was designed for applicability to a broad variety of physical and chemical methods. To accomplish this, the procedure was made device- or instrument-independent.
1. Make an estimate of the detection limit using one of the following:
(a) The concentration value that corresponds to an instrument signal/noise in the range of 2.5 to 5.
(b) The concentration equivalent of three times the standard deviation of replicate instrumental measurements of the analyte in reagent water.
(c) That region of the standard curve where there is a significant change in sensitivity,
(d) Instrumental limitations.
It is recognized that the experience of the analyst is important to this process. However, the analyst must include the above considerations in the initial estimate of the detection limit.
2. Prepare reagent (blank) water that is as free of analyte as possible. Reagent or interference free water is defined as a water sample in which analyte and interferent concentrations are not detected at the method detection limit of each analyte of interest. Interferences are defined as systematic errors in the measured analytical signal of an established procedure caused by the presence of interfering species (interferent). The interferent concentration is presupposed to be normally distributed in representative samples of a given matrix.
3. (a) If the MDL is to be determined in reagent (blank) water, prepare a laboratory standard (analyte in reagent water) at a concentration which is at least equal to or in the same concentration range as the estimated method detection limit. (Recommend between 1 and 5 times the estimated method detection limit.) Proceed to Step 4.
(b) If the MDL is to be determined in another sample matrix, analyze the sample. If the measured level of the analyte is in the recommended range of one to five times the estimated detection limit, proceed to Step 4.
If the measured level of analyte is less than the estimated detection limit, add a known amount of analyte to bring the level of analyte between one and five times the estimated detection limit.
If the measured level of analyte is greater than five times the estimated detection limit, there are two options.
(1) Obtain another sample with a lower level of analyte in the same matrix if possible.
(2) The sample may be used as is for determining the method detection limit if the analyte level does not exceed 10 times the MDL of the analyte in reagent water. The variance of the analytical method changes as the analyte concentration increases from the MDL, hence the MDL determined under these circumstances may not truly reflect method variance at lower analyte concentrations.
4. (a) Take a minimum of seven aliquots of the sample to be used to calculate the method detection limit and process each through the entire analytical method. Make all computations according to the defined method with final results in the method reporting units. If a blank measurement is required to calculate the measured level of analyte, obtain a separate blank measurement for each sample aliquot analyzed. The average blank measurement is subtracted from the respective sample measurements.
(b) It may be economically and technically desirable to evaluate the estimated method detection limit before proceeding with 4a. This will: (1) Prevent repeating this entire procedure when the costs of analyses are high and (2) insure that the procedure is being conducted at the correct concentration. It is quite possible that an inflated MDL will be calculated from data obtained at many times the real MDL even though the level of analyte is less than five times the calculated method detection limit. To insure that the estimate of the method detection limit is a good estimate, it is necessary to determine that a lower concentration of analyte will not result in a significantly lower method detection limit. Take two aliquots of the sample to be used to calculate the method detection limit and process each through the entire method, including blank measurements as described above in 4a. Evaluate these data:
(1) If these measurements indicate the sample is in desirable range for determination of the MDL, take five additional aliquots and proceed. Use all seven measurements for calculation of the MDL.
(2) If these measurements indicate the sample is not in correct range, reestimate the MDL, obtain new sample as in 3 and repeat either 4a or 4b.
5. Calculate the variance (S
6. (a) Compute the MDL as follows:
(b) The 95% confidence interval estimates for the MDL derived in 6a are computed according to the following equations derived from percentiles of the chi square over degrees of freedom distribution (χ
7. Optional iterative procedure to verify the reasonableness of the estimate of the MDL and subsequent MDL determinations.
(a) If this is the initial attempt to compute MDL based on the estimate of MDL formulated in Step 1, take the MDL as calculated in Step 6, spike the matrix at this calculated MDL and proceed through the procedure starting with Step 4.
(b) If this is the second or later iteration of the MDL calculation, use S
(c) Use the S
(d) The 95% confidence limits for MDL derived in 7c are computed according to the following equations derived from precentiles of the chi squared over degrees of freedom distribution.
The analytical method used must be specifically identified by number or title ald the MDL for each analyte expressed in the appropriate method reporting units. If the analytical method permits options which affect the method detection limit, these conditions must be specified with the MDL value. The sample matrix used to determine the MDL must also be identified with MDL value. Report the mean analyte level with the MDL and indicate if the MDL procedure was iterated. If a laboratory standard or a sample that contained a known amount analyte was used for this determination, also report the mean recovery.
If the level of analyte in the sample was below the determined MDL or exceeds 10
1.1 Inductively coupled plasma-atomic emission spectrometry (ICP-AES) is used to determine metals and some nonmetals in solution. This method is a consolidation of existing methods for water, wastewater, and solid wastes.
1.2 For reference where this method is approved for use in compliance monitoring programs [e.g., Clean Water Act (NPDES) or Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA)] consult both the appropriate sections of the Code of Federal Regulation (40 CFR Part 136 Table 1B for NPDES, and Part 141 § 141.23 for drinking water), and the latest
1.3 ICP-AES can be used to determine dissolved analytes in aqueous samples after suitable filtration and acid preservation. To reduce potential interferences, dissolved solids should be <0.2% (w/v) (Section 4.2).
1.4 With the exception of silver, where this method is approved for the determination of certain metal and metalloid contaminants in drinking water, samples may be analyzed directly by pneumatic nebulization without acid digestion if the sample has been properly preserved with acid and has turbidity of <1 NTU at the time of analysis. This total recoverable determination procedure is referred to as “direct analysis”. However, in the determination of some primary drinking water metal contaminants, preconcentration of the sample may be required prior to analysis in order to meet drinking water acceptance performance criteria (Sections 11.2.2 through 11.2.7).
1.5 For the determination of total recoverable analytes in aqueous and solid samples a digestion/extraction is required prior to analysis when the elements are not in solution (e.g., soils, sludges, sediments and aqueous samples that may contain particulate and suspended solids). Aqueous samples containing suspended or particulate material 1% (w/v) should be extracted as a solid type sample.
1.6 When determining boron and silica in aqueous samples, only plastic, PTFE or quartz labware should be used from time of sample collection to completion of analysis. For accurate determination of boron in solid samples only quartz or PTFE beakers should be used during acid extraction with immediate transfer of an extract aliquot to a plastic centrifuge tube following dilution of the extract to volume. When possible, borosilicate glass should be avoided to prevent contamination of these analytes.
1.7 Silver is only slightly soluble in the presence of chloride unless there is a sufficient chloride concentration to form the soluble chloride complex. Therefore, low recoveries of silver may occur in samples, fortified sample matrices and even fortified blanks if determined as a dissolved analyte or by “direct analysis” where the sample has not been processed using the total recoverable mixed acid digestion. For this reason it is recommended that samples be digested prior to the determination of silver. The total recoverable sample digestion procedure given in this method is suitable for the determination of silver in aqueous samples containing concentrations up to 0.1 mg/L. For the analysis of wastewater samples containing higher concentrations of silver, succeeding smaller volume, well mixed aliquots
1.8 The total recoverable sample digestion procedure given in this method will solubilize and hold in solution only minimal concentrations of barium in the presence of free sulfate. For the analysis of barium in samples having varying and unknown concentrations of sulfate, analysis should be completed as soon as possible after sample preparation.
1.9 The total recoverable sample digestion procedure given in this method is not suitable for the determination of volatile organo-mercury compounds. However, if digestion is not required (turbidity <1 NTU), the combined concentrations of inorganic and organo-mercury in solution can be determined by “direct analysis” pneumatic nebulization provided the sample solution is adjusted to contain the same mixed acid (HNO
1.10 Detection limits and linear ranges for the elements will vary with the wavelength selected, the spectrometer, and the matrices. Table 1 provides estimated instrument detection limits for the listed wavelengths.
1.11 Users of the method data should state the data-quality objectives prior to analysis. Users of the method must document and have on file the required initial demonstration performance data described in Section 9.2 prior to using the method for analysis.
2.1 An aliquot of a well mixed, homogeneous aqueous or solid sample is accurately weighed or measured for sample processing. For total recoverable analysis of a solid or an aqueous sample containing undissolved material, analytes are first solubilized by gentle refluxing with nitric and hydrochloric acids. After cooling, the sample is made up to volume, is mixed and centrifuged or allowed to settle overnight prior to analysis. For the determination of dissolved analytes in a filtered aqueous sample aliquot, or for the “direct analysis” total recoverable determination of analytes in drinking water where sample turbidity is <1 NTU, the sample is made ready for analysis by the appropriate addition of nitric acid, and then diluted to a predetermined volume and mixed before analysis.
2.2 The analysis described in this method involves multielemental determinations by ICP-AES using sequential or simultaneous instruments. The instruments measure characteristic atomic-line emission spectra by optical spectrometry. Samples are nebulized and the resulting aerosol is transported to the plasma torch. Element specific emission spectra are produced by a radio-frequency inductively coupled plasma. The spectra are dispersed by a grating spectrometer, and the intensities of the line spectra are monitored at specific wavelengths by a photosensitive device. Photocurrents from the photosensitive device are processed and controlled by a computer system. A background correction technique is required to compensate for variable background contribution to the determination of the analytes. Background must be measured adjacent to the analyte wavelength during analysis. Various interferences must be considered and addressed appropriately as discussed in Sections 4.0, 7.0, 9.0, 10.0, and 11.0.
3.1 Calibration Blank—A volume of reagent water acidified with the same acid matrix as in the calibration standards. The calibration blank is a zero standard and is used to calibrate the ICP instrument (Section 7.10.1).
3.2 Calibration Standard (CAL)—A solution prepared from the dilution of stock standard solutions. The CAL solutions are used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte concentration (Section 7.9).
3.3 Dissolved Analyte—The concentration of analyte in an aqueous sample that will pass through a 0.45 µm membrane filter assembly prior to sample acidification (Section 11.1).
3.4 Field Reagent Blank (FRB)—An aliquot of reagent water or other blank matrix that is placed in a sample container in the laboratory and treated as a sample in all respects, including shipment to the sampling site, exposure to the sampling site conditions, storage, preservation, and all analytical procedures. The purpose of the FRB is to determine if method analytes or other interferences are present in the field environment (Section 8.5).
3.5 Instrument Detection Limit (IDL)—The concentration equivalent to the analyte signal which is equal to three times the standard deviation of a series of 10 replicate measurements of the calibration blank signal at the same wavelength (Table 1.).
3.6 Instrument Performance Check (IPC) Solution—A solution of method analytes, used to evaluate the performance of the instrument system with respect to a defined set of method criteria (Sections 7.11 and 9.3.4).
3.7 Internal Standard—Pure analyte(s) added to a sample, extract, or standard solution in known amount(s) and used to measure the relative responses of other method analytes that are components of the same sample or solution. The internal standard must be an analyte that is not a sample component (Section 11.5).
3.8 Laboratory Duplicates (LD1 and LD2)—Two aliquots of the same sample taken in the laboratory and analyzed separately with identical procedures. Analyses of LD1 and LD2 indicate precision associated with laboratory procedures, but not with sample collection, preservation, or storage procedures.
3.9 Laboratory Fortified Blank (LFB)—An aliquot of LRB to which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control and whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise measurements (Sections 7.10.3 and 9.3.2).
3.10 Laboratory Fortified Sample Matrix (LFM)—An aliquot of an environmental sample to which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample matrix contributes bias to the analytical results. The background concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix must be determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM corrected for background concentrations (Section 9.4).
3.11 Laboratory Reagent Blank (LRB)—An aliquot of reagent water or other blank matrices that are treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware, equipment, solvents, reagents, and internal standards that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to determine if method analytes or other interferences are present in the laboratory environment, reagents, or apparatus (Sections 7.10.2 and 9.3.1).
3.12 Linear Dynamic Range (LDR)—The concentration range over which the instrument response to an analyte is linear (Section 9.2.2).
3.13 Method Detection Limit (MDL)—The minimum concentration of an analyte that can be identified, measured, and reported with 99% confidence that the analyte concentration is greater than zero (Section 9.2.4 and Table 4.).
3.14 Plasma Solution—A solution that is used to determine the optimum height above the work coil for viewing the plasma (Sections 7.15 and 10.2.3).
3.15 Quality Control Sample (QCS)—A solution of method analytes of known concentrations which is used to fortify an aliquot of LRB or sample matrix. The QCS is obtained from a source external to the laboratory and different from the source of calibration standards. It is used to check either laboratory or instrument performance (Sections 7.12 and 9.2.3).
3.16 Solid Sample—For the purpose of this method, a sample taken from material classified as soil, sediment or sludge.
3.17 Spectral Interference Check (SIC) Solution—A solution of selected method analytes of higher concentrations which is used to evaluate the procedural routine for correcting known interelement spectral interferences with respect to a defined set of method criteria (Sections 7.13, 7.14 and 9.3.5).
3.18 Standard Addition—The addition of a known amount of analyte to the sample in order to determine the relative response of the detector to an analyte within the sample matrix. The relative response is then used to assess either an operative matrix effect or the sample analyte concentration (Sections 9.5.1 and 11.5).
3.19 Stock Standard Solution—A concentrated solution containing one or more method analytes prepared in the laboratory using assayed reference materials or purchased from a reputable commercial source (Section 7.8).
3.20 Total Recoverable Analyte—The concentration of analyte determined either by “direct analysis” of an unfiltered acid preserved drinking water sample with turbidity of <1 NTU (Section 11.2.1), or by analysis of the solution extract of a solid sample or an unfiltered aqueous sample following digestion by refluxing with hot dilute mineral acid(s) as specified in the method (Sections 11.2 and 11.3).
3.21 Water Sample—For the purpose of this method, a sample taken from one of the following sources: drinking, surface, ground, storm runoff, industrial or domestic wastewater.
4.1 Spectral interferences are caused by background emission from continuous or recombination phenomena, stray light from the line emission of high concentration elements, overlap of a spectral line from another element, or unresolved overlap of molecular band spectra.
4.1.1 Background emission and stray light can usually be compensated for by subtracting the background emission determined by measurement(s) adjacent to the analyte wavelength peak. Spectral scans of samples or single element solutions in the analyte regions may indicate not only when alternate wavelengths are desirable because of severe spectral interference, but also will show whether the most appropriate estimate of the background emission is provided by an interpolation from measurements on both sides of the wavelength peak or by the measured emission on one side or the other. The location(s) selected for the measurement of background intensity will be determined by
4.1.2 Spectral overlaps may be avoided by using an alternate wavelength or can be compensated for by equations that correct for interelement contributions, which involves measuring the interfering elements. Some potential on-line spectral interferences observed for the recommended wavelengths are given in Table 2. When operative and uncorrected, these interferences will produce false-positive determinations and be reported as analyte concentrations. The interferences listed are only those that occur between method analytes. Only interferences of a direct overlap nature that were observed with a single instrument having a working resolution of 0.035 nm are listed. More extensive information on interferant effects at various wavelengths and resolutions is available in Boumans' Tables.
4.1.3 When interelement corrections are applied, there is a need to verify their accuracy by analyzing spectral interference check solutions as described in Section 7.13. Interelement corrections will vary for the same emission line among instruments because of differences in resolution, as determined by the grating plus the entrance and exit slit widths, and by the order of dispersion. Interelement corrections will also vary depending upon the choice of background correction points. Selecting a background correction point where an interfering emission line may appear should be avoided when practical. Interelement corrections that constitute a major portion of an emission signal may not yield accurate data. Users should not forget that some samples may contain uncommon elements that could contribute spectral interferences.
4.1.4 The interference effects must be evaluated for each individual instrument whether configured as a sequential or simultaneous instrument. For each instrument, intensities will vary not only with optical resolution but also with operating conditions (such as power, viewing height and argon flow rate). When using the recommended wavelengths given in Table 1, the analyst is required to determine and document for each wavelength the effect from the known interferences given in Table 2, and to utilize a computer routine for their automatic correction on all analyses. To determine the appropriate location for off-line background correction, the user must scan the area on either side adjacent to the wavelength and record the apparent emission intensity from all other method analytes. This spectral information must be documented and kept on file. The location selected for background correction must be either free of off-line interelement spectral interference or a computer routine must be used for their automatic correction on all determinations. If a wavelength other than the recommended wavelength is used, the user must determine and document both the on-line and off-line spectral interference effect from all method analytes and provide for their automatic correction on all analyses. Tests to determine the spectral interference must be done using analyte concentrations that will adequately describe the interference. Normally, 100 mg/L single element solutions are sufficient, however, for analytes such as iron that may be found at high concentration a more appropriate test would be to use a concentration near the upper LDR limit. See Section 10.4 for required spectral interference test criteria.
4.1.5 When interelement corrections are not used, either on-going SIC solutions (Section 7.14) must be analyzed to verify the absence of interelement spectral interference or a computer software routine must be employed for comparing the determinative data to limits files for notifying the analyst when an interfering element is detected in the sample at a concentration that will produce either an apparent false positive concentration, greater than the analyte IDL, or false negative analyte concentration, less than the 99% lower control limit of the calibration blank. When the interference accounts for 10% or more of the analyte concentration, either an alternate wavelength free of interference or another approved test procedure must be used to complete the analysis. For example, the copper peak at 213.853 nm could be mistaken for the zinc peak at 213.856 nm in solutions with high copper and low zinc concentrations. For this example, a spectral scan in the 213.8 nm region would not reveal the misidentification because a single peak near the zinc location would be observed. The possibility of this misidentification of copper for the zinc peak at 213.856 nm can be identified by measuring the copper at another emission line, e.g., 324.754 nm. Users should be aware that, depending upon the instrumental resolution, alternate wavelengths with adequate sensitivity and freedom from interference may not be available for all matrices. In these circumstances the analyte must be determined using another approved test procedure.
4.2 Physical interferences are effects associated with the sample nebulization and transport processes. Changes in viscosity and surface tension can cause significant inaccuracies, especially in samples containing
4.3 Chemical interferences include molecular-compound formation, ionization effects, and solute-vaporization effects. Normally, these effects are not significant with the ICP-AES technique. If observed, they can be minimized by careful selection of operating conditions (such as incident power and observation height), by buffering of the sample, by matrix matching, and by standard-addition procedures. Chemical interferences are highly dependent on matrix type and the specific analyte element.
4.4 Memory interferences result when analytes in a previous sample contribute to the signals measured in a new sample. Memory effects can result from sample deposition on the uptake tubing to the nebulizer, and from the buildup of sample material in the plasma torch and spray chamber. The site where these effects occur is dependent on the element and can be minimized by flushing the system with a rinse blank between samples (Section 7.10.4). The possibility of memory interferences should be recognized within an analytical run and suitable rinse times should be used to reduce them. The rinse times necessary for a particular element must be estimated prior to analysis. This may be achieved by aspirating a standard containing elements corresponding to either their LDR or a concentration ten times those usually encountered. The aspiration time should be the same as a normal sample analysis period, followed by analysis of the rinse blank at designated intervals. The length of time required to reduce analyte signals to within a factor of two of the method detection limit, should be noted. Until the required rinse time is established, this method requires a rinse period of at least 60 seconds between samples and standards. If a memory interference is suspected, the sample must be re-analyzed after a long rinse period.
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method have not been fully established. Each chemical should be regarded as a potential health hazard and exposure to these compounds should be as low as reasonably achievable. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method.
5.2 The acidification of samples containing reactive materials may result in the release of toxic gases, such as cyanides or sulfides. Acidification of samples should be done in a fume hood.
5.3 All personnel handling environmental samples known to contain or to have been in contact with human waste should be immunized against known disease causative agents.
5.4 The inductively coupled plasma should only be viewed with proper eye protection from the ultraviolet emissions.
5.5 It is the responsibility of the user of this method to comply with relevant disposal and waste regulations. For guidance see Sections 14.0 and 15.0.
6.1 Inductively coupled plasma emission spectrometer:
6.1.1 Computer-controlled emission spectrometer with background-correction capability.
6.1.2 Radio-frequency generator compliant with FCC regulations.
6.1.3 Argon gas supply—High purity grade (99.99%). When analyses are conducted frequently, liquid argon is more economical and requires less frequent replacement of tanks than compressed argon in conventional cylinders.
6.1.4 A variable speed peristaltic pump is required to deliver both standard and sample solutions to the nebulizer.
6.1.5 (Optional) Mass flow controllers to regulate the argon flow rates, especially the aerosol transport gas, are highly recommended. Their use will provide more exacting control of reproducible plasma conditions.
6.2 Analytical balance, with capability to measure to 0.1 mg, for use in weighing solids, for preparing standards, and for determining dissolved solids in digests or extracts.
6.3 A temperature adjustable hot plate capable of maintaining a temperature of 95 °C.
6.4 (Optional) A temperature adjustable block digester capable of maintaining a temperature of 95 °C and equipped with 250 mL constricted digestion tubes.
6.5 (Optional) A steel cabinet centrifuge with guard bowl, electric timer and brake.
6.6 A gravity convection drying oven with thermostatic control capable of maintaining 180 °C ±5 °C.
6.7 (Optional) An air displacement pipetter capable of delivering volumes ranging from 0.1-2500 µL with an assortment of high quality disposable pipet tips.
6.8 Mortar and pestle, ceramic or nonmetallic material.
6.9 Polypropylene sieve, 5-mesh (4 mm opening).
6.10 Labware—For determination of trace levels of elements, contamination and loss are of prime consideration. Potential contamination sources include improperly cleaned laboratory apparatus and general contamination within the laboratory environment from dust, etc. A clean laboratory work area designated for trace element sample handling must be used. Sample containers can introduce positive and negative errors in the determination of trace elements by contributing contaminants through surface desorption or leaching, or depleting element concentrations through adsorption processes. All reusable labware (glass, quartz, polyethylene, PTFE, FEP, etc.) should be sufficiently clean for the task objectives. Several procedures found to provide clean labware include washing with a detergent solution, rinsing with tap water, soaking for four hours or more in 20% (v/v) nitric acid or a mixture of HNO
6.10.1 Glassware—Volumetric flasks, graduated cylinders, funnels and centrifuge tubes (glass and/or metal-free plastic).
6.10.2 Assorted calibrated pipettes.
6.10.3 Conical Phillips beakers (Corning 1080-250 or equivalent), 250 mL with 50 mm watch glasses.
6.10.4 Griffin beakers, 250 mL with 75 mm watch glasses and (optional) 75 mm ribbed watch glasses.
6.10.5 (Optional) PTFE and/or quartz Griffin beakers, 250 mL with PTFE covers.
6.10.6 Evaporating dishes or high-form crucibles, porcelain, 100 mL capacity.
6.10.7 Narrow-mouth storage bottles, FEP (fluorinated ethylene propylene) with screw closure, 125 mL to 1 L capacities.
6.10.8 One-piece stem FEP wash bottle with screw closure, 125 mL capacity.
7.1 Reagents may contain elemental impurities which might affect analytical data. Only high-purity reagents that conform to the American Chemical Society specifications
7.2 Hydrochloric acid, concentrated (sp.gr. 1.19)—HCl.
7.2.1 Hydrochloric acid (1+1)—Add 500 mL concentrated HCl to 400 mL reagent water and dilute to 1 L.
7.2.2 Hydrochloric acid (1+4)—Add 200 mL concentrated HCl to 400 mL reagent water and dilute to 1 L.
7.2.3 Hydrochloric acid (1+20)—Add 10 mL concentrated HCl to 200 mL reagent water.
7.3 Nitric acid, concentrated (sp.gr. 1.41)—HNO
7.3.1 Nitric acid (1+1)—Add 500 mL concentrated HNO
7.3.2 Nitric acid (1+2)—Add 100 mL concentrated HNO
7.3.3 Nitric acid (1+5)—Add 50 mL concentrated HNO
7.3.4 Nitric acid (1+9)—Add 10 mL concentrated HNO
7.4 Reagent water. All references to water in this method refer to ASTM Type I grade water.
7.5 Ammonium hydroxide, concentrated (sp.gr. 0.902).
7.6 Tartaric acid, ACS reagent grade.
7.7 Hydrogen peroxide, 50%, stabilized certified reagent grade.
7.8 Standard Stock Solutions—Stock standards may be purchased or prepared from ultra-high purity grade chemicals (99.99-99.999% pure). All compounds must be dried for one hour at 105 °C, unless otherwise specified. It is recommended that stock solutions be stored in FEP bottles. Replace stock standards when succeeding dilutions for preparation of calibration standards cannot be verified.
CAUTION: Many of these chemicals are extremely toxic if inhaled or swallowed (Section 5.1). Wash hands thoroughly after handling.
Typical stock solution preparation procedures follow for 1 L quantities, but for the purpose of pollution prevention, the analyst is encouraged to prepare smaller quantities when possible. Concentrations are calculated based upon the weight of the pure element or upon the weight of the compound multiplied
From pure element,
7.8.1 Aluminum solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Al: Dissolve 1.000 g of aluminum metal, weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in an acid mixture of 4.0 mL of (1+1) HCl and 1 mL of concentrated HNO
7.8.2 Antimony solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Sb: Dissolve 1.000 g of antimony powder, weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in 20.0 mL (1+1) HNO
7.8.3 Arsenic solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg As: Dissolve 1.320 g of As
7.8.4 Barium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Ba: Dissolve 1.437 g BaCO
7.8.5 Beryllium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Be:
7.8.6 Boron solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg B:
7.8.7 Cadmium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Cd: Dissolve 1.000 g Cd metal, acid cleaned with (1+9) HNO
7.8.8 Calcium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Ca: Suspend 2.498 g CaCO
7.8.9 Cerium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Ce: Slurry 1.228 g CeO
7.8.10 Chromium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Cr: Dissolve 1.923 g CrO
7.8.11 Cobalt solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Co: Dissolve 1.000 g Co metal, acid cleaned with (1+9) HNO
7.8.12 Copper solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Cu: Dissolve 1.000 g Cu metal, acid cleaned with (1+9) HNO
7.8.13 Iron solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Fe: Dissolve 1.000 g Fe metal, acid cleaned with (1+1) HCl, weighed accurately to four significant figures, in 100 mL (1+1) HCl with heating to effect dissolution. Let solution cool and dilute with reagent water in a 1 L volumetric flask.
7.8.14 Lead solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Pb: Dissolve 1.599 g Pb(NO
7.8.15 Lithium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Li: Dissolve 5.324 g Li
7.8.16 Magnesium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Mg: Dissolve 1.000 g cleanly polished Mg ribbon, accurately weighed to at least four significant figures, in slowly added 5.0 mL (1+1) HCl (CAUTION: reaction is vigorous). Add 20.0 mL (1+1) HNO
7.8.17 Manganese solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Mn: Dissolve 1.000 g of manganese metal, weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in 50 mL (1+1) HNO
7.8.18 Mercury solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Hg:
7.8.19 Molybdenum solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Mo: Dissolve 1.500 g MoO
7.8.20 Nickel solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Ni: Dissolve 1.000 g of nickel metal, weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in 20.0 mL hot concentrated HNO
7.8.21 Phosphorus solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg P: Dissolve 3.745 g NH
7.8.22 Potassium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg K: Dissolve 1.907 g KCl (K fraction = 0.5244) dried at 110 °C, weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in reagent water, add 20 mL (1+1) HCl and dilute to volume in a 1 L volumetric flask with reagent water.
7.8.23 Selenium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Se: Dissolve 1.405 g SeO
7.8.24 Silica solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg SiO
7.8.25 Silver solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Ag: Dissolve 1.000 g Ag metal, weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in 80 mL (1+1) HNO
7.8.26 Sodium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Na: Dissolve 2.542 g NaCl (Na fraction = 0.3934), weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in reagent water. Add 10.0 mL concentrated HNO
7.8.27 Strontium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Sr: Dissolve 1.685 g SrCO
7.8.28 Thallium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Tl: Dissolve 1.303 g TlNO
7.8.29 Tin solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Sn: Dissolve 1.000 g Sn shot, weighed accurately to at least four significant figures, in an acid mixture of 10.0 mL concentrated HCl and 2.0 mL (1+1) HNO
7.8.30 Titanium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Ti:
7.8.31 Vanadium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg V: Dissolve 1.000 g V metal, acid cleaned with (1+9) HNO
7.8.32 Yttrium solution, stock 1 mL = 1000 µg Y: Dissolve 1.270 g Y
7.8.33 Zinc solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 µg Zn: Dissolve 1.000 g Zn metal, acid cleaned with (1+9) HNO
7.9 Mixed Calibration Standard Solutions—For the analysis of total recoverable digested samples prepare mixed calibration standard solutions (see Table 3) by combining appropriate volumes of the stock solutions in 500 mL volumetric flasks containing 20 mL (1+1) HNO
Note: If the addition of silver to the recommended mixed-acid calibration standard results in an initial precipitation, add 15 mL of reagent water and warm the flask until the solution clears. For this acid combination, the silver concentration should be limited to 0.5 mg/L.
7.10 Blanks—Four types of blanks are required for the analysis. The calibration blank is used in establishing the analytical curve, the laboratory reagent blank is used to assess possible contamination from the sample preparation procedure, the laboratory fortified blank is used to assess routine laboratory performance and a rinse blank is used to flush the instrument uptake system and nebulizer between standards, check solutions, and samples to reduce memory interferences.
7.10.1 The calibration blank for aqueous samples and extracts is prepared by acidifying reagent water to the same concentrations of the acids as used for the standards. The calibration blank should be stored in a FEP bottle.
7.10.2 The laboratory reagent blank (LRB) must contain all the reagents in the same volumes as used in the processing of the samples. The LRB must be carried through the same entire preparation scheme as the samples including sample digestion, when applicable.
7.10.3 The laboratory fortified blank (LFB) is prepared by fortifying an aliquot of the laboratory reagent blank with all analytes to a suitable concentration using the following recommended criteria: Ag 0.1 mg/L, K 5.0 mg/L and all other analytes 0.2 mg/L or a concentration approximately 100 times their respective MDL, whichever is greater. The LFB must be carried through the same entire preparation scheme as the samples including sample digestion, when applicable.
7.10.4 The rinse blank is prepared by acidifying reagent water to the same concentrations of acids as used in the calibration blank and stored in a convenient manner.
7.11 Instrument Performance Check (IPC) Solution—The IPC solution is used to periodically verify instrument performance during analysis. It should be prepared in the same acid mixture as the calibration standards by combining method analytes at appropriate concentrations. Silver must be limited to <0.5 mg/L; while potassium and phosphorus because of higher MDLs and silica because of potential contamination should be at concentrations of 10 mg/L. For other analytes a concentration of 2 mg/L is recommended. The IPC solution should be prepared from the same standard stock solutions used to prepare the calibration standards and stored in an FEP bottle. Agency programs may specify or request that additional instrument performance check solutions be prepared at specified concentrations in order to meet particular program needs.
7.12 Quality Control Sample (QCS)—Analysis of a QCS is required for initial and periodic verification of calibration standards or stock standard solutions in order to verify instrument performance. The QCS must be obtained from an outside source different from the standard stock solutions and prepared in the same acid mixture as the calibration standards. The concentration of the analytes in the QCS solution should be 1 mg/L, except silver, which must be limited to a concentration of 0.5 mg/L for solution stability. The QCS solution should be stored in a FEP bottle and analyzed as needed to meet data-quality needs. A fresh solution should be prepared quarterly or more frequently as needed.
7.13 Spectral Interference Check (SIC) Solutions—When interelement corrections are
7.13.1 SIC solutions containing (a) 300 mg/L Fe; (b) 200 mg/L AL; (c) 50 mg/L Ba; (d) 50 mg/L Be; (e) 50 mg/L Cd; (f) 50 mg/L Ce; (g) 50 mg/L Co; (h) 50 mg/L Cr; (i) 50 mg/L Cu; (j) 50 mg/L Mn; (k) 50 mg/L Mo; (l) 50 mg/L Ni; (m) 50 mg/L Sn; (n) 50 mg/L SiO
Note: If wavelengths other than those recommended in Table 1 are used, other solutions different from those above (a through q) may be required.
7.13.2 For interferences from iron and aluminum, only those correction factors (positive or negative) when multiplied by 100 to calculate apparent analyte concentrations that exceed the determined analyte IDL or fall below the lower 3-sigma control limit of the calibration blank need be tested on a daily basis.
7.13.3 For the other interfering elements, only those correction factors (positive or negative) when multiplied by 10 to calculate apparent analyte concentrations that exceed the determined analyte IDL or fall below the lower 3-sigma control limit of the calibration blank need be tested on a daily basis.
7.13.4 If the correction routine is operating properly, the determined apparent analyte(s) concentration from analysis of each interference solution (a through q) should fall within a specific concentration range bracketing the calibration blank. This concentration range is calculated by multiplying the concentration of the interfering element by the value of the correction factor being tested and dividing by 10. If after subtraction of the calibration blank the apparent analyte concentration is outside (above or below) this range, a change in the correction factor of more than 10% should be suspected. The cause of the change should be determined and corrected and the correction factor should be updated.
Note: The SIC solution should be analyzed more than once to confirm a change has occurred with adequate rinse time between solutions and before subsequent analysis of the calibration blank.
7.13.5 If the correction factors tested on a daily basis are found to be within the 10% criteria for five consecutive days, the required verification frequency of those factors in compliance may be extended to a weekly basis. Also, if the nature of the samples analyzed is such (e.g., finished drinking water) that they do not contain concentrations of the interfering elements at the 10 mg/L level, daily verification is not required; however, all interelement spectral correction factors must be verified annually and updated, if necessary.
7.13.6 If the instrument does not display negative concentration values, fortify the SIC solutions with the elements of interest at 1 mg/L and test for analyte recoveries that are below 95%. In the absence of measurable analyte, over-correction could go undetected because a negative value could be reported as zero.
7.14 For instruments without interelement correction capability or when interelement corrections are not used, SIC solutions (containing similar concentrations of the major components in the samples, e.g., 10 mg/L) can serve to verify the absence of effects at the wavelengths selected. These data must be kept on file with the sample analysis data. If the SIC solution confirms an operative interference that is 10% of the analyte concentration, the analyte must be determined using a wavelength and background correction location free of the interference or by another approved test procedure. Users are advised that high salt concentrations can cause analyte signal suppressions and confuse interference tests.
7.15 Plasma Solution—The plasma solution is used for determining the optimum viewing height of the plasma above the work coil prior to using the method (Section 10.2). The solution is prepared by adding a 5 mL aliquot from each of the stock standard solutions of arsenic, lead, selenium, and thallium to a mixture of 20 mL (1+1) nitric acid and 20 mL (1+1) hydrochloric acid and diluting to 500 mL with reagent water. Store in a FEP bottle.
8.1 Prior to the collection of an aqueous sample, consideration should be given to the type of data required, (
8.2 For the determination of the dissolved elements, the sample must be filtered through a 0.45 µm pore diameter membrane filter at the time of collection or as soon
8.3 For the determination of total recoverable elements in aqueous samples, samples are not filtered, but acidified with (1+1) nitric acid to pH <2 (normally, 3 mL of (1+1) acid per liter of sample is sufficient for most ambient and drinking water samples). Preservation may be done at the time of collection, however, to avoid the hazards of strong acids in the field, transport restrictions, and possible contamination it is recommended that the samples be returned to the laboratory within two weeks of collection and acid preserved upon receipt in the laboratory. Following acidification, the sample should be mixed, held for 16 hours, and then verified to be pH <2 just prior withdrawing an aliquot for processing or “direct analysis”. If for some reason such as high alkalinity the sample pH is verified to be >2, more acid must be added and the sample held for 16 hours until verified to be pH <2. See Section 8.1.
Note: When the nature of the sample is either unknown or is known to be hazardous, acidification should be done in a fume hood. See Section 5.2.
8.4 Solid samples require no preservation prior to analysis other than storage at 4 °C. There is no established holding time limitation for solid samples.
8.5 For aqueous samples, a field blank should be prepared and analyzed as required by the data user. Use the same container and acid as used in sample collection.
9.1 Each laboratory using this method is required to operate a formal quality control (QC) program. The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability, and the periodic analysis of laboratory reagent blanks, fortified blanks and other laboratory solutions as a continuing check on performance. The laboratory is required to maintain performance records that define the quality of the data thus generated.
9.2 Initial Demonstration of Performance (mandatory).
9.2.1 The initial demonstration of performance is used to characterize instrument performance (determination of linear dynamic ranges and analysis of quality control samples) and laboratory performance (determination of method detection limits) prior to analyses conducted by this method.
9.2.2 Linear dynamic range (LDR)—The upper limit of the LDR must be established for each wavelength utilized. It must be determined from a linear calibration prepared in the normal manner using the established analytical operating procedure for the instrument. The LDR should be determined by analyzing succeedingly higher standard concentrations of the analyte until the observed analyte concentration is no more than 10% below the stated concentration of the standard. Determined LDRs must be documented and kept on file. The LDR which may be used for the analysis of samples should be judged by the analyst from the resulting data. Determined sample analyte concentrations that are greater than 90% of the determined upper LDR limit must be diluted and reanalyzed. The LDRs should be verified annually or whenever, in the judgment of the analyst, a change in analytical performance caused by either a change in instrument hardware or operating conditions would dictate they be redetermined.
9.2.3 Quality control sample (QCS)—When beginning the use of this method, on a quarterly basis, after the preparation of stock or calibration standard solutions or as required to meet data-quality needs, verify the calibration standards and acceptable instrument performance with the preparation and analyses of a QCS (Section 7.12). To verify the calibration standards the determined mean concentrations from three analyses of the QCS must be within 5% of the stated values. If the calibration standard cannot be verified, performance of the determinative step of the method is unacceptable. The source of the problem must be identified and corrected before either proceeding on with the initial determination of method detection limits or continuing with on-going analyses.
9.2.4 Method detection limit (MDL)—MDLs must be established for all wavelengths utilized, using reagent water (blank) fortified at a concentration of two to three times the estimated instrument detection limit.
Note: If additional confirmation is desired, reanalyze the seven replicate aliquots on two
The MDLs must be sufficient to detect analytes at the required levels according to compliance monitoring regulation (Section 1.2). MDLs should be determined annually, when a new operator begins work or whenever, in the judgment of the analyst, a change in analytical performance caused by either a change in instrument hardware or operating conditions would dictate they be redetermined.
9.3 Assessing Laboratory Performance (mandatory)
9.3.1 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB)—The laboratory must analyze at least one LRB (Section 7.10.2) with each batch of 20 or fewer samples of the same matrix. LRB data are used to assess contamination from the laboratory environment. LRB values that exceed the MDL indicate laboratory or reagent contamination should be suspected. When LRB values constitute 10% or more of the analyte level determined for a sample or is 2.2 times the analyte MDL whichever is greater, fresh aliquots of the samples must be prepared and analyzed again for the affected analytes after the source of contamination has been corrected and acceptable LRB values have been obtained.
9.3.2 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB)—The laboratory must analyze at least one LFB (Section 7.10.3) with each batch of samples. Calculate accuracy as percent recovery using the following equation:
If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the required control limits of 85-115%, that analyte is judged out of control, and the source of the problem should be identified and resolved before continuing analyses.
9.3.3 The laboratory must use LFB analyses data to assess laboratory performance against the required control limits of 85-115% (Section 9.3.2). When sufficient internal performance data become available (usually a minimum of 20-30 analyses), optional control limits can be developed from the mean percent recovery (x) and the standard deviation (S) of the mean percent recovery. These data can be used to establish the upper and lower control limits as follows:
The optional control limits must be equal to or better than the required control limits of 85-115%. After each five to 10 new recovery measurements, new control limits can be calculated using only the most recent 20-30 data points. Also, the standard deviation (S) data should be used to establish an on-going precision statement for the level of concentrations included in the LFB. These data must be kept on file and be available for review.
9.3.4 Instrument performance check (IPC) solution—For all determinations the laboratory must analyze the IPC solution (Section 7.11) and a calibration blank immediately following daily calibration, after every 10th sample (or more frequently, if required) and at the end of the sample run. Analysis of the calibration blank should always be <the analyte IDL, but greater than the lower 3-sigma control limit of the calibration blank. Analysis of the IPC solution immediately following calibration must verify that the instrument is within 5% of calibration with a relative standard deviation <3% from replicate integrations 4. Subsequent analyses of the IPC solution must be within 10% of calibration. If the calibration cannot be verified within the specified limits, reanalyze either or both the IPC solution and the calibration blank. If the second analysis of the IPC solution or the calibration blank confirm calibration to be outside the limits, sample analysis must be discontinued, the cause determined, corrected and/or the instrument recalibrated. All samples following the last acceptable IPC solution must be reanalyzed.
9.3.5 Spectral interference check (SIC) solution—For all determinations the laboratory must periodically verify the interelement spectral interference correction routine by analyzing SIC solutions. The preparation and required periodic analysis of SIC solutions and test criteria for verifying the interelement interference correction routine are given in Section 7.13. Special cases where on-going verification is required are described in Section 7.14.
9.4 Assessing Analyte Recovery and Data Quality.
9.4.1 Sample homogeneity and the chemical nature of the sample matrix can affect analyte recovery and the quality of the data. Taking separate aliquots from the sample for replicate and fortified analyses can in some cases assess the effect. Unless otherwise specified by the data user, laboratory or program, the following laboratory fortified matrix (LFM) procedure (Section 9.4.2) is required. Also, other tests such as the analyte addition test (Section 9.5.1) and sample dilution test (Section 9.5.2) can indicate if matrix effects are operative.
9.4.2 The laboratory must add a known amount of each analyte to a minimum of 10% of the routine samples. In each case the LFM aliquot must be a duplicate of the aliquot used for sample analysis and for total recoverable determinations added prior to sample preparation. For water samples, the added analyte concentration must be the same as that used in the laboratory fortified blank (Section 7.10.3). For solid samples, however, the concentration added should be expressed as mg/kg and is calculated for a one gram aliquot by multiplying the added analyte concentration (mg/L) in solution by the conversion factor 100 (mg/L × 0.1L/0.001kg = 100, Section 12.5). (For notes on Ag, Ba, and Sn see Sections 1.7 and 1.8.) Over time, samples from all routine sample sources should be fortified.
Note: The concentration of calcium, magnesium, sodium and strontium in environmental waters, along with iron and aluminum in solids can vary greatly and are not necessarily predictable. Fortifying these analytes in routine samples at the same concentration used for the LFB may prove to be of little use in assessing data quality for these analytes. For these analytes sample dilution and reanalysis using the criteria given in Section 9.5.2 is recommended. Also, if specified by the data user, laboratory or program, samples can be fortified at higher concentrations, but even major constituents should be limited to <25 mg/L so as not to alter the sample matrix and affect the analysis.
9.4.3 Calculate the percent recovery for each analyte, corrected for background concentrations measured in the unfortified sample, and compare these values to the designated LFM recovery range of 70-130% or a 3-sigma recovery range calculated from the regression equations given in Table 9.
9.4.4 If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the designated LFM recovery range, and the laboratory performance for that analyte is shown to be in control (Section 9.3), the recovery problem encountered with the fortified sample is judged to be matrix related, not system related. The data user should be informed that the result for that analyte in the unfortified sample is suspect due to either the heterogeneous nature of the sample or matrix effects and analysis by method of standard addition or the use of an internal standard(s) (Section 11.5) should be considered.
9.4.5 Where reference materials are available, they should be analyzed to provide additional performance data. The analysis of reference samples is a valuable tool for demonstrating the ability to perform the method acceptably. Reference materials containing high concentrations of analytes can provide additional information on the performance of the spectral interference correction routine.
9.5 Assess the possible need for the method of standard additions (MSA) or internal standard elements by the following tests. Directions for using MSA or internal standard(s) are given in Section 11.5.
9.5.1 Analyte addition test: An analyte(s) standard added to a portion of a prepared
9.5.2 Dilution test: If the analyte concentration is sufficiently high (minimally, a factor of 50 above the instrument detection limit in the original solution but <90% of the linear limit), an analysis of a 1 + 4 dilution should agree (after correction for the fivefold dilution) within 10% of the original determination. If not, a chemical or physical interference effect should be suspected and the associated data flagged accordingly. The method of standard additions or the use of an internal-standard element may provide more accurate data for samples failing this test.
10.1 Specific wavelengths are listed in Table 1. Other wavelengths may be substituted if they can provide the needed sensitivity and are corrected for spectral interference. However, because of the difference among various makes and models of spectrometers, specific instrument operating conditions cannot be given. The instrument and operating conditions utilized for determination must be capable of providing data of acceptable quality to the program and data user. The analyst should follow the instructions provided by the instrument manufacturer unless other conditions provide similar or better performance for a task. Operating conditions for aqueous solutions usually vary from 1100-1200 watts forward power, 15-16 mm viewing height, 15-19 L/min. argon coolant flow, 0.6-1 L/min. argon aerosol flow, 1-1.8 mL/min. sample pumping rate with a one minute preflush time and measurement time near 1 s per wavelength peak (for sequential instruments) and near 10 s per sample (for simultaneous instruments). Use of the Cu/Mn intensity ratio at 324.754 nm and 257.610 nm (by adjusting the argon aerosol flow) has been recommended as a way to achieve repeatable interference correction factors.
10.2 Prior to using this method optimize the plasma operating conditions. The following procedure is recommended for vertically configured plasmas. The purpose of plasma optimization is to provide a maximum signal-to-background ratio for the least sensitive element in the analytical array. The use of a mass flow controller to regulate the nebulizer gas flow rate greatly facilitates the procedure.
10.2.1 Ignite the plasma and select an appropriate incident rf power with minimum reflected power. Allow the instrument to become thermally stable before beginning. This usually requires at least 30 to 60 minutes of operation. While aspirating the 1000 µg/mL solution of yttrium (Section 7.8.32), follow the instrument manufacturer's instructions and adjust the aerosol carrier gas flow rate through the nebulizer so a definitive blue emission region of the plasma extends approximately from 5-20 mm above the top of the work coil.
10.2.2 After establishing the nebulizer gas flow rate, determine the solution uptake rate of the nebulizer in mL/min. by aspirating a known volume calibration blank for a period of at least three minutes. Divide the spent volume by the aspiration time (in minutes) and record the uptake rate. Set the peristaltic pump to deliver the uptake rate in a steady even flow.
10.2.3 After horizontally aligning the plasma and/or optically profiling the spectrometer, use the selected instrument conditions from Sections 10.2.1 and 10.2.2, and aspirate the plasma solution (Section 7.15), containing 10 µg/mL each of As, Pb, Se and Tl. Collect intensity data at the wavelength peak for each analyte at 1 mm intervals from 14-18 mm above the top of the work coil. (This region of the plasma is commonly referred to as the analytical zone.)
10.2.4 The instrument operating condition finally selected as being optimum should provide the lowest reliable instrument detection limits and method detection limits. Refer to Tables 1 and 4 for comparison of IDLs and MDLs, respectively.
10.2.5 If either the instrument operating conditions, such as incident power and/or nebulizer gas flow rate are changed, or a new torch injector tube having a different orifice i.d. is installed, the plasma and plasma viewing height should be reoptimized.
10.2.6 Before daily calibration and after the instrument warmup period, the nebulizer gas flow must be reset to the determined optimized flow. If a mass flow controller is being used, it should be reset to the recorded
10.3 Before using the procedure (Section 11.0) to analyze samples, there must be data available documenting initial demonstration of performance. The required data and procedure is described in Section 9.2. This data must be generated using the same instrument operating conditions and calibration routine (Section 11.4) to be used for sample analysis. These documented data must be kept on file and be available for review by the data user.
10.4 After completing the initial demonstration of performance, but before analyzing samples, the laboratory must establish and initially verify an interelement spectral interference correction routine to be used during sample analysis. A general description concerning spectral interference and the analytical requirements for background correction and for correction of interelement spectral interference in particular are given in Section 4.1. To determine the appropriate location for background correction and to establish the interelement interference correction routine, repeated spectral scan about the analyte wavelength and repeated analyses of the single element solutions may be required. Criteria for determining an interelement spectral interference is an apparent positive or negative concentration on the analyte that is outside the 3-sigma control limits of the calibration blank for the analyte. (The upper-control limit is the analyte IDL.) Once established, the entire routine must be initially and periodically verified annually, or whenever there is a change in instrument operating conditions (Section 10.2.5). Only a portion of the correction routine must be verified more frequently or on a daily basis. Test criteria and required solutions are described in Section 7.13. Initial and periodic verification data of the routine should be kept on file. Special cases where on-going verification are required is described in Section 7.14.
11.1.1 For the determination of dissolved analytes in ground and surface waters, pipet an aliquot (20 mL) of the filtered, acid preserved sample into a 50 mL polypropylene centrifuge tube. Add an appropriate volume of (1 + 1) nitric acid to adjust the acid concentration of the aliquot to approximate a 1% (v/v) nitric acid solution (e.g., add 0.4 mL (1 + 1) HNO
If a precipitate is formed during acidification, transport, or storage, the sample aliquot must be treated using the procedure described in Sections 11.2.2 through 11.2.7 prior to analysis.
11.2.1 For the “direct analysis” of total recoverable analytes in drinking water samples containing turbidity <1 NTU, treat an unfiltered acid preserved sample aliquot using the sample preparation procedure described in Section 11.1.1 while making allowance for sample dilution in the data calculation (Section 1.2). For the determination of total recoverable analytes in all other aqueous samples or for preconcentrating drinking water samples prior to analysis follow the procedure given in Sections 11.2.2 through 11.2.7.
11.2.2 For the determination of total recoverable analytes in aqueous samples (other than drinking water with <1 NTU turbidity), transfer a 100 mL (1 mL) aliquot from a well mixed, acid preserved sample to a 250 mL Griffin beaker (Sections 1.2, 1.3, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, and 1.9). (When necessary, smaller sample aliquot volumes may be used.)
If the sample contains
11.2.3 Add 2 mL (1+1) nitric acid and 1.0 mL of (1+1) hydrochloric acid to the beaker containing the measured volume of sample. Place the beaker on the hot plate for solution evaporation. The hot plate should be located in a fume hood and previously adjusted to provide evaporation at a temperature of approximately but no higher than 85 °C. (See the following note.) The beaker should be covered with an elevated watch glass or other necessary steps should be taken to prevent sample contamination from the fume hood environment.
For proper heating adjust the temperature control of the hot plate such that an uncovered Griffin beaker containing 50 mL of water placed in the center of the hot plate can be maintained at a temperature approximately but no higher than 85 °C. (Once the beaker is covered with a watch glass the
11.2.4 Reduce the volume of the sample aliquot to about 20 mL by gentle heating at 85 °C.
11.2.5 Cover the lip of the beaker with a watch glass to reduce additional evaporation and gently reflux the sample for 30 minutes. (Slight boiling may occur, but vigorous boiling must be avoided to prevent loss of the HCl-H
11.2.6 Allow the beaker to cool. Quantitatively transfer the sample solution to a 50 mL volumetric flask, make to volume with reagent water, stopper and mix.
11.2.7 Allow any undissolved material to settle overnight, or centrifuge a portion of the prepared sample until clear. (If after centrifuging or standing overnight the sample contains suspended solids that would clog the nebulizer, a portion of the sample may be filtered for their removal prior to analysis. However, care should be exercised to avoid potential contamination from filtration.) The sample is now ready for analysis. Because the effects of various matrices on the stability of diluted samples cannot be characterized, all analyses should be performed as soon as possible after the completed preparation.
11.3.1 For the determination of total recoverable analytes in solid samples, mix the sample thoroughly and transfer a portion (>20 g) to tared weighing dish, weigh the sample and record the wet weight (WW). (For samples with <35% moisture a 20 g portion is sufficient. For samples with moisture >35% a larger aliquot 50-100 g is required.) Dry the sample to a constant weight at 60 °C and record the dry weight (DW) for calculation of percent solids (Section 12.6). (The sample is dried at 60 °C to prevent the loss of mercury and other possible volatile metallic compounds, to facilitate sieving, and to ready the sample for grinding.)
11.3.2 To achieve homogeneity, sieve the dried sample using a 5-mesh polypropylene sieve and grind in a mortar and pestle. (The sieve, mortar and pestle should be cleaned between samples.) From the dried, ground material weigh accurately a representative 1.0 ±0.01 g aliquot (W) of the sample and transfer to a 250 mL Phillips beaker for acid extraction (Sections 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, and 1.9).
11.3.3 To the beaker add 4 mL of (1+1) HNO
For proper heating adjust the temperature control of the hot plate such that an uncovered Griffin beaker containing 50 mL of water placed in the center of the hot plate can be maintained at a temperature approximately but no higher than 85 °C. (Once the beaker is covered with a watch glass the temperature of the water will rise to approximately 95 °C.) Also, a block digester capable of maintaining a temperature of 95 °C and equipped with 250 mL constricted volumetric digestion tubes may be substituted for the hot plate and conical beakers in the extraction step.
11.3.4 Heat the sample and gently reflux for 30 minutes. Very slight boiling may occur, however vigorous boiling must be avoided to prevent loss of the HCl-H
11.3.5 Allow the sample to cool and quantitatively transfer the extract to a 100 mL volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with reagent water, stopper and mix.
11.3.6 Allow the sample extract solution to stand overnight to separate insoluble material or centrifuge a portion of the sample solution until clear. (If after centrifuging or standing overnight the extract solution contains suspended solids that would clog the nebulizer, a portion of the extract solution may be filtered for their removal prior to analysis. However, care should be exercised to avoid potential contamination from filtration.) The sample extract is now ready for analysis. Because the effects of various matrices on the stability of diluted samples cannot be characterized, all analyses should be performed as soon as possible after the completed preparation.
11.4.1 Prior to daily calibration of the instrument inspect the sample introduction system including the nebulizer, torch, injector tube and uptake tubing for salt deposits, dirt and debris that would restrict solution flow and affect instrument performance. Clean the system when needed or on a daily basis.
11.4.2 Configure the instrument system to the selected power and operating conditions as determined in Sections 10.1 and 10.2.
11.4.3 The instrument must be allowed to become thermally stable before calibration and analyses. This usually requires at least 30 to 60 minutes of operation. After instrument warmup, complete any required optical profiling or alignment particular to the instrument.
11.4.4 For initial and daily operation calibrate the instrument according to the instrument manufacturer's recommended procedures, using mixed calibration standard solutions (Section 7.9) and the calibration blank (Section 7.10.1). A peristaltic pump must be used to introduce all solutions to the nebulizer. To allow equilibrium to be reached in the plasma, aspirate all solutions for 30 seconds after reaching the plasma before beginning integration of the background corrected signal to accumulate data. When possible, use the average value of replicate integration periods of the signal to be correlated to the analyte concentration. Flush the system with the rinse blank (Section 7.10.4) for a minimum of 60 seconds (Section 4.4) between each standard. The calibration line should consist of a minimum of a calibration blank and a high standard. Replicates of the blank and highest standard provide an optimal distribution of calibration standards to minimize the confidence band for a straight-line calibration in a response region with uniform variance.
11.4.5 After completion of the initial requirements of this method (Sections 10.3 and 10.4), samples should be analyzed in the same operational manner used in the calibration routine with the rinse blank also being used between all sample solutions, LFBs, LFMs, and check solutions (Section 7.10.4).
11.4.6 During the analysis of samples, the laboratory must comply with the required quality control described in Sections 9.3 and 9.4. Only for the determination of dissolved analytes or the “direct analysis” of drinking water with turbidity of <1 NTU is the sample digestion step of the LRB, LFB, and LFM not required.
11.4.7 Determined sample analyte concentrations that are 90% or more of the upper limit of the analyte LDR must be diluted with reagent water that has been acidified in the same manner as calibration blank and reanalyzed (see Section 11.4.8). Also, for the interelement spectral interference correction routines to remain valid during sample analysis, the interferant concentration must not exceed its LDR. If the interferant LDR is exceeded, sample dilution with acidified reagent water and reanalysis is required. In these circumstances analyte detection limits are raised and determination by another approved test procedure that is either more sensitive and/or interference free is recommended.
11.4.8 When it is necessary to assess an operative matrix interference (e.g., signal reduction due to high dissolved solids), the tests described in Section 9.5 are recommended.
11.4.9 Report data as directed in Section 12.0.
11.5 If the method of standard additions (MSA) is used, standards are added at one or more levels to portions of a prepared sample. This technique
For more than one fortified portion of the prepared sample, linear regression analysis can be applied using a computer or calculator program to obtain the concentration of the sample solution. An alternative to using the method of standard additions is use of the internal standard technique by adding one or more elements (not in the samples and verified not to cause an uncorrected interelement spectral interference) at the same concentration (which is sufficient for optimum precision) to the prepared samples (blanks and standards) that are affected the same as the analytes by the sample matrix. Use the ratio of analyte signal to the internal standard signal for calibration and quantitation.
12.1 Sample data should be reported in units of mg/L for aqueous samples and mg/kg dry weight for solid samples.
12.2 For dissolved aqueous analytes (Section 11.1) report the data generated directly from the instrument with allowance for sample dilution. Do not report analyte concentrations below the IDL.
12.3 For total recoverable aqueous analytes (Section 11.2), multiply solution analyte concentrations by the dilution factor 0.5, when 100 mL aliquot is used to produce the 50 mL final solution, and report data as instructed in Section 12.4. If a different aliquot volume other than 100 mL is used for sample preparation, adjust the dilution factor accordingly. Also, account for any additional dilution of the prepared sample solution needed to complete the determination of analytes exceeding 90% or more of the LDR upper limit. Do not report data below the determined analyte MDL concentration or below an adjusted detection limit reflecting smaller sample aliquots used in processing or additional dilutions required to complete the analysis.
12.4 For analytes with MDLs <0.01 mg/L, round the data values to the thousandth place and report analyte concentrations up to three significant figures. For analytes with MDLs <0.01 mg/L round the data values to the 100th place and report analyte concentrations up to three significant figures. Extract concentrations for solids data should be rounded in a similar manner before calculations in Section 12.5 are performed.
12.5 For total recoverable analytes in solid samples (Section 11.3), round the solution analyte concentrations (mg/L) as instructed in Section 12.4. Report the data up to three significant figures as mg/kg dry-weight basis unless specified otherwise by the program or data user. Calculate the concentration using the equation below:
Do not report analyte data below the estimated solids MDL or an adjusted MDL because of additional dilutions required to complete the analysis.
12.6 To report percent solids in solid samples (Section 11.3) calculate as follows:
Note: If the data user, program or laboratory requires that the reported percent solids be determined by drying at 105 °C, repeat the procedure given in Section 11.3 using a separate portion (>20 g) of the sample and dry to constant weight at 103-105 °C.
12.7 The QC data obtained during the analyses provide an indication of the quality of the sample data and should be provided with the sample results.
13.1 Listed in Table 4 are typical single laboratory total recoverable MDLs determined for the recommended wavelengths using simultaneous ICP-AES and the operating conditions given in Table 5. The MDLs were determined in reagent blank matrix (best case situation). PTFE beakers were used to avoid boron and silica contamination from glassware with the final dilution to 50 mL completed in polypropylene centrifuged tubes. The listed MDLs for solids are estimates and were calculated from the aqueous MDL determinations.
13.2 Data obtained from single laboratory method testing are summarized in Table 6 for five types of water samples consisting of drinking water, surface water, ground water, and two wastewater effluents. The data presented cover all analytes except cerium and titanium. Samples were prepared using the procedure described in Section 11.2. For each matrix, five replicate aliquots were prepared, analyzed and the average of the five determinations used to define the sample background concentration of each analyte. In addition, two pairs of duplicates were fortified at different concentration levels. For each method analyte, the sample background concentration, mean percent recovery, standard
13.3 Data obtained from single laboratory method testing are summarized in Table 7 for three solid samples consisting of EPA 884 Hazardous Soil, SRM 1645 River Sediment, and EPA 286 Electroplating Sludge. Samples were prepared using the procedure described in Section 11.3. For each method analyte, the sample background concentration, mean percent recovery of the fortified additions, the standard deviation of the percent recovery, and relative percent difference between duplicate additions were determined as described in Section 13.2. Data presented are for all analytes except cerium, silica, and titanium. Limited comparative data to other methods and SRM materials are presented in Reference 23 of Section 16.0.
13.4 Performance data for aqueous solutions independent of sample preparation from a multilaboratory study are provided in Table 8.
13.5 Listed in Table 9 are regression equations for precision and bias for 25 analytes abstracted from EPA Method Study 27, a multilaboratory validation study of Method 200.7.
14.1 Pollution prevention encompasses any technique that reduces or eliminates the quantity or toxicity of waste at the point of generation. Numerous opportunities for pollution prevention exist in laboratory operation. The EPA has established a preferred hierarchy of environmental management techniques that places pollution prevention as the management option of first choice. Whenever feasible, laboratory personnel should use pollution prevention techniques to address their waste generation (e.g., Section 7.8). When wastes cannot be feasibly reduced at the source, the Agency recommends recycling as the next best option.
14.2 For information about pollution prevention that may be applicable to laboratories and research institutions, consult “Less is Better: Laboratory Chemical Management for Waste Reduction”, available from the American Chemical Society's Department of Government Relations and Science Policy, 1155 16th Street NW., Washington, DC 20036, (202) 872-4477.
15.1 The Environmental Protection Agency requires that laboratory waste management practices be conducted consistent with all applicable rules and regulations. The Agency urges laboratories to protect the air, water, and land by minimizing and controlling all releases from hoods and bench operations, complying with the letter and spirit of any sewer discharge permits and regulations, and by complying with all solid and hazardous waste regulations, particularly the hazardous waste identification rules and land disposal restrictions. For further information on waste management consult “The Waste Management Manual for Laboratory Personnel”, available from the American Chemical Society at the address listed in the Section 14.2.
Two selected methods from “Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes,” EPA-600/4-79-020 (1979) have been subjected to interlaboratory method validation studies. The two selected methods are for Thallium and Zinc. The following precision and recovery statements are presented in this appendix and incorporated into Part 136:
For Thallium, Method 279.2 (Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique) replace the Precision and Accuracy Section statement with the following:
An interlaboratory study on metal analyses by this method was conducted by the Quality Assurance Branch (QAB) of the Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory—Cincinnati (EMSL-CI). Synthetic concentrates containing various levels of this element were added to reagent water, surface water, drinking water and three effluents. These samples were digested by the total digestion procedure, 4.1.3 in this manual. Results for the reagent water are given below. Results for other water types and study details are found in “EPA Method Study 31, Trace Metals by Atomic Absorption (Furnace Techniques),” National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161 Order No. PB 86-121 704/AS, by Copeland, F.R. and Maney, J.P., January 1986.
For a concentration range of 10.00-252 µg/L
For Zinc, Method 289.2 (Atomic Absorption, Furnace Technique) replace the Precision and Accuracy Section statement with the following:
An interlaboratory study on metal analyses by this method was conducted by the Quality Assurance Branch (QAB) of the Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory—Cincinnati (EMSL-CI). Synthetic concentrates containing various levels of this element were added to reagent water, surface water, drinking water and three effluents. These samples were digested by the total digestion procedure, 4.1.3 in this manual. Results for the reagent water are given below. Results for other water types and study details are found in “EPA Method Study 31, Trace Metals by Atomic Absorption (Furnace Techniques),” National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161 Order No. PB 86-121 704/AS, by Copeland, F.R. and Maney, J.P., January 1986.
For a concentration range of 0.51-189 µg/L